this is made audiobook in  mp3 of,

Flying Saucer Pilgrimage, 
Fall, 1965.

by
    Bryant Reeve; Helen Reeve;

found on
archive.org.

scanning, text mistakes may be here.

random numbers read are probably page numbers.

CHAPTER I, 

HOW IT ALL STARTED.

Henry was talking. “Here’s a man who claims he 
saw a ‘flying saucer’ and talked to the pilot. He 
says the pilot was from Venusl” 

Henry is a fabulous person. He had, as usual, without 
the slightest warning burst into our home in Detroit, Michigan. Anything new, exciting, beautiful, imaginative — 
physical or metaphysical — in this world or out of it would 
excite Henry to a fever pitch. 

It was November, 1953 and we were entertaining guests. 
Although the hour was late, it did not deter dear Henry. 

“How insane can these fellows get?” said I, not a little 
annoyed. 

“How gullible do they think we are?” exclaimed one 
of our guests. 

“No! Honestly!” cried Henry. "This is serious! This 
man has written a book on it. I sat up all night reading 
an advance copy. It is called Flying Saucers Have Landed 
and was written by Desmond Leslie and George Adamski. 
Here it is!” 

“Let’s see it,” came an excited chorus. Everybody tried 
to grab it at once. 

Being an engineer, a college graduate, and employed 
by a staid and respectable manufacturing firm, I really 
felt it was up to someone to exhibit shall we say a little 
dignity and common sense. Besides I had never heard of 
flying saucers, except through a few obscure references in 
newspapers which always ridiculed them, as of course any 
sane editor would — and should! 

So I sat back utterly disgusted while the guests and, may 
I add, my wife Helen pawed at the book like threeyear 
olds going after candy. 

“Look, it has photographs — real photographs of flying 
saucers!” shouted a guest. 

‘photographs my eye,” I yelled over the hubbub. “The 
man’s a fake. How does he think he can get away with 
this! He ought to be ”. 

“No, I feel the fellow is really sincere,” put in Henry. 
“And besides an Irishman in the first part of the book says 
there are lots of historical records about these things.” 

That respectful reference to the Irish slipped by unchal
lenged as the controversy in our home became hotter and 
hotter. The evening grew later and later. 

“If there is even a slight chance of this thing being true, 
it is the biggest thing in the world,” exclaimed my wife. 

“There’s only one thing to do,” said Henry dramatically: 
“Call the man up and get him to Detroit. Where’s the 
phone?” 

That was Henry for you. Direct action always at any 
cost! It was our telephone, but we were all used to Henry. 

Before I could open my mouth he had placed a long 
distance telephone call to one Mr. George Adamski in Val
ley Center, California, a man we never knew existed until 
a few hours previously. 

A tense silence settled over the room as we all waited for 
the operator to call us back — a hush of excited expectancy. 
My wife Helen was on an extension telephone with pencil 
poised to take notes. What a contrast to the previous bed
lam. 

The bell rang. Henry made a beeline for the phone and 
got there first. The rest all crowded around. 

Henry said, “Hello, operator, hello! Is this Mr. George 
Adamski? No? Operator! You say he has no phone. No 
phone!” 

“Well,” thought I secretly, “that ought to end this crazy 
business. Good riddance.” 

But this turned out to be wishful thinking. I had mo
mentarily forgotten Henry who was still burning with that 
unquenchable fire for things unusual and mysterious. 

“Look,” he suddenly burst out, “Is it worth ten dollars 
apiece to you to get George Adamski to Detroit to find out 

the truth about this thing?” 

The way he said it made you feel like a groveling piker 

— a downright worm — if you did not immediately jump 
to your feet with check book in hand to support so glorious 
and worthy a project. 

Grudgingly I said, “Sure, but, ”

Henry interrupted, “Oh, I know what you’re thinking 

— ten dollars isn’t enough ” 

Confidentially at that time my thoughts were along a 
rather opposite line, but before I could say a word Henry 
settled the matter by exclaiming inspirationally, “Then 
I’ll write Adamski tomorrow and invite him to Detroit to 
talk to us, and we will all work to get forty people to put 
up a like amount to cover expenses.” 

Well folks, that’s the story 1 That is the breathless way 
we got started on a “flying saucer pilgrimage”. Funny 
thing is, we didn’t realize until later the amazing path we 
had embarked upon. 

But it has been pretty breathless all the way. Little did 
we realize the interesting "saucer” people we were to meet, 
the places we were to go, the fascinating experiences that lay 
ahead of us and above all the earthshaking revisions in 
our basic life concepts that would occur in our quest for 

— what? 

What was this pilgrimage all about? What were we aft
er? What was driving us? What was the goal? 

Maybe we should blame Henry! Maybe some of his burn
ing whitehot enthusiasm for the unknown, the mysterious, 
the fantastic, the mystical, the impossible, rubbed off on us. 

But the goal really became just one thing — to know the 
truth about flying saucers! The plain unvarnished truth 

— shorn of all propaganda, all pros and cons, all “hooey”. 
We did not want opinions. We wanted facts. Facts that 
we could “put our teeth into” and hang onto and know 
that we had something solid! We wanted to convince our
selves, one way or the other! 

Now if some of you readers feel this same way, we invite 

you to relive with us our “flying saucer pilgrimage” — our 
search for the truth. We are not interested in convincing 
anyone else of anything. Far from it. That is not our pur
pose. But so many sincere people have asked us to tell 
them what we found out about flying saucers, that we de
cided we would try not only to tell about our experiences, 
but try to give our readers the “feel” of them so that all 
may judge for themselves. 

We will try to be good and forthright reporters at all 
times — telling you factually, to the best of our ability, of 
our experiences. Above all we will try to label our im
pressions as such, our conclusions as such, and any philoso
phizing we do as such — as our own, which you may accept 
or repudiate at will. 

This will leave you free to make up your own minds. If 
you come to different conclusions than we did — fine! No 
harm done at all. Each to his own. We are all individuals, 
with different viewpoints — all in different states of evolve
ment. Surely we are mature enough to respect each other’s 
views without quarrelling or giving way to undue emotional
ism. It would be a dull world if we all thought alike — 
wouldn’t it? 

So here we go! Take it easy because we are about to take 
you on a journey of flying saucer research which covers 
over two years of time and more than 23,000 miles of travel. 
And let’s argue all we wish — but let’s enjoy the ride — the 
meetings — the sights — the experiences — our “flying saucer 
pilgrimage”! 

CHAPTER II. 

    1. THE SAUCERERS START COMING TO DETROIT.

what is the right name for a person who contacts 
a flying saucer or a spaceman, or has some outstanding saucer experience?” Helen asked this 
question one bright March morning in Detroit in 1954. 

'Well I know some names the public calls them — like
wise the newspapers!” I replied. 

“No, that’s not funny,” she persisted. “After all people 
are contacting these things — having saucer experiences, and 
we need a name for them! Let’s see — oh, I’ve got it — 
‘saucerer’! How’s that, ‘saucerer’?” 

“Wonderful,” I replied. But the word ‘saucerer’ is not 
new you know — we have, I believe our British friends to 
thank for it. Of course the skeptics will just love it! They 
will think you are saying ‘sorcerer’ and be deelighted. 
‘Saucerer’ or ‘sorcerer’ — one and the same thing to them!” 

“And such levity I suppose suggests just why saucers levitate,” snapped Helen. “Let’s cut this out and agree on the 
term ‘saucerer’.” 

And so “we” decided to use the word “saucerer”. Incidentally who ever got the idea that women needed the vote? 
About half of the time I try to use the chosen word, it still 
comes out “sorcerer” — but maybe down the dusty roads of 
eternity the two words may merge a bit — who knows? 

GEORGE ADAMSKI ARRIVES. 

Our friend Henry was as good as his word. He wrote to 
Mr. Adamski and received a really sincere and beautiful 
reply. Mr. Adamski stated that he would gladly come to 
Detroit to tell of his “contact”, but that since he was not 
a man of great means he would need his expenses paid. 

That was a great day for the Detroit group. It buzzed 
around and soon had forty “sponsors” to help finance Mr. 
Adamski’s trip and two small lectures. The small auditor
ium of the Detroit Institute of Arts was engaged for this 

purpose. Our friends Henry and Laura and a young enthusiast named Ronny, and my wife formed the group who 
worked like beavers on the project. 

What’s more enthusiastic and joyful than a group infest
ed with the saucer virus? Who in blazes wants to stay on 
just one planet anyway! Ah, that spirit of adventure! The 
mystery of the unknown! Here was something new, exciting and unprecedented in Detroit, the city of automobiles. 
After all, what is an automobile in comparison to a flying 
saucer? 

Our home came to resemble New York’s Grand Central 
Station. The phone rang incessantly. Committee meetings 
lasted until late at night. 

Helen became so inspired she vowed that if the saucers 
turned out to be “real”, she would be a regular "Joan of 
Arc” for the “cause”. After that assertion, everytime she ran 
into a group of hardboiled skeptics, I would start wonder
ing just who was going to burn who “at the stake”! 

Train time soon was approaching. We were about to 
meet a man who had met a man from outerspace! Kind of 
a cosmic cousin once removed from outerspace! 

Henry waxed poetic as he proclaimed he alone should 
have the signal honor of meeting this exceptional man at 
the railroad station. Was it not he, Henry, who first read 
the book and told us all about it? Nevertheless the committee 
soundly voted him down and went in a body to meet Mr. 
George Adamski. 

There he was at the railroad station: tall, distinguished 
looking, greyhaired, wearing a beret that rivalled Field 
Marshal Montgomery’s. He was about 63 years of age. 
His parents had brought him from Poland when he was 
very young. He had to go to work at an early age and 
was forced to leave school. However his selfeducation 
proved to be astonishing. He was an amateur astronomer, 
philosopher and metaphysician. He was certainly an in
teresting individual. He spoke with a slight accent, but 
he had a grand smile and we immediately experienced a 

feeling of friendship and liking for him. 

We hustled him to his hotel; he was our first "live” 
saucerer in Detroit! 

A PRESS CONFERENCE EXTRAORDINARY. 

One of the first events scheduled was a press confer
ence. Representatives and photographers of the Detroit 
metropolitan newspapers showed up along with those of 
a Windsor (Canada) newspaper. 

Some of these newshounds — but not all — were pretty 
hardboiled skeptics. We had cocktails and luncheon, 
but the inquisition started almost at once. Frankly I ex
perienced forebodings. 

The scene was unforgettable. George Adamski sat at 
the head of the table. Back of him were "blownup” pic
tures of his telescope and his saucers. The newshounds 
deserted their chairs, crowded around him, and literally 
rained questions on their unpretentious victim. Ques
tions were fired so fast that they overlapped each other. 
From our viewpoint every approach, every ruse was being 
used to trip him up. 

We sat back in wonderment. With every passing mo
ment our respect and admiration mounted for this sincere 
and unruffled man. The questioning and photographing 
lasted several hours. Mr. Adamski was standing up under 
the barrage. He was doing more than that; he was grad
ually creating a miracle, a lessening of skepticism and an 
increase of respect! 

If anyone was "hot and bothered”, it was some of the 
newshounds. They were trying to move a rock, but the 
rock would not move. 

Smiling, courteous, friendly and unruffled despite some 
near insults, we felt that George Adamski did himself 
proud that day in Detroit. 

Next morning we all rushed for the news stands. To our 
great relief our guest had landed on some of the front pages 
in all his glory, and courteously though somewhat skeptically on others. 

I hope some of the newshounds read this book because 
we thought they did a marvelous job. Maybe they did not 
realize it, but at that time we did not know George Adamski 
any better than they did although we were in the role of 
“sponsors”. Just remember that flying saucers were even 
more incredible and fantastic then than now. Some of us 
even mentally put ourselves in the reporters’ “boots” and 
wondered what we would write for the papers if we had 
such a fantastic subject for our assignment. They handled 
it beautifully. They gave full vent to his story but took 
no responsibility for it, and they ended up with a polite, 
artistic and friendly question mark. After all, what else 
could they do? 

AN INCREDIBLE RADIO BROADCAST. 

However, the press publicity did not impress the radio 
stations. Laura approached them and was met with cold 
refusal. “Too incredible, apt to make us a laughing stock, 
can’t risk it,” were die general reactions. 

Finally as a special personal favor to Laura, one of the 
Large radio stations, WWJ, reluctantly consented to a 
five minute radio interview at one P.M. on a certain after
noon. Ross Mulholland was the redoubtable gentleman 
who dared take on this interview. 

Mr. Adamski went on the air with all the excitement 
behind the scenes of a premier performance. The in
terview started with magnificent questions by Mr. Mul
holland. Was it to go over, or was it to be a flop? We held 
our breath. 

The replies of Mr. Adamski were calm, convincing, and 
sensible. An unusual feeling of sincerity was sensed. A 
thrill stole over the broadcast room. Technicians and help
ers paused in their work to listen — almost in awe — to 
this simple man who told of his contact on the California 
desert with a man from another world. 

Mr. Mulholland encouraged those present in the audience 

and the radio technicians on duty at the station to ask 
questions. The five minute dead line came, went and died 
— almost unnoticed. The interest mounted to a thrilled 
tension. Other scheduled programs were cancelled. Only 
station announcements and short commercials cut into 
the interview. 

That five minute flying saucer radio interview in De
troit finally ended in a burst of applause one hour and 
twentyfive minutes after it started. Saucer history was in 
the making that day in Detroit. 

TWO SMALL LECTURES.

The Adamski small lectures were held in an auditorium 
in the Detroit Institute of Arts with a seating capacity of 
about 400 persons. They were limited to “sponsors” and 
their friends who wished to purchase tickets. The seats 
were “sold out” in no time, and the lectures were packed. 

The first lecture was entitled “What Is The World Head
ed For?” There was no lack of interest or curiosity. Few 
lecturers faced a more openminded audience. Yet after 
the first lecture we sensed a slight feeling of disappoint
ment. There were not enough “experiences” in it and 
too much philosophy and preaching — so said some of 
our friends. 

The second lecture was entitled “My Experiences”. It 
was much better than the first, and the audience as a whole 
was fascinated by Mr. Adamski’s stirring account of his 
contact on the California desert with a man from outer
space. He told how with a background of amateur astron
omy he first became interested in sky phenomena, and of 
the many days and nights he spent out in the open with a 
telescope and camera. After many many attempts he fin
ally obtained a few good photographs of large cigarshiped 
spaceships with their small saucers or scoutships. Finally 
a series of events led to his contact with a spaceman in a 
desolate region near Desert Center, California, on Novem
ber 20, 1952. There were six other persons present at this 

meeting. He also told of unusual footprints left by the 
man from outerspace and of how he gave to the space
man a photographic plateholder from his camera. This 
article was returned to Mr. Adamski twentythree days 
later when the spacemen returned and flew over Palomar 
Gardens, the place where Mr. Adamski was residing at 
that time. 

Most of the audience was delighted at this forthright 
account of his experiences. A few skeptics and scientists, 
however, voiced their disapproval, but their protests were 
drowned out in the general enthusiasm. 

After each lecture there was a question and answer peri
od. In a lull in one of these periods a deep booming voice 
from the last row inquired, "Mr. Adamski, what about sex 
on Venus?” 

It was none other than "Singapore Joe” Fischer, the 
world traveller and lecturer and intrepid Britisher who 
knows more about South Africa and the Orient than our 
own State Department! 

A tense hush fell on the audience. One could have heard 
a pin drop. I did not know whether to head for the door 
or wait to see what would happen. 

Mr. Adamski considered a moment, and then with un
disturbed equanimity replied, “Well, sir, if you went to 
Venus, I do not believe you would have to learn any new 
tricks!” 

I caught a swift glimpse of a few very dignified ladies 
desperately trying to keep a straight face — but failing. The 
rest of the audience broke into such an unrestrained spasm 
of merriment that soon everybody joined in. This lec
ture we felt was really a worth while affair. 

After it was over, Mr. Adamski was given no rest but was 
hustled to a reception arranged by his Detroit “Sponsors” 
in a nearby hotel. They all wanted a chance to meet this 
pioneer saucerer personally. He was finally prevailed upon 
to speak, but he spoke not of saucers but of — will you please 
guess what? The answer is religion! 

14 

We mention this because in this book we are trying to 
give you a true picture of the personalities of these inter
esting people — these pioneer saucerers who have labored 
to bring the truth about flying saucers to the public at 
large. We will do our best to take you along with us on 
our saucer pilgrimage and give you a first hand report of 
what the saucerers are like and give you a chance to judge 
for yourselves. 

I PRACTICALLY BUY AN INTEREST IN 
FLYING SAUCERS. 

Calm did not settle on our home after these small lec
tures. Far from it. Our telephone and the sponsors’ tele
phones rang day and night with demands to see and hear 
Mr. Adamski. The callers implied that we were attempting 
to keep Mr. Adamski from the general public. The public
ity had alerted hundreds of saucer fans now clamoring for 
Mr. Adamski. What to do was a question. We were not 
professional promoters but simple students and truth seek
ers. We had little knowledge as to how to go about con
ducting large public lectures. However, I must have un
derestimated our little groupl 

I came home tired from work one evening and was greet
ed brightly by my wife Helen with the remark, “Congratulations! You’ve just rented the Masonic Temple!” 

“I’ve just rented what?” I yelled. 

“The Detroit Masonic Temple — for the public to hear 
Mr. Adamski — only $1,200.00 — I signed you up!” 

To say that I was ready to “give the saucers back to the 
Venusians” was putting it mildly! By the time the atmos
phere had cleared a bit, I tried to realize through a sort 
of bluehaze just what had happened. “I” had practically 
purchased an interest in flying saucers and had become sole 
entrepreneur in a sort of cosmic philanthropic enterprise 
using the biggest auditorium in the state of Michigan to 
educate the dear public on spaceships! — Wow! 

“Say”, I yelled, “just don’t rent Carnegie Hall in New 

York City until I catch my breath —I”. 

“Now don’t worry” was my wife’s reply. “It’s going to 
be all right — you just relax and wait and see. ” 

And, confound it, she was right. These women — and 
their vote! 

THE BIG EVENT. 

The marquee of the 5,000 seat Detroit Masonic Temple 
was blazing with Mr. Adamski’s name and the subject of 
his lecture, "Flying Saucers”. I had not yet become accus
tomed to the difference in feeling of having a mere casual 
interest in saucers as compared to that of having a financial 
interest in same. The presale of tickets had not been too 
encouraging, and as we entered the stage door it started to 
rain. That does it, I thought, but wait — . 

Things were happening out in front. The ticket office 
was not yet open, but a large crowd had begun to line up 
to purchase tickets. Soon the immense auditorium began 
to fill with people. 

I was busy setting up a slide projector to use to throw 
original Adamski saucer photographs on a screen. Inci
dentally this proved to be a flop because the light was too 
weak. Please remember we were rank amateurs at this 
business. The screen on the stage needed adjusting, and 
while engaged in this adjustment I saw someone tampering 
with the projector which I had so carefully adjusted. I 
rushed back and told the intruder off in no uncertain terms. 
While this was going on, Henry came up and introduced us, 
and the young man turned out to be John Otto, lecturer 
and researcher on Flying Saucers. What an embarrassing 
way to become acquainted with someone I had looked 
forward to meeting for a long time! 

Shortly thereafter my wife joined me and told me it 
would soon be necessary to open up the balcony for practic
ally all of the 3,000 seats on the lower floor were already 
filled. I could hardly believe she was serious. It seemed 
amazing that there were so many people interested in saucers in the city of Detroit who would brave the rain on a 
Sunday night to hear about them. It just couldn’t be. As I 
would not take Helen’s estimate seriously, she suggested 
that I take a trip to the lobby and see for myself. I did so, 
and to my amazement the lobby was overflowing with 
people. Going outside, I saw a queue of people on the 
sidewalk to the end of the block — and the weather was 
still wet and nasty. I saw all this but still could hardly be
lieve it. 

The balcony was opened, and 4700 people attended that 
Saucer Lecture, the biggest of its kind to date. 

Unfortunately, as we viewed it, the lecture did not go 
off too well. As stated, the projector proved inadequate 
because the people in the balcony could not see the Adam
ski photographs of saucers. In addition, Mr. Adamski 
seemed under great nervous tension. He had to leave De
troit for New York that night, and no doubt he was con
cerned about making his train connection. The interest
ing details of his saucer contact so well presented at the 
second lecture were not forthcoming. Mr. Adamski men
tioned to the audience that a woman in England had writ
ten him her interpretation of the markings on the foot
prints left by the Venusian in the sand on the desert, and 
he added that he felt the interpretation was about ninety 
percent correct. The audience clamored for the letter of 
interpretation to be read, and precious lecture time was 
spent in the reading of this lengthy letter which we feel 
few people understood. 

The lecture ended with a question and answer period 
which ran into difficulties because of the size of the audience. 

The ending came within minutes of train time, so we 
had to make a mad rush for the railway station. We said 
goodbye to Mr. Adamski with regret. Since then we have 
been with him on a good many occasions — even in old 
Mexico. He is truly an extraordinary individual — a man 
of many contrasts, many moods, many ideas, and many ex
periences — different, so different! 

CHAPTER III. 

WE MEET TRUMAN BETHURUM. 
after this first saucer “invasion” in Detroit via the 

Adamski lectures, we had a period of relative quiet 

to discuss and ponder these initial footsteps in our 
pilgrimage to discover the meaning of flying saucers. 

We say "relative quiet” because saucer arguments went 
on at a lively rate in the basement recreation room of our 
Detroit home about every night. Willynilly our home be
came a sort of Mecca for those interested in saucers. People 
would call us and tell us of their own sightings or ask to 
come over and discuss the subject. We had made tape re
cordings of the Adamski lectures, and many who had been 
unable to attend these lectures expressed a desire to hear 
the tape recordings. Saucer clubs and groups were spring
ing up almost spontaneously. 

In passing, may we briefly state that in the year 1952 
or thereabouts there were some exceptional sightings of 
saucers in the Detroit area. Some of these were well at
tested by witnesses. We became well acquainted with 
some of these sightings, but it is not our purpose in this 
book to catalog sightings. This has already been done far 
better by others than we could do it. 

What we are trying to relate is that saucer activity seemed 
to have an unseen “ground swell” of its own and was ex
panding and not contracting, and we found ourselves right 
in the midst of this activity. 

A natural phase of this interest was an effort by our 
group and others to discover and read all possible written 
material on the subject. Saucer books were in great de
mand, and there were more of them than we suspected at 
first. Some authors were cataloging and discussing recent 
sightings of spaceships and other sky phenomena with 
great earnestness and seriousness. Others were delving into 
past records and coming up with citations amazingly similar to the current phenomena. Still others with more of 
a religious or metaphysical background were scanning such 
writings as the Christian Bible, Oahspe, and works on the 
prehistoric civilizations of Atlantis and Lemuria for evidence of spaceships in antiquity. All these researchers 
seemed to be finding references to spaceships. Was it possible that these were not new phenomena? To our utter 
amazement a startling mass of references from ancient records and writings seemed to point this way. Some saucer 
fans started compiling saucer scrapbooks from newspapers 
and periodical clippings. The size and extent of some of 
these were well worth noting. 

As for ourselves we decided to “go slow and hear every
body’s side” before we could permit ourselves to form any 
conclusions. We read everything we could lay our hands 
on in the way of both current and ancient material relating 
to the subject. We also studied all possible correlative ma
terial on such subjects as levitation, teleportation and simi
lar phenomena in an effort to throw some light on how 
spaceships could operate without fuel. We also wanted 
to meet and talk personally with the other witnesses to Mr. 
Adamski’s contact. Before our pilgrimage was concluded 
we were fortunate enough to contact four out of six of 
these witnesses. But above all we wanted to meet as many 
other people as possible who were having definite saucer 
experiences. We wanted as broad a view of this amazing 
subject as we could obtain. By this time we both felt that 
we must learn the truth because if the earth was really 
being contacted by extraterrestrial beings in large num
bers at this time, it was the most significant development in 
the world today. 

We soon realized that the type of people who were evi
dencing interest in saucers included some rather distinctive 
categories. There were those who had a serious astronomical 
interest, those who had a definite technical or engineering 
interest, and those who had a decided philosophical or me
taphysical interest. Then there were the science fiction 

enthusiasts. These latter were of little interest to us ex
cept for one amazing point, namely that “reality” itself seem
ed to be only a few steps behind their advanced imaginative 
efforts. That fact has never ceased to be a cause of won
derment to us. Last but not least there were the inevitable 
curiosity seekers and a sort of fringe of fanatics. These 
latter certainly furnished a sort of “comic relief” for the 
more serious research which we and others were trying to 
do. Some of these enthusiasts even routed us out of bed in 
the middle of the night to tell us excitedly that if we would 
look out of the window in a certain direction we would 
certainly see a spaceship, or even a flock of them! Maybe 
our eyesight was a bit weak, but we were never able to 
discern spaceships in the night sky, and we found this 
type of assistance a bit annoying. 

More and more the need of caution and care was im
pressed upon us if we were ever to prove to our own satis
faction the truth or falsity and also the nature of these 
sky visitors. We realized that many of the experiences be
ing reported by saucerers were without witnesses. In these 
cases we hoped to meet the individuals personally so that 
we could at least judge for ourselves, if not for others. We 
also decided to use the method of coordinating the experi
ences and observations of various saucerers to see if we 
could detect or piece together a reasonable “pattern” of 
information or knowledge. 

A new book: Aboard A Flying Saucer by Truman Bethu
rum was released, and arrangements were made to have Mr. 
Bethurum come to Detroit. We had read his book and 
were looking forward eagerly to meeting the author and 
hearing his lecture. We enjoyed his talk immensely, but as 
always we were more interested in the man behind the 
book, the man behind the lecture, the personality having 
the experience. In this respect we were quite fortunate 
because during their stay in Detroit Mr. & Mrs. Bethurum 
came to our home to visit us. We became so enthralled in 
his experiences that we talked until the wee small hours 

of the morning. 

Mr. Bethurum is a large, tall, and husky outofdoors 
type of man. His schooling has been limited to grammar 
school and a few years in high school, but he nevertheless 
speaks with an excellent choice of words. In his work he 
is an expert maintenance mechanic familiar with dredges 
and road building equipment and is highly respected by 
his fellow workers. We liked his simple, sincere and forth
right nature. 

We tried to put ourselves in his place as he related in pri
vate the highlights of his amazing encounters with space
people and answered our questions in the relaxed and un
restrained atmosphere of our home. We found that it 
means much to get away from the tense, formal and some
times hostile atmosphere of a public lecture where saucer
ers have to be on guard or on the defensive every moment. 
We feel that our best understanding of the entire subject 
has come about from these “relaxed” meetings with saucer
ers whom we were fortunate enough to meet. We cannot, 
of course, directly verify Mr. Bethurum’s experiences be
cause we were not present. All we can do is to convey to 
you our own impressions of the man and his experiences 
as we discussed them with him in our home. 

For those who are not familiar with his experiences may 
we briefly recount that on a July night in 1952 he first 
contacted a large round flat flying saucer in a desolate area 
near Glendale Nevada, U. S. A. The crew led him to the 
“captain” who turned out to be feminine instead of mascu
line. Footnote. He had the experience of actually boarding the 
spaceship and conversing with the captain in English. 
He later learned that she could speak and write several of 
our earth languages. Between July and November of 1952 
Mr. Bethurum made eleven contacts and boarded the same 

•This spacebeing gave her name as "Aura Rhanes”. The authors 
have felt that this might well be a symbolic name conveying the 
cosmic concept that “the aura reigns". Deep students of cosmic 
truth recognize that control of the aura is one of the cosmic steps in 
man’s regaining his lost control of himself and of matter. 

 
21 

craft on as many occasions. However he was not given a 
ride on the saucer. He went aboard it on the ground. Many 
details are set forth in his written account, and to us these 
details are worthy of intense study by any sincere researcher. 
Taken alone these details might appear to be too fantas
tic to merit serious attention, but in terms of the coordi
nating work of our research they are, in our opinion, of 
outstanding value as a contribution to our human knowl
edge of this vast subject. The details are not out of line 
with the larger picture of spacecraft, spacepeople and 
spacephenomena which gradually unfolded to our as
tonished eyes as our saucer pilgrimage proceeded. 

We were favorably and very deeply impressed with Mr. 
Bethurum’s unimaginative sincerity. It is no secret and 
certainly no unfavorable reflection on him that he felt he 
needed help in writing his book. The ghost writer “played 
up the cosmic romance angle of his experience and used 
words and phrases of a nature which he himself might 
never have employed. 

Knowing the man as we do, may we state that even after 
the greater perspective of our pilgrimage we still regard 
his experiences as some of the greatest contributions in 
the entire saucer saga. In our humble opinion, he had not 
only one of the greatest personal saucer experiences, but 
he had one of the hardest “rows to hoe” — because not a 
single friend had the courage to be a witness to the contacts. 
Moreover, his naturalness and simple honesty resulted in an 
account of his experiences uncontaminated by speculative 
science or philosophical propaganda. It was, in short, a 
priceless factual account. We often wonder whether if some 
of us ordinary mortals had those experiences we could have 
told about them as factually and sincerely as he did. We 
have learned that spacevisitors are quite “choosey” as re
gards the characteristics of those who are physically con
tacted, and in our thinking Truman Bethurum had certain 
qualities which made him acceptable for these contacts. 

Moreover, without any preknowledge on his part of the 

peculiar mastery which spacebeings are able to exercise 
over energy or matter, he told us the incident covering the 
instantanteous disappearance of his flashlight and the ex
perience of his seeing his spacefriends leave a restaurant 
while a companion whom he had posted outside did not 
see them come out. Serious students of this subject will 
understand the deeper inplications of these two incidents. 
However, Mr. Bethurum said he did not know how these 
things happened, they just happened. 

Regarding the inability of our astronomers to locate 
a planet called “Clarion” behind the moon from which the 
saucer came, we discussed this point with Mr. Bethurum in 
detail. From our discussion and questioning we gathered 
that the spaceship captain did not intend to convey the 
idea that the saucer came from a planet in our own solar 
system behind the moon, but that it came from a planet 
in another more distant solar system, and the phrase “be
hind the moon” was a general designation used for dis
tant outerspace. 

We have kept in contact with this pioneer saucerer by cor
respondence and know of his subsequent efforts to again 
contact this spaceship. We know that a spaceship has 
since flown over him twice but has not landed.* In these, 
his latest efforts, we sincerely wish him well. 

"More recently the authors have received word from Truman Bethu
rum stating that he is in Prescott, Arizona, that his contact with 
extraterrestrial beings is continuing, and that under their guidance 
he is endeavoring to establish a New Age "Sanctuary of Thought", a 
group dedicated to world peace. 

CHAPTER IV. 

DR. GEORGE HUNT WILLIAMSON. 

In June of 1954 our saucer horizon was happily enlarged 
by our becoming acquianted with Dr. George Hunt 
Williamson. He was being sponsored in a Detroit lec
ture by a close friend of ours. We looked forward to know
ing him because of his radio contact with spacebeings and 
because he was one of the eyewitnesses to the Adamski 
contact. In addition, he made the plaster casts of the foot
prints of the spacevisitor on that memorable occasion. 

We were very desirious of getting acquainted with those 
saucerers who were having actual saucer experiences and 
contacts of one form or another. We wanted to get the 
stories “behind” the books they had written — to get the 
real “feel” of their experiences so we could judge for our
selves. Also we hoped to get additional information which 
possibly was considered too advanced to be published at 
the time the books were written. May we state that we 
found “more than meets the eye” in most cases. Remember 
we are dealing with a subject which is literally “out of 
this world” or at least “out in front” of practically all 
branches of human knowledge. There are no convenient 
precedents to go by, and no help in forthcoming from ac
cepted authorities. Anyone who really wants to learn about 
our skyvisitors will find he has embarked upon a lonely 
and uncharted path. Possibly this is part of the fascination 
of such a research — it is real pioneer work every step of 
the way. 

Before meeting this saucerer personally we found out a 
few interesting facts about his background. He was born 
in 1926, which made him less than thirty years of age. His 
home is in Prescott, Arizona. He is married and has a small 
son. Despite his youth he is a Doctor of Anthropology 
and had distinguished himself sufficiently in this field to 
be listed in Who’s Who in America and other similar publications. He studied at Cornell University, the University 
of Denver, and the University of Arizona. During World 
War II he served in the Technical Training Headquarters 
of the U. S. Army Air Corps. His father is the probation 
officer for Yavapai County, Arizona. 

His greatest work in anthropology has been in his inti
mate studies of American Indians. An interesting sidelight 
on his energetic and forthright nature was his insistence 
on practically living with the Indian tribes which he was 
studying. He not only arranged to have himself adopted 
as the son of an Indian chief, but he studied and prac
ticed some of the tribe’s ceremonial Indian dances so suc
cessfully that he actually won several coveted prizes in in
tertribal competitions with his Indian brothers! All of 
this may seem a long way from flying saucers, but as a 
matter of fact it was his study of Indian legends which ac
tually led to his interest in, and remarkable experiences 
with, spaceships and spacevisitors. 

All this we had learned from friends before the lecture. 
Also we read his first book The Saucers Speak, which was 
coauthored by his friend Alfred C. Bailey. But nothing we 
had learned had prepared us for the three pronged sur
prise we experienced when we finally met him. The first 
surprise was his exuberant youthfulness. No wonder his 
intimates call him “Ric” instead of “Dr. George William
son”. Our second discovery was the extent of his own saucer 
experiences entirely independent of the Adamski affair. 
Finally, there was the depth and brilliance of his under
standing of the cosmic implications of the saucer pheno
mena. Here was a saucerer to whom the physical manifesta
tions of saucers were not nearly as important as the great 
vista of cosmic life and progress which lay beyond them. 

His lecture amazed us in its scope and breath of view. 
He told how his own study of American Indian legends and 
his wife’s study of Mexican Indian legends brought out 
the fact that primitive tribes almost everywhere had essen
tially parallel legendary accounts of their people seeing ro
tating wheels or whirling wheels in the heavens, sometimes surrounded by a cloud or by fire. These would descend to the earth, and out would step a fairhaired young 
man or “God” from the skies. He found that almost all 
primitive people throughout the world seemed to have sim
ilar legends. 

Later Dr. Williamson picked up and read a copy of Ma
jor Donald Keyhoe’s first saucer book The Flying Saucers 
Are Real. There immediately flashed through his mind 
the extraordinary similarity between these modern sky phe
nomena and those of the Indian legends. His interest in 
the modern occurrences finally became so great that he 
and a group of friends discussed possible ways and means of 
trying to contact the skyvisitors. They reasoned that if 
these beings had the intelligence and the technique for 
spaceflight, they certainly must have the technique for 
electronic and radio communications and the ability to 
monitor our radios and learn our languages. 

With characteristic directness he and his wife and a group 
of friends lost no time in trying to contact these beings by 
any and every means at hand. They started out with sim
ple experiments in various types of automatic writing, 
branched into coded radio telegraphy, tried out radio, and 
eventually some of the group reached direct telepathic 
communication. Between August 2 and November 1, a 
three month period in 1952 when spaceships seemed to 
be especially prevalent over the North American conti
nent — they achieved a truly remarkable series of contacts, 
mostly by radio telegraphy using the International Morse 
Code and 350 to 450 kilocycles. During this period they 
were able to contact spacebeings of a high order from many 
regions in space, to ask them innumerable direct questions, 
and to receive many informative answers. 

A few of the highlights of these high level contacts may 
be of interest to our readers. The code from outer space 
came through in a very strong and powerful manner, and 
the transmission was so fast that at times it was quite difficult to record all of it. On the other hand the spelling of 
the English words was often a bit crude and on the pho
netic side as if the visitors were not too well versed in our 
language. The spacebeings referred to their spaceships 
as “bells” — crystal “bells”. They stated that the space
ships burned no fuel but glided on magnetic lines of force 
and operated in a resonating electromagnetic field like 
a planetary body. The spacebeings discussed the atomic 
bomb, the critical condition of our earth and its inhabi
tants, and their effort to help us into a new age which had 
commenced for our planet. This point interested us espe
cially, because gradually in our pilgrimage we were destined 
to learn that similar statements regarding our earth enter
ing a very critical period were to be a part of practically 
every contact between earthmen and spacebeings. 

One member of the group asked the visitors why they 
did not contact wellknown scientists instead of amateurs 
like themselves. The reply was that they had done so, but 
that many in high positions would not listen. They also 
implied that they had contacted various earth governments, 
including the Russians. Mrs. Williamson was particularly 
interested in certain medical and curative practices, and 
a question of the following import was asked, “You have 
such tremendous developments in spaceships, etc. — have 
you likewise advanced in medical science?” 

The answer came back as an abrupt “No!” Dr. William
son told us that they were so amazed at this reply that 
he vigorously protested that such an answer did not seem 
reasonable. How could it be that they had the technique 
of spaceships but had not advanced in medical science? 
The reply in substance was: “Simple. No disease — no 
medical science!” 

On one occasion a friend saw what appeared to be a 
spaceship over the antenna of their radio shack. On an
other occasion a beam of white light was thrown from 
the sky down into the radio shack and the adjacent house 
while radio contact was in progress. Over this beam the 

spacevisitors apparently were able to discern everything 
that was going on among the group both mentally and 
physically. They even took part in diagnosing the illness 
of an elderly man in the house. This incident lead to a 
message which Dr. Williamson regards as one of the most 
significant among all the messages they have received. It 
was as follows: 

“Never fear the aged. They can help again when they 
are brought to life.” 

Dr. Williamson has his own interpretation of this mes
sage, but he wisely insists that all individuals must make 
their own interpretations. He has also become concerned 
that we prepare ourselves for the fact that “man” in outer
space does not necessarily always manifest in precisely the 
same human configuration as we do. Dr. Williamson also 
gave us this gem: 

“From our research, I have learned that man is not man 
because he has two legs, two arms, and two eyes placed in 
a certain position in his head, or because he is supposed to 
have come up from the anthropoid ape. Man is man be
cause he is a spiritual being. He exists throughout the 
universe, and as a race, man is an inhabitant of space and 
takes on certain physical manifestations or vehicles on 
certain planets to learn certain lessons and have certain 
pleasurepain experiences. We can liken our earth very 
simply to a school. The spacepeople tell us we are not 
going to get off this planet until we ‘make the grade’ and 
learn the lessons which this earth has to teach us.” 

This small saucer group tried to arrange a saucer land
ing and a physical meeting with their spacefriends, which 
almost succeeded. They were frustrated, however, by a 
series of adverse events. Later, four of the group were 
members of the Adamski expedition when physical con
tact was made with a spacebeing near Desert Center, Cali
fornia. In fact, Dr. Williamson made the plaster casts of 
the footprints of the man from outerspace, as already stat
ed. We talked to him at great length regarding this event. 

28 

and he endorses the factual account given in the Leslie
Adamski writings. 

We were very much impressed with his lecture. It seem
ed to us to present an outstanding balance between his 
own personal experiences, his unselfish and honest recog
nition of the value of the experiences of others, and his 
remarkable grasp of the nature of the spacepeople and 
their necessary but beneficient purpose in our skies at this 
time. Here was a little group of private researchers who 
were extraordinarily successful in achieving O. S. C. (outer
space communication) and who were learning something 
of the incredible powers, both physical and mental, of the 
beings in outerspace. 

Dr. Williamson has visited at our home, and we have 
been with him on numerous occasions. Months later, in 
May of 1955, after our return from Mexico, we drove to 
his home in Prescott, Arizona, to visit him. There we met 
his charming wife and young son. In his home town we 
found “Ric” to be a true westerner — cowboy boots, plaid 
shirt — really the outdoor type. We found him putting the 
finishing touches on a new book entitled Other Tongues 
— Other Flesh. His group has abandoned radio telegraphy 
and radio as a means of contacting the spacevisitors in 
favor of infrared and ultraviolet light beams. He and 
various associates are now diligently developing these pre
ferred methods, and they have already experienced some 
unpublished successes. The Williamsons certainly repre
sent “New Age” young people, and we wish them well in 
their latest efforts at contacting advanced beings in other 
dimensions of life. 

CHAPTER V.

DESMOND LESLIE COMES TO DETROI.T 

In October of 1954 the Detroit saucer enthusiasts had 
the opportunity of meeting Desmond Leslie, coauthor 
of Flying Saucers Have Landed. He had crossed the ocean 
from the British Isles a few months previously to do saucer 
research in the U. S. A. and, believe it or not — to meet his 
coauthor George Adamski, for the first time! 

It is amazing how these two individuals, living so far 
apart in miles and so fundamentally different in personal
ity, education and background ever got together without 
personally meeting, and nevertheless collaborated on their 
book. We at least feel it speaks pretty well for those unseen 
forces of nature that somehow bring such things about. 

Mr. Leslie has brought forth a noteworthy historical re
search on spaceships in antiquity. He delved clear back to 
Sanskrit records some 5,000 years old. As he told us in 
Detroit: “The farther back I went, the better became the 
record of spaceships!’’ Many of the early reports came 
from astronomers. 

We feel it is he, probably more than anyone else, who 
has aroused the present day world to the startling fact that 
spaceships in the atmosphere of earth are really not new 
phenomena. His historical research and Adamski’s modern 
contact with a spaceman were separate things that need
ed each other — and somehow they just naturally came 
together in their book. As a result, the book soon became 
one of the most widely read saucer books in the world. 

Mr. Leslie is a fine, tall, cultured young Irishman, who 
is a second cousin to Winston Churchill, was a Spitfire 
pilot in World War II, and lives part of the time in an 
old Irish castle. He lends an air of respectability to the 
saucer fraternity which is certainly an asset to so new a 
branch of human knowledge. He told us that he was the 
author of several novels, and that his publisher had suggested he write a fiction story on flying saucers. He then 
started upon his historical research and soon informed his 
publisher that what he had found was not “fiction”. We 
discovered he has a grand sense of humor and enjoys both 
give and take. His lectures sparkle with pungent wit and 
humor. 

Our group was exceedingly interested in learning that 
some members of the British nobility were intensely in
terested in saucers and were well versed in the subject. 

He also spoke of Lord Dowding, British Air Chief Mar
shall during the Battle of Britain, and his interest in saucers. Parenthetically, for those not familiar with some of 
the public statements regarding saucers made by Lord 
Dowding we give the following quotation: 

"I am convinced that these objects do exist and that they 
are not manufactured by any nation on earth. I can there
fore see no alternative but to accept the theory that they 
come from some extraterrestrial source.” 

Desmond Leslie gave a remarkable radio interview in 
Detroit. After the success of the Adamski radio interview, 
saucerers were now more welcome on radio broadcasts, and 
we made an effort to tape record these events. One of our 
favorite tape recordings is still that of Mr. Leslie’s inter
view, for it was filled with lively, informative and humorous 
interchanges between him and Russ Mulholland, who 
again officiated. 

Later Mr. Leslie lectured in the large auditorium of the 
Detroit Institute of Arts. A capacity audience of over 1200 
attended, and between two and three hundred disappointed 
people had to be turned away because of lack of room. 
This will give some idea of the interest that exists in flying 
saucers in Detroit. 

Mr. Leslie drew a hearty laugh when he told of his en
counters with astronomers. It seems that this saucer busi
ness was not exactly in accord with certain British traditions 
particularly in the field of astronomy. This fact brought 
Mr. Leslie into public and rather amusing controversy with 

no less an authority on astronomy than The Right Honor
able British “Astronomer Royal” himself. As we understand 
it, the Astronomer Royal allowed that it was politic to 
“bury the flying saucers” once and for all, and thus get rid 
of such nonsense forever. Mr. Leslie allowed that he had a 
better idea — namely, to bury the Astronomer Royall 
While the sparks were flying from this contact between the 
old and the new in Merry Old England, the British Air Min
istry dubbed Mr. Leslie the "Saucerer Royall” The term 
“saucerer” so amused and intrigued us that we purloined 
it for our pilgrimage. We hope our British cousins will not 
mind. 

A high point of audience interest came when this visitor 
to our shores touched upon the strange doings that went 
on at Muroc Air Base, California, in the summer of 1954. 
It seems that very suddenly soldiers outside the base, even 
those returning from leave, were directed away and told 
to “get lost”, while those inside the base were kept inside. 
There was plenty of “high brass” activity at the time and 
persistent rumors that a remote controlled saucer had land
ed voluntarily and was in Hanger No. 27. Many saucer fans 
were already familiar more or less with these rumors. 
Nevertheless, it was fascinating saucer “smoke” to many, 
and who knows but that sometime the government “of the 
people, for the people, and by the people” may haul out top 
secret file No. H. 27 and condescend to tell the “governed” 
a little more about the “fire” that caused the "smoke” — 
a little peek into what “gives” in the secret closets of our 
modern bureaucracy. Or was this all just some of our own 
efforts to reproduce a saucer? Who knows? 

Another high spot in the lecture was Mr. Leslie’s reference to the presence of flying saucers in the blasts of atomic 
bombs, as could be seen in certain photographs taken of the 
explosions. It is presumed that these were remote controll
ed saucers. 

During the question and answer period one talkative lady 
took up so much time that Mr. Leslie courteously but firmly suggested that she confine herself to questions rather 
than try to make another saucer lecture! This drew such 
an amen sigh of approval from the audience that maybe we 
need more British lecturers over here! 

Then a brash young man wanted to know what Sir Win
ston Churchill thought about saucers. It took a bit of gen
teel maneuvering to get around that one, but you can al
ways count on the Irish! 

A year later we saw the Saucerer Royal again when he 
had returned to the U. S. A. a second time and was lectur
ing in Columbus, Ohio, on October 26, 1955. In this case 
interest in his lecture was heightened by the fact that a 
publicized blast from our Air Force a few days previously 
had positively denied the existence of flying saucers, and 
called attention to its own development of saucerlike jet 
aircraft. 

This gave Mr. Leslie something of an uphill effort, but 
he handled it beautifully and directed much of his lecture 
to basic sightings. He brought out some excellent new sight
ings in England and one “contact” near London. In this 
instance it seems that a flying saucer knocked an English 
gardner off his bicycle. We do not wish to be facetious, 
but with the Air Force’s denial of flying saucers we began 
to wonder if this is not the very type of “contact” that our 
military “brass” badly needs — to be hit on the head with 
a flying saucer! Or would they still deny the saucers? 

He also brought out the point that if he had talked 
about television one hundred years ago he probably would 
have been put in a strait jacket; two hundred years ago 
he would have been burned at the stake for witchcraft! 

We enjoyed the Saucerer Royal very much and feel 
that he is among those chosen to bring the New Age mes
sage to doubting humanity. Cheerio! May our paths cross 
again! 

CHAPTER VI.

WE HEAD FOR OLD MEXICO.

I n August of 1954 Bryant retired from active “working” 
— at least that was supposed to be the idea. Actually both 
of us have found more to do in “retirement” than ever be
fore. We sold our Detroit home and bought a new car. 
We were fed up with snow and ice so we headed south for 
the lands of sunshine with Old Mexico as our eventual 
objective. We were in no hurry. We were relaxing, having 
fun. We had no particular program in mind other than 
going places and seeing things. If saucers came our way 
— fine! If not, fine again! 

We did, however, carry quite a saucer arsenal. But, it 
was not deliberately or aggressively premeditated! We had 
not even thought of the possibility of using our saucer ma
terial in a foreign country. The material had simply be
come important to us, and we wanted to study and reeval
uate it ourselves. We had quite a time trying to decide what 
to take along and what to leave behind — in other words 
what was “essential”. We finally had to “enniemeeny
mineymo” some of the decisions or “flip coins” to yes or 
no some material. If hunting and fishing had been our 
passion we suppose the car would have been loaded with 
guns, rods and reels. As a matter of fact it was weighed down 
to the "waterline” with saucer books, taperecordings of 
saucerlectures, a tape recorder, photographic equipment 
and the like. We thus set sail in high spirits for parts un
known. 

We steered for the little town of Princeton, Illinois, 
which was Bryant’s old home town. He was born there. We 
said hello to a few friends, deposited some excess baggage 
at the “Old Homestead” and then set sail for Dallas, Texas, 
where we had some “kinfolk”. 

“Listen,” said Helen as we sped along the open road. 
“I’ve been doing some thinking about this saucer business 

on our trip. We will probably meet a number of people 
and we may start discussing saucers. We need a system!” 

“A system,” I replied, “what kind of a system?” 

She answered, “Just a good system to feel out people to 
see if they are interested in the subject before we attempt 
to talk about it. You know, if you open up with the wrong 
people they just think you’re insane, balmy, pixilated and 
candidates for the little men in the white coats!” 

“You mean you would like a secret saucerpassword or a 
secret handgrip? How about wearing saucer buttons?” 

“Don’t be ridiculous. We might use this system. Say 
we are talking to people whom we have just met and at an 
appropriate lull in the conversation, I say or you say ‘What 
do you think about these reports we hear on flying saucers?’ 
Then we sit back and watch for the reaction.” 

“Fine idea,” I agreed. Let’s give it a try. Might be in
teresting but for heaven’s sake let’s not get involved with 
saucers — we are on vacation!” 

We did not have long to wait to give this system a tryout. 
We were dining at the Dallas Athletic Club with our kinfolk. 
Conversation was local, terribly local, and it gradually 
petered out. There came a “lull” just made to order. 
Helen jumped in pronto with both feet. 

“What do you think about these reports we hear on 
flying saucers,” she asked perfectly innocently, perfectly 
casually. 

Then came the deluge. “Of all the fools! What do 

they take us for. Trying to make money out of that, etc. 
etc!” 

It worked! It worked then, and it worked later. It was 
a priceless system. We adopted it as standard practice. We 
hope they had it in Columbus’ time. It could save an awful 
lot of wear and tear on the nervous system of progressive 
minded people. It worked both ways. In this case it 
brought out a negative interest, but it proved just as good 
in bringing out a positive interest. 

We remember one occasion later in a beautiful Mexican 

restaurant with a gorgeous patio. We worked the system in 
poor Spanish. Like magic in a few moments we were sur
rounded with travellers and natives and waiters all enthu
siastically telling us of their own saucer experiences and 
all eager to learn more. 

But to return to the Dallas Athletic Club. After the de
luge, we shut up like clams. The party ended, and our 
kinfolk moved toward the elevators. There they ran into 
a group of trusted friends. 

After the usual greetings and introductions, one of our 
party remarked, “We have been discussing the ridiculous 
subject of flying saucers! Isn’t it just — 

“How exciting.” replied one of the trusted friends. “Wish 
we could have sat in on the conversation. We saw one our
selves only a few weeks ago!” 

The expression on certain faces was worth remembering. 
And that is the way we found it everywhere on our trip — 
people who knew, and people who did not know — the one 
group gradually educating the other group to new hap
penings in our skies — and gradually, very gradually, to 
the discernment of the great cosmic implications. 

CROSSING THE BORDER. 

Late in October of 1954 we found ourselves crossing 
the Border at Laredo, Texas, into old Mexico and speeding 
along the road of adventure toward Mexico City some 770 
miles ahead of us. We had a six months’ Tourist Permit 
and a big round sticker on our windshield to prove it. 

Mexican Route No. 85! The Laredo road! Most "grin
go tourists” call it that. Incidentally, the word "gringo” is 
really “something”, if you understand it. Originally it was 
a word of disrespect meaning "unwanted foreigner” — some
thing like our expression “Damned Yankee” in our South
land. We often applied it humorously to ourselves and 
found that this tickled our Mexican friends no end. They 
are just about the most courteous and polite people on 
earth and would never think of using such an offensive 

word themselves. But whenever we referred to ourselves as 
“gringos”, they usually joined heartily in the laughter that 
followed. It often “broke the ice” of the impeccable for
mality with which they often first meet visitors. But, where 
were we? The Laredo Road! 

We did not dash madly down that road seeing only the 
pavement, the curve signs, and the speedometer — as most 
North Americans do. Far from it. We just loafed along, and 
we found the scenery beautiful, magnificent in fact. In
cidentally when you cross the border never refer to your
self as an “American”. You are a “North American” — 
because the people south of the border also belong to the 
three Americas! Bryant had lived many places in Europe 
and had travelled extensively, but he maintains that this 
drive was one of the most beautiful mountain drives he 
has even seen. No tourist guidebook or travelog has ever 
done it justice. The sunshine, the profusion of color, the 
white clouds in the blue sky and best of all the green moun
tains nearby backed up by endless towering peaks in the 
distance were something to see and remember. We were 
not even thinking of “saucers”. We had left them far be
hind back in the States. We were on a long vacation from 
everything, including saucers. We were conscious only of 
the grand sunshine, the beauty of our surroundings and the 
fun of exploring a new country. As we drove through the 
little town of Valles, little did we realize — well, later we 
will tell you about that experience. 

After four days of loafing and endless colored picture 
shooting, the “Green Indians” suddenly appeared ahead 
of us. These are the imposing bronze statues, one on either 
side of Highway No. 85, that silently tell the visitor that 
he has finally arived at Mexico, D. F. We were just as sur
prised as many visitors, to learn that the name “Mexico” is 
applied to the capital city which is located in the Distrito 
Federal as well as to the country itself. One can thus go to 
Mexico when already in Mexico! 

Disregarding all the warnings previously given us about 

the dire necessity of turning the wheel over to experienced 
Mexican drivers at the gates, we plunged forward into 
Mexican traffic — like the proverbial fools who go where 
angels don’t. If we were to tell you about Mexican traffic, 
you wouldn’t believe it anyway — so why try? There is 
only one way to find out about the “Glorietas” and the 
“Topes” and how traffic moves in Mexico, D. F., and that 
is to experience it yourself. How the Mexicans expect 
any “gringo” to find his way about with half the streets 
named "Transito” is beyond us.* But we finally made it 
and soon found a nice apartment on a street named for 
the famous British Scientist “Isaac Newton” — only they 
pronounced it “Eesak”. There we were all set for a wonder
ful rest and vacation in fabulous Mexico Cityl Relaxation! 
Wonderful word, grand idea — Relaxation! 

•“Transito” or direction of traffic signs are often more prominent than 
street names. 

CHAPTER VII. 

SAUCERS SOUTH OF THE BORDER. 
few weeks of loafing and bliss followed. But not for 

long, for Helen came upon a Mexican newspaper,

that printed an article on — well you have probably 
guessed it — on "Platillos Voladores” — the Spanish equiva
lent of flying saucers. Yes, alas the Mexicans also have a 
name for itl 

"Those blessed flyingthings down here,” I shouted. 
“What do they do — follow us around? Why don’t they 
leave us alonel We’re on a vacation, aren’t we?” 

“Looks mighty interesting,” remarked Helen, "mighty 
interesting. The article has some illustrations of saucers. 
Wish I could read Spanish better. Wonder who wrote it — 
ah, here it is — Senor Gebe — a Senor Gebe wrote itl” 

About that time our door bell rang, and Helen rushed to 
the balcony to see who it might be. It was "Joey”, a fine 
young Mexican lad, one of our fast growing circle of price
less friends in this amazing city. He spoke both Spanish and 
English and was thus a great help to us. Helen threw the 
frontdoor keys down to Joey from the balcony — a sort 
of interesting SpanishAmerican custom that saves a four 
story elevator trip. 

“Joey,” said Helen as he came in, “did you ever hear of 
‘flying saucers’?” Joey looked blank. "Platillos Voladores,” 
persisted Helen in her best Spanish, which incidentally al
ways threw our most dignified Mexican friends into hys
terics. Joey still looked blank. 

Helen then waved the newspaper at him and asked him 
to translate the article by Senor Gebe on “Platillos Vola
dores”. Joey politely did the translating, but to him it 
obviously was nothing but inconsequential sciencefiction. 
Why any North American bothered about such stuff was 
evidently beyond him. 

Then it happened — one of those innocent little things 

— based on sudden impulse. Before I could stop her, Helen 
was at our telephone trying in a horrible mixture of Span
ish and English to contact an unknown Mexican by the 
name of “Senor Gebe”. 

Totally unaware of what portentous things lay ahead, 

I was idly listening in, rather amused and enjoying the lan
guage difficulties. The voice on the other end of the line 
never heard of Mr. Gebe! 

'Well, who wrote the article in your paper? Somebody 
must have written it — it is signed by Senor Gebe!” Helen 
was getting a little out of patience. 

The voice on the other end suddenly became alive and 
remembered the article. It was the editor himself who 
wrote it! But his name was not “Gebe”. Those were just 
his initials: “G.B.” 

“Then may I speak to Senor G.B.?” persisted Helen. 

My friends, that did it. That innocent appearing little 
telephone call. We did not know it then, but it was destin
ed to change the whole course of human events for us. 
Gone was our vacation. Gone were our loafing and our 
resting. It started a chainreaction of fantastic events that 
were about to catch us up in a giddy whirl of Mexican 
Flying Saucer activities that would make our Detroit experi
ences look like slow motion. 

It seemed only minutes to us before Senor Gebe himself 
was at our apartment discussing “Platillos Voladores” in 
an excited mixture of two languages. I often wondered how 
he got there so fast without teleportation! He was deadly 
serious about the saucer subject, which really did amaze 
our friend Joey. Senor Gebe is a grand soul, and we even
tually became closely associated with him in many a flying 
saucer adventure in Mexico. We also enjoyed knowing his 
wonderful family. 

Helen presented him with enough saucer material to 
keep his newspaper busy for weeks to come, and when he 
discovered that we had tape recordings of saucer lectures 
by Adamski, Williamson and others, he insisted that there 

were hundreds of people in Mexico who would want to 
hear them. His predictions turned out to be an under
statement, as rapidly unfolding events were soon to indi
cate. 

Senor Gebe’s weekly articles on saucers created consider
able interest in Mexico City, and other newspapers began 
writing on the subject. Before we left the country, six 
months later, practically all the metropolitan dailies were 
carrying saucer articles, and since our departure a letter 
from our little friend Joey tells us that a new popular song 
a Mombo — is all the rage there entitled The Martians 
Are Coming. When we first arrived in the capital we 
could not find a single saucer book in Spanish, and the 
LeslieAdamski book in English was difficult to obtain. 
Gradually, however, this situation changed. A Spanish 
edition of this book was brought out during our stay, and 
many books on saucers in English began to appear in the 
book stores. 

The strange unwritten censorship or apathy that we felt 
in the States was not nearly as much in evidence South of 
the Border. In fact in South America, during November 
of 1954 the Brazilian Air Force held a veritable saucer 
convention with discussions, photographs and reports well 
publicized. But let us tell you what happened in our apart
ment in Mexico, D. F. It gradually became an unofficial 
headquarters for saucer interest in the capital. We first 
played tapes of saucer lectures and then were requested to 
give lectures ourselves. These lectures were given in English 
but were always interpreted for the benefit of those in the 
audience who understood only Spanish. Our library of sauc
er books were avidly sought after by many people who were 
actually hungry to learn more about this great subject, and 
we had a waiting list of those desiring books. Our acquain
tance grew by leaps and bounds. We could hardly keep up 
with the social engagements and commitments that de
veloped from this interest in spacecraft and spacebeings. 
Talk about “Cafe Society’’ in the Mexican capital, it was 

not onetwothree compared to the new and exciting “Fly
ing Saucer Social Season” that was gaining momentum all 
the time. It was nothing for us to have a saucer meeting 
with twenty or thirty guests in our apartment during the 
day, and then be invited to a charming Mexican residence 
for an evening of discussion on the same subject. Many 
people were sincerely interested in these objects visiting 
our skies. 

May we say that the people we thus met were wonderful. 
There was a large Mexican contingent which included such 
people as doctors, lawyers, newspapermen, engineers, sci. 
entists, artists, authors and military men — yes, even a General. 
We feel we must also mention our good friend Colonel “B” 
of the Mexican Air Force who was the Mexican 
authority on flying saucer phenomena. Keen, witty, agree
able, ever alert for new information, he was a most wel
come visitor. We were able to trade saucer information with 
him on numerous occasions for we were still in direct cor
respondence with many leading saucerers. When Colonel 
B could not come himself, he often sent a representative. 
Please note that these officers were not sneering at flying 
saucers nor were they muzzled. Far from it. They were 
fully cognizant of the existence of spaceships and were 
leaving no stone unturned to learn all they could about 
them. Many fine, highlyeducated and distinguished people 
came to our saucer meetings or invited us to contribute to 
their own meetings. Then there was a sizeable English 
speaking contingent also and a group of North American 
students mostly from Mexico City College where many 
classes are held in English. Mexico is sort of a crossroads 
leading to both North and South America. It was thus a 
fascinating and cosmopolitan activity — this saucer business 
South of the Border. 

THE UNKNOWN SAUCERERS. 

Please do not think for one moment that the contribu
tions were all from our side. Far from it. We met an amazing number 
of conservative and established people who had 
experienced remarkable saucer sightings. Men, women and 
young people started coming to us from all walks of life 
to tell us of their sightings. In fact one young Mexican 
arrived on a bicycle at six o’clock one morning at our apart
ment to tell us about his particular sighting. Please note 
that these saucerers could only be found when some sympa
thetic group of individuals got together and began to give 
a little publicity to the saucers on something besides a scorn
ful basis. We soon learned from actual experience that such 
groups became veritable magnets and began to attract the 
“Saucerers” that the world as a whole knows nothing about. 
We coined a name for these unknown people with saucer 
experiences. We call them the “unknown saucerers”. We 
found them everywhere we went. Natural shyness, modesty 
or fear of ridicule or worse, often hold them back from tell
ing their stories. But once they know that someone “be
lieves” in saucers and can be trusted, they will tell freely 
of their experiences. We believe this is a point well worth 
noting by sincere students of this subject. If we ourselves 
were able to find these unknown saucerers wherever we 
went, what about the number there must be all around 
the world! It seems to us a shame that the world does 
not have a great unprejudiced international clearinghouse 
for this type of information which could act as a magnet 
for international information on sightings and contacts. 
We must emphasize again and again the necessity for a 
sympathetic approach if any real good is to result. Possibly 
such a bureau could be established within the framework of 
the United Nations. 

THE FLYING TORTILLA.

As previously stated, it is not our purpose to catalog saucer 
sightings in this book, especially those which have not been 
carefully verified. However, there is one sighting we learn
ed about in Mexico which took place while we were there, 
and for a good reason we would like to mention it. It was 

reported as occurring near the town of Chilpancingo about 
180 miles south of Mexico City on the road to Acapulco. 
The report stated that a group of primitive Mexican In
dians, living some kilometers from town, had seen a space
ship land and had watched several persons get out of it and 
gather up samples of vegetation and soil. Incidentally such 
gathering of vegetation and soil by spacemen is nothing 
new in the accounts of sightings both ancient and modern, 
as many students of this subject will realize. We wanted to 
investigate this particular report very much and so did some 
of our Mexican friends, but with the pressure of other ac
tivities we never got around to it. What we want to es
pecially mention is that the Indians called the saucer a 
“Flying Tortilla”l Anyone who understands the Mexican 
“Tortilla”, which is like a flat cornmeal pancake often pat
ted flat with the hands and the part it plays as the “staff 
of life” to the humble people of that great land, will ap
preciate the name “Flying Tortilla”. Of all the “grass root” 
names to apply to a spacecraft we think it takes the prize. 
We never have liked the name “flying saucer” anyway. 
Maybe we should seriously consider the term “Flying Tor
tilla”! 

SKEPTICS & FANATICS. 

Possibly we have given the false impression that all of 
Mexico was interested in saucers. This was not the case, for 
we did run into our share of skeptics. We lived through 
some tough sessions as well as some friendly ones. We par
ticularly recall one occasion when a group of astronomy stu
dents invaded our apartment accompanied by their teacher.
 They came primed for battle and evidently hoped they 
had enough booklearning so that they would be able to 
discount the whole phenomena. They brought their text
books along to “prove” such things simply could not be. 
Fortunately, we had one staunch ally present, our inter
preter. As the discussion got underway, it began to gather 
momentum. If we had understood more Spanish we could 

have done battle more effectively. As it was, about the only 
Spanish words we could catch were “absurd! impossible! 
absurd! impossible!” — repeated so often they became mo
notonous. If you want to have fun sometime, just try 
arguing about flying saucers in a foreign country through 
an interpreter! But these people were sincere, and after 
all the saucer phenomena constitute a terrific upset to or
thodox knowledge. 

We also ran into our share of downright fanatics about 
the same as we had back home. After one particularly try
ing session with an outstanding example, I sank back ex
hausted into an easy chair and asked Helen why it was 
that we always seemed to meet more than our share of 
“screwballs”. 

There s an unseen law, she replied without hesitating 
which states that Like attracts like*, and you know the 
saying — ‘It takes one to know one’!” As time goes on I 
may inadvertently lead with my chin” on other issues, but 
never again on that one! Experience is a great teacher. 

WE WIRE PRESIDENT EISENHOWER FROM 
MEXICO CITY. 

On December 16, 1954, we were reading the newspapers 
of Mexico, D. F. They contained dispatches of a White 
House Press Conference held the day before in which 
a reporter asked President Eisenhower a direct question 
regarding flying saucers. The reply was along the follow
ing lines: 

With regard to these recent reports (of saucers) nothing 
had come to him at all either verbally or in written form. 
When he went back far enough the last time he had 
heard this talk — a man whom he trusted from the Air 
Force said, “It was completely inaccurate to believe that 
they came from any outside place or planet”. 

The dispatches also mentioned that Secretary of Defense 
Wilson referred to them as being too “dreamy” to discuss. 
May we state that we doubt if any other U. S. citizens have 

any greater respect and admiration for these two public 
officials than we do. In fact we regard our President as the 
greatest man who has occupied that office since Washington 
or Lincoln. We are grateful for his great services to the 
U. S. A. and to the world, and we hope we realize at least 
a little of the sacrifices, the responsibilities and problems 
of his office. So we trust that nothing we have done, or 
are about to say, will be considered in anyway as a criti
cism of so great a soul. 

But we do claim the privilege as free citizens of a free 
country to state our loathing for our defense department’s 
“policy” on the flying saucer phenomena. We think it is 
wrong. We think it is hurting the U. S. A., that it is an 
unworthy policy, and that it is hurting us in the eyes of 
the whole world. Also we have always felt that a matter of 
such cosmic import should never be relegated to our de
fense department alone. These dispatches confirmed our 
feeling along this line, so as free citizens of a free country 
we marched as a twocitizen protestcommittee to the Mex
ican Telegraph office and spent fiftytwo pesos and fifty
five centavos on the following telegram to President Eisen
hower: 

December 16, 1954.

TO: DWIGHT D. EISENHOWER.

PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES 
WASHINGTON, D. C. 

YOUR REFERENCE TO FLYING SAUCERS AT NEWS 
CONFERENCE DECEMBER 15 HAS ASTOUNDED US. 
AFTER MONTHS OF PRIVATE INVESTIGATION WE 
ARE CONVINCED THAT SPACE SHIPS FROM OUT
ERSPACE ARE MAKING A DETAILED SURVEY OF 
THE EARTH AT THE PRESENT TIME. WE BELIEVE 
YOU ARE BEING GIVEN A DISTORTED AND PREJ
UDICED PICTURE OF WHAT MAY BE THE GREAT
EST COSMIC PHENOMENON OF THIS AGE. OTHER 
COUNTRIES ARE BEGINNING TO RECOGNIZE 
THIS AND ITS IMPORTANCE. WE BELIEVE THE 

TRUTH BELONGS TO THE PEOPLE, AND THAT IT 
CAN ONLY COME FORTH BY OPENLY AND PUB
LICLY APPOINTING A RECEPTIVE AND UNBIASED 
SCIENTIFIC COMMISSION TO INVESTIGATE AND 
REPORT. 

(Signed) Bryant & Helen Reeve 
U. S. Citizens.

Needless to say we did not receive a reply — no, not even 
from the White House janitorl 

CHAPTER VIII. 

NATIONAL GOVERNMENTS 
AND FLYING SAUCERS.
 
his leads us to a discussion of national governments 

and their attitudes toward the flying saucer phenomena. Of all the questions asked us, one of the 
most common has been, “Why don’t the great national 
governments of the world openly acknowledge flying sauc
ers and tell the people what they know about them?” Cer
tainly this is a reasonable, natural and legitimate question, 
and it deserves a great measure of intelligent consideration. 

May we say at the start that some governments and some 
nations are far more open in regard to flying saucers than 
others. Canada, England, and some countries “south of 
the border” are among those more openly interested in the 
subject. As stated before, the Brazilian Air Force held a 
convention on flying saucers in 1954. Outside of the dicta
torships, the greatest official secrecy seems to us to exist in 
the United States of America, which oddly enough is sup
posed to be the most democratic nation on earth. 

What is back of official secrecy in national governments? 
We diligently made a “collection of reasons” during our 
pilgrimage gathered from many sources, including talks 
with saucerers, professional men, educators, military men, 
government officials, diplomats and just ordinary people. 
Incidentally, whenever we found a well informed individual 
or group, all of them without exception were convinced 
that the governments know far more than they are giving 
out — far more, in fact, than most individuals know about 
the subject. This seemed possible to us because a govern 
ment ordinarily has more sources of information than an) 
individual. Part of our “collection of reasons” is as follows: 

48 

 

COLLECTION OF REASONS WHY GOVERNMENTS 
ARE SECRETIVE ABOUT FLYING SAUCERS.

1. They — the governments — are afraid. 

2. Flying saucers and their implications are a threat to 
the unrestrained “sovereignty” of any government on earth. 

3. The saucers represent a superpower in our skies, a 
ceiling on earthman’s “freewill”, and his sadistic and 
destructive tendencies. Other worlds and other beings of 
vastly greater intelligence are now watching our every 
move. What government dares to tell this to its people? 

4. If a government, by suppressing the truth, can make its 
“enemies” think that saucers are their own secret missiles, 
it might be able to gain a point of military advantage. 

5. If a government by suppressing the truth can gain time 
to duplicate flying saucers before its enemies can, it could 
rule the world. It might even be able to carry war into our 
solar system and conquer and enslave some of the inhabi
tants of outerspace. 

6. The governments are afraid to tell the people because 
the people “the masses” are uneducated and ignorant and 
would probably panic. They recall the near panic in the 
U. S. A. which occurred when actor Orson Welles put on 
his famous radio broadcast of a fictitious invasion from 
Mars on the night of October 30, 1938. 

7. The observed behavior of saucers (and spacebeings) 
indicates that they represent more than a physical or hu
man phenomenon — they have a physical aspect and a supra
physical aspect. To admit this “officially” is “simply im
possible” at this time. 

8. The people have to be conditioned for the truth about 
saucers because the truth is so transcendental. Therefore 
let the “little people” — the saucerers, the moving picture 
producers, the spacefiction writers, and space comicartists, 
do the educating and the conditioning. When the time is 
ripe, then and then only release “official” information. 

9. The governments have a shrewd policy: make the 
saucers as controversial as possible. Encourage, then deny. 

 

49 

Blow hot, blow cold, but keep blowing. Stir up argument 
and controversy — the more the better. It is the best way 
of educating the people before official announcements can 
be made. 

10. The governments do not know enough about saucers 
yet to make any kind of an official announcement. They 
are puzzled and doubtful. Therefore they should keep in
vestigating secretly until enough certainty is developed 
upon which official announcements can be made. 

11. It would be bad economic policy to let the people 
know about flying saucers because the spacebeings have 
solved their economic problems but our world is controlled 
by “moneyed interests” which wish to hang on to the status 
quo here on earth because it is “profitable”. 

12. “Security Reasons” — mysterious, unsubstantiated, un
explained, but presumably enough said. 

13. The governments are secretly hoping that the annoy
ing flying saucers will go away and leave them to their own 
devices. 

COMMENT ON COLLECTION OF REASONS. 

Many people seem to be looking for just one big simple 
reason to explain all the secrecy. Which of the reasons 
given is correct, they ask. We doubt if any one reason ex
plains the entire situation. Different nations have different 
reasons which, to those in authority, naturally seem good 
and sufficient. We believe that all the reasons given contain 
at least part of the truth, some of course more than others. 
Some obviously apply to dictatorships and some to democ
racies. We have given you a basketful of reasons. Dip in, 
and help yourself! 

You may ask: “How do I know that these reasons are 
‘official’? 

There we have it — that insistence which many people 
demand for “authority” outside of themselves. Their own 
mind, their own ability to think, to reason, to investigate, to 
know, is never enough! They always depend on others to 

tell them. Nothing can ever be true unless some outside au
thority — some government, some university, some profes
sor, some church, some minister or priest says: “That is it!” 
All the while they do not see that we are dealing with a 
subject so new, so outinfront, that even “eminent author
ities” cannot give us the answers we would like. We our
selves discovered some time back that if you want the truth 
about flying saucers, you have to get busy and find it out 
for yourself! 

One of our acquaintances stated that he was a U. S. citi
zen by birth and questioned why the U. S. did not take the 
world lead in this saucer phenomenon. He did not like the 
policy of secrecy and wondered why anything had to be 
hidden. 

We were amazed that we had actually run into one U. S. 
citizen with the fortitude to say he did not like the present 
U. S. policy of secrecy on flying saucers, and suggested that 
perhaps we should compile a list of reasons as to why the 
secret policy should be abandoned. A sort of “Saucer Bill
ofRights” for the American citizen should be developed! 

The following nine reasons were thus developed with 
his help as to why the U. S. A. at least should change its 
policy of saucer secrecy: 

REASONS AGAINST GOVERNMENT SECRECY. 

1. The U. S. Government has as yet never even made an 
adequate public acknowledgment that the flying saucer 
phenomenon even exists. The entire matter has been left 
to defense officials whose hostility, evasive tactics and public 
doubletalk have branded them as the wrong people to 
handle so cosmic and transcendental a phenomenon. 

2. The whole approach of the U. S. Government to this 
phenomenon is inadequate, and its failure to recognize the 
interest of the American people in it and their constitu
tional right to know about it through adequate government 
action is to be deplored. 

3. The little that has been done, instead of being shared 

with the American people as is their constitutional right, 
has been on a secretive basis — another indication of a 
frightening modern tendency toward growing “secrecy” in 
our American Government. 

4. Secrecy in government is abhorrent in our democracy, 
a violation of the very principles upon which it was founded. 
Secrecy is creeping into our institutions through defense 
measures to a point where “classified and topsecret” infor
mation is now considered as “normal”. The insidious effect 
of this growing secrecy upon our democracy goes on almost 
unchallenged. 

5. It is high time that our government officials, includ
ing our military leaders and atom bomb scientists, be re
minded that they are still “servants” of the people. 

6. The saucer situation is a reminder to us of this grow
ing tendency on the part of public officials, once they are 
elected by the people, to immediately “look down” upon 
the electorate as ignorant masses who cannot stand the 
truth about anything. They then set themselves up as self
constituted judges of what the people should or should not 
be told. 

7. The saucer situation is another indication that every 
year a greater wedge is being driven by these mistaken gov
ernmental policies of secrecy between the American people 
on the onehand and government officials and scientists 
on the other hand. We are rapidly getting into a frightfully 
dangerous situation where our population falls into two 
classes: a small group of knowitalls who govern and de
cide everything, and a large “mass” of people who are kept 
in ignorance or semiignorance of what goes on behind 
the scenes. This is not democracy, and it is not in keeping 
with the principles on which this nation was founded. 

8. The very “psychology” of saucer secrecy is wrong. If 
there is anything that separates a people from a government, 
it is “official secrets”. It means the people are no longer a 
real part of the government. 

9. It has been said that U. S. defense officials are afraid 

the American people will panic if the truth about saucers 
is released. They remember the Orson Welles affair. What 
a slur this is on the integrity, stamina and courage of a 
mighty people. What a false psychology! It is this very 
policy of secrecy which in itself breeds fear, foreboding and 
distrust of government in the hearts of the people. 

We also sat down and endeavored to outline a more con
structive governmental program as follows: 

CONSTRUCTIVE PROGRAM FOR FLYING 
SAUCER PHENOMENA.

1. Let the U. S. A. acknowledge the saucer phenomena to 
the American people and to the world. That alone would 
be a tremendous forward step and a welcome clearing of 
the atmosphere. 

2. Completely reverse the stupid policy of hushhush, 
doubletalk and hot and cold. Get rid of the insidious se
crecy and evasion. Give up the idea that public officials 
are Godappointed judges of what the people should or 
should not know. Get back to a true psychology — that of 
mutual confidence and trust between the government and 
the people. Get back to fundamentals — a government of 
the people, by the people and for the people. Get back to 
the idea that government officials are servants of the people 
— all the way through, even the gentlemen in the defense 
department and the scientists. 

3. Take the handling of the U. S. Government saucer 
program and its infinite cosmic implications out of the 
hands of the military. They have shown themselves incap
able of anything but cheap and ridiculous “evasive ac
tion”. It does not belong in their basket. It is far too big 
for them. Let them retain whatever participation they 
need for “defense”, but get the whole program out of the 
limitations of the defense department. 

4. In the name of democracy, establish a new U. S. Gov
ernment commission adequately constituted to represent 
and report to the American People on this terrific phenomenon. 
Make this commission adequate to take the 
world leadership in this field. Make the personnel of this 
commission representative of all groups of people and sym
pathetic to the phenomenon. Then and then alone will 
we begin to get results. 

5. Here are some of the things a new and adequate U. S. 
Flying Saucer Commission could do: 

a. Obtain all the files of the “secret” investigations and 
data that have thus far been hidden from the public. 
In an orderly and nonfrightening manner, make a 
sensible release of this information to the public. 
Out with it, and never fear the consequences. The 
American people will welcome it. 

b. For the first time in history tell the public the truth 
about flying saucers — including the truth about any 
that crashed to earth, about Hanger 27, Muroc Air 
Base, and many other things. Report the truth to 
the people. 

c. Publicly encourage people everywhere to report all 
possible saucer information to this new commission 
as a public clearinghouse for accurate saucer infor
mation. From our own experience we know that 
world wide information would flow to it like a mag
net. Report findings to the people. 

d. Take the restrictions off private and commercial 
pilots and Air Force personnel, and bring forth their 
saucersightings and experiences to the public. 

e. Encourage universities and astronomical laboratories 
to develop new equipment to help unravel the mys
teries of outerspace. Stop the secrecy in these insti
tutions. Also give their saucer photographs and data 
to the American people. 

f. Encourage all possible channels of communication 
and contact with spacepeople, not neglecting tele
pathy, E. S. P. (Extrasensory Perception) and other 
methods. Get the radio “Hams” going fullblast — 
and see what they turn up. Get back to audience 

participation — i.e. public participation in this great 
adventure. Report to the people. 

g. Give official encouragement to saucer clubs, saucer 
lectures, and other saucer activities. 

h. Speed up our efforts to get to the moon first. Give 
heed to some of the telepathic and E.S.P. messages 
for needed knowledge on all the factors involved. 
The conquest of outerspace is very important for 
our future, and the nation that is progressive enough 
to prove out new sources of cosmic information is 
the nation that will get there first! 

WHAT MIGHT HAPPEN IF THE AMERICAN 
PEOPLE ARE NOT AWAKENED 
Would it not be an historic travesty if someday history had 
to record the incredible fact that “America — the land of 
the free and the home of the brave” — had muffed this great 
cosmic opportunity to lead the world into the knowledge of, 
and participation in, a community of planets and a magnif
icent interplanetary civilization! Wake up American Citi
zens. Wake up! 

CHAPTER IX. 

THE MEXICAN CHAUFFEUR.
Salvador Villanueva Medina. 

THE MEETING 

I t was 7 p.m. on January 7, 1955. We were gathered to
gether in the Old Colonia San Pedro section of Mexico 
City at Calle Cinco No. 10. “We” included an audience 
of over two hundred Mexicans and friends — gathered in 
expectation of hearing a lecture on flying saucers. The 
lecturer, my husband Bryant, was sitting on the platform 
with a blackboard behind him which he had requested. 
Senor “Gebe”, the newspaper editor had sponsored the 
meeting, and there were a number of distinguished guests 
present. It was a gala occasion — the first effort in Mexico 
City toward the formation of a Flying Saucer Organization. 

Senor “Gebe” started the meeting by introducing a series 
of guests who told of interesting saucer sightings in and 
around Mexico City. He then introduced Bryant, who 
got his lecture off to a good start by stating phrases in Eng
lish, which would then instantly be translated into Span
ish by an excellent interpreter. Then would follow an
other phrase of English and another lightninglike transla
tion. It was going nicely, and the audience was listening in 
rapt attention. 

After certain presentations Bryant came to a pause, and 
with everyone thus alerted, he asked the audience rather 
dramatically, “Has anyone present ever seen a spaceman? 
Please raise your hands!” 

Now I knew that Bryant intended this merely as a sort of 
rhetorical question and that he expected to go on and say 
something like: “Well, just look at your neighbor — we are 
all spacepeople, we live on a spaceship ourselves called the 
earth.” Then he would develop the theme that the earth 
itself is a type of spaceship. 

56 

 

One of the Mexican newspapers reported the incident 
the next day, stating that, “Shocked silence absolute si
lence — followed this part of the lecture.” 

It surely did, and Bryant seemed to be enjoying the ef
fect. The pause was quite long. He was just about to con
tinue when, believe it or not, a man way in the backrow 
near the door got to his feet and raised his hand! 

Bryant was petrified, frozen. His face registered a mixture 
of shocked surprise, incredulity, whattodo, and the idea 
that anything could happen in Mexico! 

The audience saw the raised hand and the meeting im
mediately broke into a veritable bedlam. 

Bryant looked at Senor “Gebe” who shook his head in 
bewilderment. They conferred and decided it was danger
ous to let the man speak — as his claim of seeing a space
man might be just a hoax. It was quite a difficult situation. 

By that time, however, members of the audience were 
standing on chairs, shouting demands that the man be 
heard. The man was pushed forward to the platform, and 
Senor “Gebe” gave him a seat and motioned to Bryant to 
continue the lecture. Bryant tried, but it was impossible 
for the clamor for the other man to speak was irresistible. 
Finally Senor Gebe” did the only thing possible under the 
circumstances to quiet the audience. He permitted this 
earthman who had stated he had seen a spaceman to speak 
to the audience. 

That, my friends, was our unconventional and exciting 
introduction to a remarkable Mexican who was later to be 
known to many as the “Mexican Adamski”. He was a 
chauffeur named Salvador Villanueva Medina, and he 
told an amazing story of sitting up most of one night with 
two men from outerspace in a broken down automobile 
some three hundred miles north of Mexico City on the 
Laredo Road in August of 1953. We could see that his ac
count made a deep impression on the audience. It was all 
in Spanish, and our interpreter was so interested himself 
that he did not give much of it to us in English. Finally 

the man finished and was roundly applauded. 

Bryant closed the lecture — the high point, however, being 
the account given by the Mexican chauffeur. 

WE DECIDE TO INVESTIGATE. 

Salvador Villanueva Medina’s experience caused quite 
a sensation among those interested in saucers. Many Mex
icans had been complaining that the space brothers seemed 
to be landing everywhere but in Mexico. Here was much 
more than a saucer sighting. Here was an actual “contact” 
with spacepeople right in Mexico. It is one thing to discuss 
“contacts” in far off countries, but it is another to find 
that people in your own community are having such ex
periences right “at home”. Here was Mexico’s opportunity 
for its own “Adamski”. But, of course, the experience had 
to be investigated and checked. There were as always plen
ty of skeptics. Many people were asking a very pertinent 
question, “Why did the chauffeur keep this terrific experi
ence to himself for almost seventeen months? Why had he 
not told about it before?” 

His reply to this was that he had told certain people about 
it right after it occurred and had been completely rebuffed. 
He told his wife, and they agreed that for the sake of his 
job it was necessary to keep it quiet. 

The story intrigued us so much that we had many ses
sions with Senor “Gebe” and the chauffeur at which we dis
cussed his experience thoroughly. A written transcript of 
his story was made in great detail. We became well acquaint
ed with him and at his request called him “Salvador”. We 
trust he will not mind if we call him by that name in this 
account of our experiences together. We longed to know 
the truth ourselves and all the minute incidents connected 
with this contact, and so did Senor “Gebe”. We all realized 
there were no witnesses, but we had slowly learned that 
only a few people contacted in recent times in all the world 
had any witnesses. Any researcher has to recognize this 
situation. Please remember we have been private saucer 

investigators — nothing more. There has never been any
thing “official” whatsoever in our investigations. Our 
policy in such matters has been to “live with” the people 
having the saucer experiences so that we could get the 
“feel” of them ourselves and make up our own minds. Con
vincing others has never been our goal. We wanted to con
vince ourselves one way or another. We were just as de
sirous of disproving this contact as we were of proving it. 
We discussed with Senor “Gebe” the possibility of his get
ting the chauffeur off from work for three or four days and 
our driving to the town of Valles, near which the encounter 
took place, in order to make a careful investigation. He 
thought this was a good idea and it was eventually arranged. 
Meanwhile we did everything possible to find out what we 
could about Salvador and his background and to get the 
account of his contact written down. 

Salvador himself is a fairly young Mexican of humble 
status. He is short, stocky and has dark black hair. He has 
not been blessed with much schooling or education. He is 
married and has a fine family of seven children, whom he 
supports by his work as a chauffeur and taxidriver. Per
sonally, we found him very likeable and discovered that 
he had a good sense of humor. His face shows character and 
one can fairly feel his honesty and sincerity. His humility 
made an impression upon us no boastfulness or bombast 
at all, but rather a “why was I worthy of it” attitude. One 
outstanding characteristic is his excellent “photographic” 
memory, together with really exceptional powers of ob
servation, down to minute details. He is a very religious 
and pious soul and does not drink any intoxicants. We 
became friends. 

His remarkable experience in condensed form is hereby 
presented just as we obtained it from him but translated 
rather freely into English. 

MEXICAN CHAUFFEUR’S ACCOUNT OF HIS 
CONTACT WITH SPACEMEN. 

 

59 

On the 20th of August, 1953 about 9 p.m. I was covering 
my taxi route (in Mexico City) in which work I have been 
engaged since 1931. I picked up as passengers two Texans 
a man and his wife. He was approximately fifty years old, 
had grayish hair, was slender and tall. She was a little 
shorter than he and seemed about forty years of age. I 
picked them up in the Zocalo to take them to the Oxford 
Hotel. During the ride he asked me to recommend a chauf
feur to drive their automobile to Laredo, which was then 
in a repair shop undergoing a checkup following an ac
cident. 

As I was interested in such work, I returned to see them 
the following day at 10 a.m. We picked up their automobile 
which was a 1952 Buick. The rest of the day I drove them 
to various places. They paid me and then hired me to 
drive them to Laredo starting at 9 a.m. the following day. 

The next day after they had done some shopping we 
started for Laredo driving at a speed of sixty to seventy miles 
per hour. Beyond Valles the gear box (differential) devel
oped trouble, and we had to stop on the side of the road. 
It was late afternoon. The North Americans decided to go 
back to town and get a mechanic. They hailed a passing car 
and told me to wait and watch their car. 

I decided to raise the car with a jack as I wanted to see 
if I could fix it before my clients returned. It was begin
ning to get dark. Only two or three cars passed. I was very 
solitary. 

All of a sudden I heard someone coming near me. I could 
hear footsteps. I looked out from underneath the car 
and I saw two legs in front of me. The legs were covered 
with trousers of a material like corduroy. I felt fear and 
got out from under the car. 

A man with a very white face was before me. He was 
dressed in a one piece garment of a corduroy like material 
which covered even his feet. It was tight at the ankles, cuffs 
and neck, but was loose elsewhere giving the appearance 
of being elastic. Around his waist he wore a thick belt 

about three inches wide of a bluish color. The strange 
thing about the belt was that it had holes in it, and the holes 
would light up little by little as if they had electric lights 
inside. Under his arm was a helmet, like those used by 
football players, but from the ear pieces ran fine wires. He 
had fine features and a penetrating look. No beard. His 
hair was fine, wavy, grey and reached his shoulders. He 
seemed about four feet tall and to weigh about 110 pounds. 

I was afraid and was trembling inside. He asked me twice 
in correct Spanish what was wrong with my car. I could 
not answer because I was frightened and was watching him 
closely. 

“Can’t you talk?” the stranger then asked. 

“Yes,” I finally responded, and the only thing I could 
think to say was, “Are you an aviator?” 

“Yes,” he replied. “My machine which you people call 
an airplane is there — and he pointed in the direction of 
a little mound in front of us. 

“You are not from Mexico?” I then asked. 

No, he said, I come from a place at much space.” (lit
eral translation). 

The word “space” caught my attention, but it never oc
curred to me then to think of other planets but only of 
other countries. 

I invited him to get into the car as it was almost dark, but 
his belt began to send out luminous flashes and I noticed a 
buzzing sound coming from it. He put on his helmet, rais
ed his arm in a parting gesture, and walked away toward 
the hill leaving me alone. At about 200 meters I could 
stdl see his belt lights twinkling like fireflies. I stood next 
to the car watching until he was out of sight. 

I removed the jack from underneath the car. Two motor
cycle officers came by and made me move the car off the 
road. Then I got inside the car and tried to sleep. Occa
sional cars would come by and wake me up. Later I was 
aroused by some strong knocks on the car window. I saw 
two people standing near the car and thought they were 

the owners of the automobile. My surprise was great when 
I saw it was my aviator friend, but this time he was ac
companied by another taller person but with the same kind 
of uniform. 

Without thinking I asked them to come into the car, 
which they did. The small one sat next to me, then the 
taller one. I turned my back toward the door so as to 
observe them every time a car passed by. Then it occurred 
to me to turn on the dome light. I did so and could see 
the interest with which the taller of them was observing me. 
His skin was also very white. 

A nervous trembling started to invade me. “Are you Eu
ropeans?” I finally dared ask. 

The smaller one answered that they came from another 
place far more distant. 

“Our place,” he said, “is much more inhabited than this. 
There you do not find much room between people and people.” 

Then he began to talk quite freely, but the taller one 
limited himself to nodding his head in acknowledgment. 
The smaller one told that in his place the towns covered 
everything. There were no uninhabited areas, and the 
streets were continuous. The people did not walk on the 
streets because they were metallic and from them their ve
hicles took their power. There was a great quantity of 
vehicles of great diversity, but they never used any kind 
of fuel. Streets never crossed at the same level. Some had 
sidewalks made of endless bands (belts) running in oppo
site directions. 

I asked about vegetables, fruits and cereals such as we 
eat. He answered that all the houses had little patios in 
the center where there was a garden and a well. They pro
duced all the food they needed — everything and much 
more than we on earth eat was produced in these interior 
patios. He added that they did not have big trees. They did 
not have tall buildings. In a street block they had contin
uous buildings. 

62 

 

I asked if they had any oceans or seas. He said “Yes” and 
that everything was inhabited. I asked him if they had 
no fuels, how was power generated. He told me that ener
gy was generated in productive centers which took advantage 
of inexhaustible solar rays. 

The conversation went on for hours. Sometimes I felt 
they were joking. Being a man without much schooling I 
had never heard of anything like this before. I tried to 
figure out what country they were from. Finally with hesi
tation, I asked where their country was because everything 
seemed so fantastic. They both laughed, but not at all in 
an offensive manner. Then the smaller one said, “We are 
talking about another ‘world’ as you call this one on which 
you live.” 

In spite of his harmonious voice I was again getting un
easy, but I finally asked them how they travelled from 
their world. The short one answered that soon I would 
have the opportunity to see the ship in which they travelled. 
After telling me this, they both observed me intently. The 
short man patted my right leg and said, “Does this sur
prise you? Well, it will surprise you far more to know that 
in this world you live on there are men like us amongst 
you who live, dress and eat like you do. And it is they 
who report to us all the data about your wars, your progress, 
your ways of living and your government.” 

I could not believe what they were saying and said in 
a mocking way, Well, what form of life and government 
have you?” 

He replied, “The stage that you are passing through now, 
we lived thousands of years ago. Our world also suffered 
many wars and destructive retrogressions as well as progres
sions. Finally an agreement was reached between the dif
ferent governments so that what you call nations and 
countries disappeared and we all became sons of the 
same world. A council of wise men was formed, and they 
are the ones who now govern. Those who have exceptional 
minds or are outstanding in any realm of knowledge belong to this group. 

“The headquarters of this government is in a central 
place. In each group or nucleus there is a representative 
of this council who is in charge of receiving and studying 
the suggestions of the inhabitants and of transmitting agree
ments. All of these men are very capable and wise. Among 
the lower classes there is no extreme poverty as each in
habitant willingly works where he is sent or placed and has 
enough to live well. No one takes or has with them, their 
children. From the time they are small they go to a certain 
zone where they are duly attended to. There they live and 
grow up and are educated according to their physical and 
mental qualities. Later they live in the nucleus to which 
they are assigned.” 

As dawn appeared the visitors got out of the car. A buzz
ing noise came either from their helmets or their belts. I 
summoned courage to ask them where the noise came from 
and both of them indicated their belts. The small man 
told me that the belts could also be used “to check an ene
my”. They started off the road to the right (east) across the 
fields, and I followed them. The ground was covered by 
trees and brush. Finally we came to the ship which was 
roughly 10 meters in diameter and possibly half as high. 
At a signal a section of the ship opened and I could see 
certain things in the interior. My visitors invited me inside. 
At this I became utterly panic stricken and turned and 
ran back to the highway and the car. A few minutes later, 
standing beside the car and gazing in the direction of the 
ship, I saw it rise slowly above the tree tops. It was oscil
lating and was luminous with bluish rays around it. Then 
it took off and quickly disappeared in the direction of the 
rising sun. 

Toward noon the North Americans returned along with 
a mechanic who diagnosed the car trouble as damage due 
to lack of lubricant in the gear box. My clients were in
clined to blame me for this, and we all agreed that it would 
be best if I returned to Mexico. 

64 

 

A truck came by heading for Mexico City, and I arranged 
with the driver for a ride. Brimming over with my recent 
experience, I started to tell it to the truck driver. The latter 
quickly silenced me by suggesting that I had been smoking 
Marijuana! After this rebuff I began to realize for the 
first time something of the difficulty and the danger of 
telling of my experience. On arriving home, however, I did 
relate it to my wife and my two elder sons. 

Salvador s verbal account of his experience was carefully 
recorded in great detail so that we could make full use of it 
in our investigation which was to follow. 

RUNE,
remark the book on this case from the author himself, have I in pdf format. 
http://galactic.to/rune/spesBoker/Salvador_villanuevaMedina_ufocontact1952.pdf

CHAPTER X.
OUR TRIP TO VALLES.
for to understand our Valles trip it is essential briefly 
to introduce a Mexico City friend of ours whom we 

shall call “Billgey”. He is a fabulous character, a 
North American who came to Mexico six or seven years 
ago on a vacation and just never went back to the States. He 
fell in love with Mexico — and nobody could be with him 
for any length of time without doing the same thing. He 
became a professor of English in one of the schools, but is 
so versatile he could “profess” most anything on short no
tice. Billgey has something that most people in the States 
have lost — enthusiasm, endless enthusiasml For what? For 
“life” and all the interesting things it holds. For example: 
people, kids, painting, teaching, poetry, pottery, ants, cats, 
and flying saucers. This last enthusiasm is of rather recent 
origin and you can probably blame us for it. Anyway we 
could not see a Mexican exploration trip on Saucers with
out our good friend “Billgey”, and he was delighted at the 
prospect. 

Everything was set for 5 a.m. January 12, 1955. It was a 
damp and dark morning as we quietly rolled our car out 
onto the street so as not to disturb our apartment neighbors. 
Shortly afterward Senor Gebe arrived with his son, who 
was an expert photographer, loaded down with shovels, 
camping equipment, and photographic apparatus. Soon 
the Mexican chauffeur, Salvador Villanueva Medina ap
peared. He was of course the kingpin in this adventure. 
But where was Billgey? We waited and waited and wonder
ed whether to drive to his house and get him, or whether 
we would thus miss him on the way. Finally out of the 
darkness came Billgey with his Vandyke beard framed by 
an amazing new ten decimeter white sombrerol He mur
mured something about cats causing the delay. Bryant 
started the motor and we were on our way to Valles about 

300 miles distant to investigate Salvador’s saucer contact. 

On the way there was time for a little leisurely conversa
tion, and Helen began to chide Billgey about his cats. She 
finally wormed out of him that recently he had borrowed a 
very expensive male Persian cat from a certain Senora as a 
companion for his female cat. That morning, as he was 
hurrying to get ready to meet us, he found the prize cat was 
missing so poor Billgey was torn between finding the 
expensive cat and getting started. In desperation he went 
around the dark neighborhood calling, “Kitty, Kitty". No 
luck. Perhaps the cat only understood Spanish. He return
ed home, and there he discovered the blank thing asleep on 
his roof! Senor Gebe did some translating into Spanish, 
and everybody enjoyed the humor of the situation. 

Billgey, inquired Helen, “Do you mean to insinuate 
you are going in for feline procreation at this time of life? 
If you succeed, what in the world are you going to do with 
the baby kittens?" 

“I’ll cross m y kittens when I come to them!" snorted 
Billgey. 

That reply was not translated into Spanish. Who could 
do it? 

Salvador was feeling more at home with us all the while, 
and this is just what we wanted to happen. In many saucer 
experiences the kind of proof we all would like is difficult 
to find, so that the credibility of the saucerer is of para
mount importance. As we neared the town of Valles, Sal
vador became very alert and watched the east side of the 
road continually. We told him we would stop the car any 
time he wished, for afterall the “trail” was seventeen 
months old. We came to Valles, an attractive Mexican town 
of about 14,000 population, and drove on through the town 
continuing northward at a very slow speed. Salvador’s 
tension increased as we passed Kilometer Post 483, then 
Post 484. Suddenly he shouted and jumped from the car,
He was very excited and cried. 
This is it. This is the place!" 

He rushed around looking for a little hill or mound and 
found it, climbed upon it and pointing his finger he exclaimed, “Over there, over there is where the saucer took 
off. I saw it from here." 

We did everything we could to try to discourage Salvador 
from being so positive about this being the place. We per
suaded him to get back into the car and we drove north
ward many miles farther suggesting he continue to watch 
the road. He kept saying, “No, no.” We returned to the 
original spot and got out of the car and made a preliminary 
survey of the region. We had with us the transcripts of 
his previously written description of the entire locale in 
detail, and these checked well with all the details in front 
of us. For instance, the written account told exactly the 
nature of the soil under the car and that the location was 
near a small stone quarry, etc. We carefully checked point 
after point and found them to agree. As it was beginning 
to get dark, we decided to return to Valles for the night. 

The next day and night we spent at the saucer site. We 
parked our car exactly where Salvador said the broken down 
Buick was parked seventeen months previously. We discuss
ed again the conversations he had had with the spacemen 
and walked over the ground time after time to where the 
saucer had landed, which was about one and onehalf kilo
meters off the highway. We took samples of the soil and 
vegetation. Billgey mapped the entire area. We then asked 
Salvador not how big the saucer was for we had his written 
statement that it was about 10 meters in diameter, but how 
big it looked to him when he saw it rise and fly away when 
he was standing by the Buick. Billgey had Salvador ex
tend his arms and spread his fingers to show the exact ap
parent size as well as the direction of the saucer and then 
took a compass reading of this direction. He then con
structed a paper model of the saucer representing the ap
parent size as viewed from the road and by a series of tri
angulations came out at practically the same spot that Sal
vador had previously designated as being the landing spot 
of the saucer. 

One additional bit of information about this contact 
developed during our repeated reenactments of the de
tails. As we were walking from the parked car across the 
fields toward the spot where the saucer landed, Salvador 
was reminded of a detail he had omitted in the written tran
script. It was this: 

Back in August of 1953, the fields were muddy off the 
highway in the direction where the saucer landed. As 
Salvador followed the spacemen back to the ship, he was 
having difficulty wading through the mud. He noted that 
the spacemen, however, seemed to be walking "above the 
mud . There was no mud on them when they arrived at 
the saucer, but his own shoes were covered with mud. 

As night fell we chose a secluded spot several kilometers 
off the highway not too far from the spot where the saucer 
landed and pitched our camp. Everyone was dogtired 
and hungry. We cooked our meal and warmed some coffee 
with the help of a camp fire and an alcohol stove. We de
cided to take turns sleeping on the ground and in the car, 
with two of us always on sentry duty. We had chosen this 
spot mostly for its apparent seclusion. 

We had often wondered, while speeding along Mexican 
lghways, what it was like off the road, back in the Mexi
can hills which seemed so desolate and deserted when view
ed from the highway. A great surprise was in store for us. 
Was our camp hidden and isolated? Heavens nol It turn
ed out to be more like Grand Central Station every hour 
First came a farmer who chatted with us, drank some of our 
coffee, and kindly loaned us two of his dogs "for protection.

 Next Came a native with a can of fresh water. 
While we were conversing with him, our newly acquired 

canine protectors proceeded to drink our water. Later on 
came men on horseback, then hunters on foot carrying 
lights and guns, followed by some gentry mounted on bur.
 Shortly after midnight some others came and presented us with gourds which we cooked in our camp fire. 
We had not planned on any of this, but it seems it was 
partynight at Camp Saucer in the desolate country off the 
Laredo Road. Many visitors came to pay their respects, 
and we suppose to satisfy their curiosity. We did not tell 
them our mission and they did not ask. Everyone was hap
py but exhausted from lack of sleep. 

About 2 a.m. it had become cold, cloudy and dark as 
pitch, and things had quieted down somewhat. Bryant 
and I were on watch, poking up the fire in an attempt to 
keep warm. Suddenly over the tops of the trees to the 
north appeared a moving white light in the sky. Bryant 
watched it intently and then ran and climbed a rickety 
wooden fence to the rear of us to get a better view. 

"Get the binoculars quickl” he called excitedly. 

I too had seen the light and knew what he must be 
thinking. My heart pounded as I ran to the car and tripped 
over the others who were trying to sleep. 

“What’s up?” they demanded. 

"Saucers!” I yelled. 

Like a flash they were up running wildly for the fence. 
By the time I returned with the binoculars, they were all 
perched on top of the fence like crows. So I made like a 
crow also. The fence was a tall rickety affair tied together 
with what appeared to be plant fibres. It was swaying 
back and forth in the cold night breeze, and we were all 
hanging on for dear life. We seemed to think that being 
a few feet off the ground would give us a much better view 
of the heavens. The moving light was still there, and as we 
strained our eyes it was soon joined by another moving light! 

"Look at that,” came shouts in both English and Spanish. 

Excitement was at fever pitch. Bryant grabbed the glass
es from me. There was a pause as Bryant focused them on 
the flying lights. I thought the fence would crash any 
minute. The suspense was unbearable. 

Then Bryant began to laugh. 

70 

 

Fireflies, said he in utter disgust. “Fireflies, nothing 
but — fireflies!” 

Thus ended our trip to Valles in the quest of Saucer 
Science. We might mention the jigger bites, but on second 
thought the least said about them the better. 

Salvador was terribly disappointed that the fireflies did 
not turn out to be his spacefriends returning again. We 
intended taking him directly to his home upon our arrival 
in Mexico City, but he insisted on going to church before 
going home to his family. So as we reached the outskirts of 
Mexico City we let him off at the Shrine of Guadalupe. 

The soil and vegetation samples from the saucer site 
were tested by a Geiger counter but showed no evidence of 
radiation. This probably meant little after seventeen 
months, and we were told later that a different type of ra
diation test is needed such as has been developd in England. 
While the type of proof usually demanded by the public 
was lacking, we felt very good about the trip. After our 
experience with Salvador we at least in our own minds were 
convinced that the Mexican chauffeur had told the truth. 

We have been asked outright if we feel he could have 
dreamed the whole thing. Our answer is a definite “no,” for 
many reasons which would take too long to discuss. We had 
set out to convince ourselves — one way or another — and 
this we had succeeded in doing. Once again may we em
phasize the point that we have found no easy highroad to 
saucer knowledge. It is an individual effort all the way. 

The story with many photographs blossomed out in Se
nor Gebe’s newspaper. 

This story also has a sequel to it which came about when 
George Adamski came to Mexico. The sequel convinced 
us even more, and we shall refer to it later. 

CHAPTER XI.

ADAMSKI COMES TO MEXICO. 
we were having fun in this fabulous land of Mexico. 
We liked Mexico and the Mexican people and the 
many friends we had made. We landed on Mexican television, we landed in the movies, we appeared in the 
newspapers. We were elected charter members of a newly 
formed Mexican Society of Interplanetary Investigation 
and were members of a newly formed English Speaking 
Saucer Club. Despite all this, we took trips and explored 
the beautiful country at every opportunity. 

“How do you do it?” asked our friends. 

"Do what?” we inquired. 

“Get around and know everybody and do everything in 
a foreign country!” 

“You, our friends, do it all for us,” we answered. That 
was true, provided we included the help we received from 
all the people we met who were interested in saucers. 

As to our Mexican movie career it might be called lurid 
and brief. It had nothing to do with our saucer interest; 
we appeared with others as “typical gringo tourists” in a 
play entitled “Ensayo de un Crimen” (Rehearsal for A 
Crime!) directed by the distinguished Spanish movie di
rector, Luis Bunuel. Before leaving Mexico we had a 
chance to see a preview, and what took us three days of 
hard work and twentynine repeats in the studio took about 
120 seconds on the screen. 

Our appearance at times in the newspapers was the di
rect result of our saucer activities. This also applied to 
television. We were invited to appear on a television pro
gram called “Mesa de Celebridades” (The Table of the 
Celebrities) which originated from the beautiful roofgar
den restaurant atop the Continental Hotel in downtown 
Mexico City. It was something like the programs in the 
States in which club guests are informally interviewed 

and televised right at their tables. The handling of this 
“question and answer’’ program in both English and Span
ish using an interpreter was beautifully arranged. I was 
asked some technical questions on saucers and Helen was 
given more general questions. 

The moderator asked Helen, “You who know George 
Adamski personally as you do, and Dr. Williamson, one of 
the witnesses present at the contact with the Venusian 
don t you feel that the possibility exists that they might have 

in all good faith set down as factual experience what 
might well have been a mirage or hallucination?” 

Helen replied very seriously, “Let us assume that it was 
an hallucination. If so, six people other than Mr. Adamski 
had the same hallucination. The hallucination made very 
deep impressions of his footprints on the sand. And the 
hallucination borrowed a photographic plate from Mr. 
Adamski which the hallucination later returned. I would 
say that it must have been a very intelligent hallucination!” 

This reply caused considerable amusement and favorable 
comment not only from those in the studio but from outside 
listeners to the program. 

Amidst all these busy activities, we received a letter from 
George Adamski saying that he would come to Mexico for 
a vacation and rest on March 21, 1955. By that time his 
and Leslie’s book Flying Saucers Have Landed had been 
published in Spanish, and he also wished to confer with 
his publisher. 

Both a Mexican and an English speaking contingent of 
admirers drove to the airport to meet him. A little cere
mony of greeting had been planned, but as luck would 
have it, his plane came in onehalf hour early due to a 
tail wind and we found him wandering around the enor
mous airterminal like a lost ghost. From then on there 
occurred a series of bizarre events that proved the old adage 
of travelers “anything can happen in Mexico”. Some 
of these happenings so nearly resembled a fantastic light 
opera plot that even while they were occurring they seemed 

to us more like fiction than reality. As we all seemed to be 
playing parts in this amazing drama, we had to pinch our
selves at times to make sure we were really awake. Well, let 
us at least give you a few glimpses. 

First of all, let us say that there was mighty little vaca
tion and practically no rest ahead for Mr. Adamski. The 
demands on his time by both individuals and groups in
terested in the saucers were overwhelming. Private invi
tations poured in, and the English Speaking Group planned 
a nice series of events for him with no other motive in mind 
but to give those interested in saucers a chance to meet him 
and to hear of his experiences. They just naturally thought 
in terms of procedures considered normal in the States. 
They enthusiastically planned a pressconference. 

AN ILL FATED PRESS CONFERENCE. 

As our apartment was not too far from downtown Mexi
co, we offered it to the committee for the occasion of the 
press conference. It turned out to be quite an affair in 
more ways than one. The hour arrived and the place was 
literally jammed with committee members, press represen
tatives, photographers and some distinguished visitors. 
There was an air of excitement and anticipation. In came 
Mr. Adamski. Photobulbs popped and friendly introduc
tions followed. There was no lack of voluntary interpre
ters as questions rained down on this saucerer from the 
States. Most of them were the normal questions we were 
quite familiar with. A few of the questioners seemed rather 
skeptical. It was a memorable picture — Mr. Adamski, a 
kindly and friendly man, a long way from home — sitting in 
our apartment in Mexico in the midst of the Scribes . 

We almost added “Pharisees” because we found out 
later that there were present some who, without any just 
reason whatsoever, would later try to injure this man who 
had come to them with nothing but friendship in his heart. 
The next few days we watched the papers, and to the great 
surprise of the group the publicity, with a few bright ex
ceptions, ranged from none at all to thinly veiled insinualions. The group was quite puzzled, but finally learned 
that a press conference is the wrong way to introduce any
one on an educational basis, as they had intended to do. 
South of the Border it seems that a press conference is a di
rect invitation to paid publicity, and without paid public
ity one is apt to achieve — shall we say “unpaid public
ity . This was Act 1, Scene 1, of the amazing drama we 
were all to play a part in very soon. 

PASE USTED AND THE WRONG SON. 

Act 1, Scene 2, soon followed. One day we were in our 
apartment and went onto our balcony to enjoy the gor
geous sunshine — one of Mexico’s greatest assets. The 
Sleeping Lady and her boy friend “Popo” (snow capped 
volcanoes) were clearly visible in the distance an inspir
ing sight. 

Our doorbell rang. We opened the door and there stood 
a group of Mexican gentlemen of exceptionally distin
guished and dignified mien. A veritable aura of formal 
dignity and correct politeness swept into the room as they 
entered. It was indescribable. A group of V. I. P.’s if 
ever there was such. 

Fortunately one of them spoke English. They were dele
gates from a group of distinguished Mexican doctors and 
physicians. Their mission? To prevail upon our good au
spices to try to prevail upon Mr. Adamski to speak before 
their group. 

We immediately telephoned Mr. Adamski at his hotel, 
and he agreed to speak. A time and place was arranged. 
They were overwhelmed with his generosity and gracious
ness and with our assistance. The eminent gentlemen bow
ed themselves out of our apartment. The atmosphere of 
the room almost seemed to go flat as they took their aura 
of eminence with them. They moved toward the elevator. 
Helen rushed out to help them and to push the elevator 
button. The cage soon arrived, and the door opened. Then 
it happened! 

 

75 

One of the dignified Senors bowed to the others and 
said, “Pase usted, pase usted!” that is “you pass first, or 
you first, or after you!” 

By the time I had reached the scene — from the less po
lite but more pragmatic North American viewpoint — it 
had become a riot. By then it seemed that all of the V.I.P.’s 
had reached the eleventh inning of “Pase usted”. What 
they did not know, bless them all, was that they were about 
to lose the series because some players on another floor were 
wildly ringing for the elevator. Helen, almost in hysterics 
from ill suppressed North American laughter at this un
accustomed little drama, was doing her best to shoo them 
into the elevator. Finally like a miracle the dam broke, and 
they all moved forward practically in a body — a photo
finish if we ever saw one. The winner? — well, let us say 
with utmost respect — good old Mexican dignity and po
liteness. We could stand a little more of it in the U.S.A! 

The day of the “conferencia” between Mr. Adamski 
and the eminent doctors arrived. We picked Mr. Adamski 
up in our car in front of his quaint little Mexican hotel and 
started for the residence where the affair was to be held. 
We had a terrible time finding the place and became quite 
concerned about being late, as we understood this to be a 
“North American” appointment. In case our readers are 
a bit puzzled, we learned that there are two kinds of ap
pointments across the border, the North American and 
the Mexican varieties. The former means you keep the 
appointment on time. The latter means you do as you 
please and no apologies are required if you show up a 
couple of hours late, or not at all. It’s the mores! 

Finally we found the address and caught a glimpse of a 
very dignified and distinguished figure in a frockcoat wait
ing for us out in front on the sidewalk. We were late. 

Trying to think quickly of a few appropriate Spanish 
words of apology, I jumped out of the car ahead of the 
others and rushed over to this grand Mexican personage. I 
was just about to open my mouth and apologize for our 

lateness when — what do you think happened? Yes! It 
could only have happened in dear old Mexico. The dear 
fellow put his arms around me, and in a voice expressing 
deep emotion said in Spanish, “Senor Adamski! My son! 
This is your home!” 

Oh, no, this just couldn’t happen! But in the confusion 
I was quite sure it was my back and nobody else’s that 
was being affectionately patted! I felt lower than a Mexi
can peso. I was stunned — embarrassed no end — my mind 
was not working. I did not know what to do. Then as if 
in a distance I heard a voice — it must have been mine — 
because no other voice could sound quite as embarrassed or 
speak quite such poor Spanish. It said, “No, no Senor Doc
tor, Me no Adamski! Me no Adamski!” 

Just then the real Adamski came in sight with Helen in 
hot pursuit. I heard my voice continue, “Este es Senor 
Adamski!” 

The Mexicans are great people. Without losing rhythm 
and with the dignity of a monarch, the good doctor turn
ed graciously around, calmly transferred the embrace to 
the right recipient and 1 again heard the words, "Senor 
Adamski. My Son. This is your home!” 

It sounded more fervent than the first time. After all 
practice makes perfect! What a people! 

Inside the house was a beautiful “patio” and a small 
chapel. In the latter were gathered a group of twenty or 
thirty members of the medical profession. A gracious hos
tess presided over the proceedings, and George Adamski 
was asked to speak. We had all learned by this time that 
such occasions are very informal in Mexico as to “audience 
participation”. A speaker can be, and usually is, inter
rupted by questions and even orations from the audience. 
It is much different than in the States. 

This meeting was no exception. Mr. Adamski recount
ed some of his experiences in English. No one was desig
nated as interpreter as many of those present could under
stand and speak both Spanish and English. Thus every

one acted as interpreter, and English and Spanish soon be
came so intermingled that we got all mixed up and were 
not quite sure what was going on. In fact we were not 
quite sure whether Senor Adamski was telling them or they 
were telling him! Helen looked a bit worried and whisper
ed to me, “Are they for him, or agin him? I can’t make 
out.” 

I whispered that wonderful Mexican phrase which set
tles so many things that cannot otherwise be settled, “Quien 
sabe!” 

Then one doctor arose and left us in no doubt, even 
though his expressions were ninety percent in Spanish. 
He evidentally was terribly annoyed with both Mr. Adam
ski’s experiences and his conclusions. He wound up with 
the forceful statement in plain English, “And so, sir, you 
have not convinced me at all.” 

All eyes turned toward Mr. Adamski seated behind a little 
table. He arose unperturbed and calmly replied, “My 
friend, I am not here to convince you or anyone. Even 
Christ with His message did not convince everyone. I 
merely came at your request to tell you of my experiences!” 

Touche! — for Senor Adamski! 

After the meeting adjourned, we went upstairs where 
delicious refreshments were served by our gracious hostess. 
Over their coffee cups they all discussed Mr. Adamski’s experiences at great length, and we all enjoyed the occasion 
very much. 

AT INSURGENTES THEATRE. 

Act II of our bizarre drama occurred at Insurgentes 
Theatre, which had been rented by the English speaking 
group for a public lecture by Mr. Adamski. We called for 
him in our car to drive by the theatre in the daytime, and 
sure enough over the marquee in large letters appeared 
the sign: “Conferencia Los Platillos Voladores Por George 
Adamski”. The entire front wall of this imposing build
ing is composed of an incredible mural made of tiny squares 

of colored mosiac tiles and was designed by Diego Rivera, 
the noted Mexican artist. Mr. Adamski admired it very 
much. Later, despite the setback of the press conference 
by which the lecture received practically no newspaper 
publicity, the group went courageously ahead, distributed 
placards and personally notified all their friends who were 
interested. he charge to help defray expenses was the sum 
of five pesos (40 cents U.S.). Even without proper adver
tising a goodly number of people swarmed into the theatre. 

Billgey made the introduction, and Mr. Adamski proceeded to wear out two interpreters telling about saucers. 
When the lecture was only partially finished, a television 
program tried desperately to televise part of the perform
ance, but the committee decided it would cause too much 
confusion and would be unfair to the theatre audience. 
After the lecture in the lobby we saw Senor and Seiiora 
Diego Rivera, and Mr. Adamski seemed very pleased to 
meet the great artist responsible for the beautiful mosaic 
mural on the front of the theatre. 

All the time behind the scenes the villain stalked unseen 
and unknown. He made note of the fact that right in this 
lecture Mr. Adamski had committed a fearful crimel The 
committee would never have guessed what it was, no not in 
a million years. Maybe the reader can guess. 

THE PLOT THICKENS AT THE RECEPTION.

Act III. Then came the grand reception at the American 
Club, arranged by the English Speaking Committee — all 
in the interest of saucers. Lights, photographers, caviar, 
cocktails, reception lines, introductions, music! Distin
guished men in fine attire and beautiful ladies in colorful 
dress. A sprinkling of diplomats and military personnel. 
And waiters really doing their stuff. A real Mexican affair 
— well, it is something to be invited to one! We were hav
ing a huge time circling around and listening in on various 
groups. Mr. Adamski had a hard time getting any refresh
ments with all the questions being asked of him. Then suddenly behind the scenes — skulduggery! We received an 
S. O. S. call from a member of the committee. A young 
man had found his way into the reception without invita
tion and was trying by means of a phony legal document 
to extort a few pesos. The committee’s legal advisor, a 
magistrate, fortunately was present and sent him on his 
way in a hurry. The party went on undisturbed. We doubt 
if any of the distinguished guests ever knew what was going 
on behind the scenes. Presently another character appeared. 
He wanted to know how much Mr. Adamski would “charge” 
for a lecture. He seemed surprised to learn that Mr. Adam
ski was only lecturing at the insistence of friends — and 
without charge. The Insurgentes Theatre charge was for 
expenses which had exceeded ticket sales. We knew by 
now that villainy was afoot! But the party went merrily 
on, and only the committee knew of these goings on — and 
only the villain knew the secret crime committed at the lecture. But we were soon to know. 

A subpoenaserver next appeared with a legal summons 
for Mr. Adamski! He had — believe it or not — committed 
the crime of lecturing to a pesopaying audience at the 
Insurgentes Theatre without a permit. The committee had 
obtained ticket permits, theatre permits, and heaven knows 
how many other permits, but neglected to obtain a personal 
lecture permit for the speaker. Mr. Adamski naturally 
knew nothing of all this — all he knew was that a group 
of friends had asked him to lecture. But that made no 
difference to the villain in the plot. 

INTERNATIONAL COMPLICATIONS.

Act IV. The next few days were hectic. We were all 
flying around making sure that Mr. Adamski did not 
land in jail. A second summons awaited him at his hotel 
that night, and he was to appear for questioning the next 
morning. At the hearing his papers were taken away de
spite the committee’s protest. We still did not know who 
was back of it all. The only thing to do now was to get 

the American Embassy to help, which we promptly did. 
International Complications! Never a dull moment in 
Mexico! But we all felt sorry for Mr. Adamski. The ad
verse publicity resulted in the cancellation of some televi
sion programs and even an important lecture he was to give 
before “La Asociacion Nacional de Tecnicos Mexicanos” 
(The National Association of Mexican Technical Men). 

THE MIDNIGHT RIDE.

Act V. We did not know it at the time, but our drama 
was headed for a whirlwind finish. We drove home from 
the hearing, dropped Mr. Adamski at his hotel and en
tered our apartment tired and disgusted. As we entered 
the telephone was ringing and Helen answered. I heard 
her saying, “Senor, I’ve been in court all day. I’m in no 
mood for conversation — I don’t care to talk about saucers 
to anyone! If it were not for saucers, I would not have 
had such a hectic day!” Bang went the receiver. 

“Who was that?” I inquired. 

‘Oh just someone, I didn’t get his name. He wanted 
to talk about Adamski and I am just too tired to talk,” 
came the reply. 

Shortly thereafter there was a knock at the door. We 
opened it, and there stood a very distinguished gentleman, 
the man who had telephoned Helen shortly before. We 
can only call him by his right name: “Senor Hero,” be
cause that is exactly what he turned out to be. Every 
drama needs a hero as well as a villain, and we now had 
both. So here standing at our door just in the nick of 
time was a real Mr. Hero. He asked all about Mr. Adam
ski, the summons, and the hearing. He took notes and 
said not to worry and left us. Surprised, but impressed, 
we started to retire as it was quite late. Yet some hours 
after Mr. Hero left, our telephone rang again. Strangely 
enough it was Mr. Hero again. Stranger still, he said 
calmly that the Adamski matter would be adjusted to
morrow and asked us to get in touch with Mr. Adamski 

immediately and invited all of us to come to his residence 
for a midnight snack so he could personally meet Mr. 
Adamski and tell him the good news. 

Helen excitedly telephoned Mr. Adamski. Yes, he would 
be ready in a few minutes. Just then our doorbell rang 
again. Surely strange doings were afoot in Old Mexico 
that night. Down on the street with their automobile, 
were some fine loyal saucer friends. Would they take us 
to Mr. Adamski? They certainly would. We joined them, 
picked up Mr. Adamski at his hotel and started for Mr. 
Hero’s residence — miles away in Coyoacan. 

Just as we swung onto Insurgentes Boulevard, as fate 
would have it, two Mexican motorcycle policemen drove 
into sight. Helen and I thought sure we were about to be 
arrested for speeding! But our good friend, who was driv
ing the car, leaned out of the window and spoke the magic 
name of Mr. Hero in Spanish. Instantly the policemen 
swung into action and offered to "clear the way” for us. 
A few hours ago it looked like jail for Mr. Adamski — and 
now — a motorcycle escort to Mr. Hero! We knew a little 
bit about what Mexicans could do at the wheel of a modern 
automobile, but we were now to learn what they could 
really do with a couple of good motorcycles. 

The engines began to roar. The police sirens were 
brought into action — screaming like lost souls. Down 
Insurgentes Boulevard we dashed and the car speedometer 
climbed 708090 and lurched toward 100 miles per hour! 
A few late pedestrians and cars were scurrying out of the 
way like scared jackrabbits. We went around glorietas on 
two wheels. We were bouncing around inside the car like 
corks and hung onto each other for dear life. Finally the 
ride ended in front of Mr. Hero’s beautiful mansion and 
we staggered out. Our driver and our wonderful friends 
in the car looked pretty limp. 

"How was the ride?” I managed to ask Helen. 

"Well,” said she, “in the States the only excuse for a ride 
like that would be a rush call from the stork!” 

82 

“What about you?” she inquired. 

“I felt I was on the verge of giving birth to something 
myself.” I replied. 

“Mr Adamski, what about you?” 

“I knew the spacebrothers were with us!” he answered. 

All I could think of was the corny reply, “Well, if they 
were, they were going some!” Everybody laughed and this 
helped break the tension of our thrilling and fantastic 
midnight ride. 

Needless to say we spent a most interesting time with 
Mr. Hero and his charming wife. The next day the “crime” 
was forgiven, and just to set the record straight: Mr. Adam
ski was never in jail, never fined, never deported, and never 
experienced anything but the utmost courteous and kindly 
treatment from Mexican officials. The whole thing was 
not his fault anyway. He was only trying to accomodate his 
saucer friends in Mexico. The villains turned out to be 
disgruntled reporters, some of whom we understood at
tended the ill fated press conference. Eventually some 
efforts at apology were forthcoming. Best of all, Mr. Hero 
arranged for Mr. Adamski to speak after all to a meeting 
of La Asociacion Nacional de T^cnicos Mexicanos” which 
was held in his own residence. We still have our dignified 
printed invitation to this affair. So ended this fantastic 
saucer drama in Old Mexico. Muchas gracias Senor Hero! 
Muchas gracias to all the actors in the drama! In retrospect 
we would not have missed any of it for anything! 

THE TWO ADAMSKIS MEET.

Before George Adamski left Mexico, an interesting meet
ing was arranged between him and Salvador Villanueva 
Medina, the Mexican chauffeur. Many of Salvador’s ad
mirers by this time were calling him the “Mexican Adam
ski . So an historic meeting was arranged between the “two” 
Adamskis at Senor Gebe’s residence. This is the sequel 
which we promised you in Chapter 10. Only six of us 
were present including a gentleman who acted as interpreter. 

Before the meeting it was agreed that Mr. George Adamski 
would be given free rein to question Salvador and to make 
up his own mind as to the validity of Salvador’s experience. 
We sat back in amazement as the questioning proceeded. 
Some of the questions asked by Mr. Adamski were key 
technical questions regarding saucers which we could not 
have answered correctly ourselves. What did Salvador see 
when he looked through the door into the ship? What did 
he notice when the ship tookoff? Exactly what reason did 
the spaceman give for being there? These and many other 
pointed questions were asked. If the questions astounded 
us, so did the answers. Salvador passed his examination at 
the hands of a man, who having seen a saucer himself, 
knew how to ask about certain things which no mere 
imaginary contact could give the answers to. All present 
were satisfied with the results. We left the meeting feel
ing grateful that events had worked in such a way that we 
could be present. 

BACK TO THE U.S.A. 

Our time in Mexico was drawing to a close. As we looked 
back on our exciting adventures in this fabulous country, 
it was hard to realize that our six months allotment of 
time was about up. There was never a dull moment. It 
was not only the swift saucer merrygoround that intrigued 
us — far from it. There was the country itself, the people, 
the sunshine and the endless number of interesting places 
to visit. Whenever the saucer whirl became too thick, we 
would jump in our car and take short trips and at times long 
trips to some other city or point of interest. There were the 
Pyramids, Xochimilco, Cuernavaca, Taxco and Acapulco. 
There was always that combination of the relics of old 
civilizations interspersed with the new. What a land of 
contrasts, of lights and shadows, of music, color and beau
ty! Last, but not least, there were the wonderful people we 
had met from all walks of life. We are grateful to them 

all for their help and the contributions they made to the 
pleasure and enjoyment of our stay. It was with regret 
that we packed our car and headed up the Pan American 
Highway toward Durango, Chihuahua and El Paso. Adios 
Amigos Mexicanos. Los vere en un disco volador! 

CHAPTER XII. 

WE SEE OUR FIRST SPACE SHIP. 
on April 10, 1955, we crossed the border from Mexico 
at El Paso, Texas, and were back in the U. S. A. 
 with only a few days to spare over the termination 
of our Mexican Tourist permit. 

We decided to drive northwest to spend a few days with 
Dr. George Williamson at Prescott, Arizona, and after that 
try to see George Van Tassel at Giant Rock. In Prescott 
we found the Williamson family at home, including Mrs. 
Williamson and their little boy. Dr. Williamson was work
ing on several interesting new books relating to saucers and 
other new age subjects. He was also very enthusiastic re
garding the efforts of his group, the Telonic Research Cen
ter, to effect outer space communication (O.S.C.) through 
the medium of light waves. Another thing which impressed 
us was the profound study he was making of the location of 
geographical fault lines of the earth in relation to the lo
cation of both atombomb explosions and of earthquakes. 
We hope that he will make public some of this interesting 
data in due course of time. 

We crossed into California at the town of Blythe and 
recalled that this was not too far from the site of the Adamski saucer contact in 1952. Dr. Williamson, who was one of 
the witnesses, had told us how to get there, and as it was 
not too much of a detour from our planned route to Giant 
Rock we decided to go in that direction. We drove first to 
the little village of Desert Center and then branched off 
onto the Parker Highway referred to in Flying Saucers Have 
Landed. We went northeast the prescribed 10.2 miles, and 
parking our car we walked off the highway to the memor
able site of the saucer landing. The region was primitive 
and deserted, and we experienced a sort of eerie thrill as we 
thought of what had occurred here. Maybe we were hoping 
that history would repeat itself — and a Venusian with 

long hair would greet us on the saucer spot. Unfortunately, 
“history” saw fit to ignore us at least at that time. 

After thus paying our respects to this place of saucer 
fame, we decided to circle around the large mountainous 
National Park region known as the Joshua Tree National 
Monument. It was certainly a rugged and desolate area 
and both of us kept a sharp lookout for flying saucers. Aft
er all one never knows when a sighting may take place. 

Helen remarked, “What a place for a saucer to land.” 

I agreed that if we were spacepeople and wanted to 
land, this region was made to order; no military planes, 
plenty of room, plenty of privacy, and two enthusiastic 
customers.

But we were doomed to disappointment this time. The 
road finally became less desolate, and we found ourselves 
in the little bustling town of TwentyNine Palms. A land
boom was on, and on the outskirts of town "five acre tracts" 
of what was once government land were being sold to mod
ern desert pioneers. An interesting phenomenon this: ma
ny people buying up five acre tracts of desert waste 150 
miles east of Los Angeles and meeting the requirement 
of building a little house on it, no bigger than an outhouse. 
There was hardly a tree on the lots — only desert under
brush and a few Joshua trees. We heard that the owners 
only show up a few times a yearl Strange we thought as 
well as interesting. 

We drove past miles of these five acre desert tracts and 
came to the little town of Joshua Tree, just north of the 
“Monument” area and approximately 125 miles east of Los 
Angeles. We spent the night in a small motel, parking the 
car in the motel lot. The next morning — it was April 22, 
1955, — we were walking toward our car when I happened 
to glance northward toward a series of mountains in the 
distance. I stopped suddenly and grasped Helen by the 
arm and said, “Do you see what I see?” 

“Yes, yes,” she exclaimed excitedly. “It is a mothership, 
a cigarshaped mothershipl”.

 

87 

It seemed to' be over and somewhat beyond a mountain 
which was some miles away. It was silvery white and was 
moving toward the right of the mountain top. 

By this time Helen had a pair of small binoculars out of 
her handbag and was so elated she had difficulty focusing 
them. We passed the glasses back and forth to get a closer 
look at the ship. By that time the ship seemed to be getting 
beyond and somewhat below the mountains. 

I called to Helen to get in the car quickly, and we started 
down sandy desert roads heading toward the mountain. We 
hoped to get behind it so we could keep the ship in sight. 
As we started out we could still see the ship from the car, 
but soon lost sight of it. It took quite a while to get to a 
point where we could see the other side of the mountain, 
and by then there was no spaceship in sight. 

Later I tried to estimate the length of the ship by com
paring it with the mountain. It seemed to us enormous. It 
covered about onethird of the mountain top and was be
yond it. My best guess is that it must have been well over 
a mile in length. As “sightings” go, we realize this one is 
a rather insignificant one considering the thousands which 
have been reported all over the world in recent years. But, 
if one has never seen a spacecraft and a "first time” comes 
along, it is never insignificant to the novice. To us it was 
a nevertobeforgotten thrill. After all we had waited what 
seemed like a long time to see one. 

That same day when we were with George Van Tassel at 
Giant Rock, we asked him if he had seen such a ship in the 
vicinity. He replied that a number of visitors at the Rock 
had reported seeing it. He himself had not seen it physic
ally, but he was perfectly aware of the fact that a large ship 
of this nature hovered over the area. Later we actually 
met some people who had similar sightings in this region, 
and trading notes on the appearance and size of the ship 
decided it was possible we may all have seen the same ship 
but on different dates. Still later when we were in San 
Diego we thought we would try an interesting experiment 

— namely, we would go to Mark Probert and inquire of 
his Inner Circle contact regarding the presence of a space
ship in the vicinity of the Joshua Tree National Monument. 
No hint was given of our sighting. To our amazement this 
group stated that a large spaceship was indeed stationed 
in this neighborhood but usually kept out of sight about 
seventy miles above the earth’s surface. Helen immediately 
inquired why it was stationed there. This led to a delay 
and an Inner Circle conference. Then the reply came: 
“They were not permitted to give the reason at this time.” 
We give this information because some of our readers may 
be interested to know that whenever we could, we utilized 
this type of comparison and coordination of information — 
whether it originated from human sources, or from extra
terrestrial or ESP sources. We were much gratified at times 
by the “verifications” of this nature which resulted. (See 
Chapters 17 & 18). 

Incidentally this matter of seeing saucers and spacephe
nomena is quite a subject in itself. We know there are many 
sincere saucer fans throughout the world who just long to 
see a saucer but never seem to have much luck. We have 
the greatest sympathy toward these people. We ourselves 
have had many disappointments along this line. We have 
sat up all night on lonely mountain tops in the cold with
out seeing any saucers. Then we have met those who seem 
to have more than their share of sightings without making 
any apparent effort. 

We have discussed this matter with many of the Saucerers. 
While most of them feel that there is no surefire way of 
guaranteeing a “sighting” some of them have expressed the 
view that one s mental attitude can be quite an important 
factor. A friendly feeling toward the spacebeings and a 
sincere desire to see a saucer is recommended by some. Over
coming impatience and developing a quiet or positive con
fidence that one will see a saucer has also been suggested. 
Focusing the desire thought on spaceships occasionally, 
not too often, and then going confidently about one’s business has also been recommended. Contacts and landings 
are of course much rarer than sightings of spacecraft in 
the air, and are certainly more difficult to achieve. Mean
while there is plenty we can learn by reading about space
ships and conditioning our minds for the fact — which all 
of us must face sooner or later — that they are more than 
purely physical manifestations. There is a physical side 
to them of course, but that is not all of the story. 

CHAPTER XIII.

GEORGE VAN TASSEL.
THE SAGE OF GIANT ROCK. 

While in Mexico we had read George Van Tassel’s 
book I Rode A Flying Saucer, and we had also heard 
about the great flying saucer conventions which he 
held annually at Giant Rock, California. However, we 
thought of him mostly as the man who in 1952 had relayed 
an important message he had received from outerspace to 
our pentagon in Washington and had received a return re
ceipt dated July 22, 1952. The message dealt with certain 
dangers which the earth faces in our usage of atomic energy. 
A few days later Washington, D. C. was “buzzed” by space
ships. We often wondered what kind of a man it would be 
who had such direct contact with spacebeings that he could 
know about such things in advance of their occurence. Now 
a great wish of ours was about to be fulfilled. We were 
about to meet George Van Tassel himself! 

Excitement and curiosity mingled as our car rolled along 
the lonely sandy road and came in sight of a mountain 
bristling with huge boulders. From the foot of it there 
extended a large flat land area hemmed in by rugged moun
tains in the distance all around us. 

“That must be the airport,” Helen exclaimed, looking 
toward the natural flat valley floor. 

“And, that must be Giant Rock,” I replied, as an enormous 
boulder, the biggest we had ever seen came into view with 
a colorful flag and a windsleeve fluttering from its sum
mit. Later we learned it was composed of solid granit all 
in one piece, that it was sixty feet high and weighed an 
estimated one hundred thousand tons. The great rock 
dwarfed our car as we passed by it and pulled up to a small 
building in the rear. It turned out to be the mess shack. 

We opened the door and suddenly found ourselves prac
tically in the midst of George Van Tassel’s family circle. 

91 

Such friendliness as greeted us is hard to describe. There 
was Mrs. Van Tassel, whose kindness to us can never be 
forgotten, his three married daughters and, let us not for
get their two lively babies. 

“Budding spacemen,” Helen called them, and everybody 
laughed and agreed. 

The wall was covered with photographs of saucers and 
convention pictures. One of these was so interesting that 
we will comment on it later. A truck drove up, the door 
burst open and soon we found ourselves talking to the male 
members of the family and shaking hands with the boss him
self — George Van Tassel. Bronzed by the sun and desert 
air he had the unmistakable appearance of the vigorous 
outdoor “pioneer” type. As I gripped his hand, I experi
enced an unmistakable feeling of liking, of kinship with 
this man I had never seen before. Despising formality he 
soon was calling us “Bryant and Helen” and we found our
selves calling him "Van”. 

The conversation quickly switched to saucers. We soon 
found out that Van has not published all of his experiences 
with saucers. This again proved an important point to us 
— that what has been written regarding saucer experiences 
often lags far behind the actualities. As we talked we won
dered what unseen forces in this world are at work to bring 
together everywhere those interested in such things. Was it 
just ordinary phenomenon applying to any community of in
terest — or did it presage something tremendous ahead — 
a new age — something “out of this world”? 

Because of his annual conventions to which he invites 
saucer enthusiasts from everywhere and which are attended 
by many hundreds of people, Van knew all the saucerers 
we knew and others besides. He wanted the latest news on 
“Ric” Williamson (Dr. George H.), Adamski, Bethurum 
and the rest. Everybody was amused at our accounts of 
George Adamski’s adventures in Mexico. It would be hard 
to find anywhere a more friendly atmosphere or a more 
kindly family circle. 

92 

 

Van has an interesting background. He was an airline 
mechanic for four years and has a backlog of twenty years’ 
experience in flying and flight testwork for such firms 
as Douglas, Howard Hughes, and Lockheed Aircraft. One 
interesting bit of information popped up in our conversa
tion. It seemed originally that he and his wife came to 
Giant Rock with the intent of running a small airport, 
a restaurant, and a beer parlorl They wanted to get out 
into the open away from cities and into the clean air and 
the freedom and quiet of the desert. 

The restaurant and beer parlor never materialized how
ever, because in the process of living with nature Van dis
covered that he possed E.S.P. (extrasensory perception) and 
telepathic gifts to an unexpected degree. He gradually 
nurtured these rare abilities and developed them until outer
space communication (O.S.C.) became a regular part of 
his daily living. His gifts in this direction run the gamut 
of methods, and he is a great believer in communication 
with spacebeings without the use of any mechanical or 
electrical equipment of any kind. All during this conver
sation we were hoping that we would be able to witness 
this extraordinary process of direct communication with 
advanced beings dwelling in higher dimensions of life. 

We became intrigued with life at “the Rock”. The air 
seemed so clean, the sunshine so bright, the stars so near at 
night — that we accepted our host’s invitation to spend a 
few days there and have returned several times since. As 
there were no sleeping accommodations for guests, we slept 
in our car parked in the shadow of the mighty rock which 
towered above us. 

The activities at the Rock were interesting. People were 
coming and going all the time. Many made it a weekend 
excursion. Some flew private planes, landed on the sandy 
airstrip and taxied near to the Rock. Some came in trailers 
and set up desert housekeeping for a few days. Others 
came in cars or station wagons. They came from every
where, some from European countries. They all wanted 

 
to see and talk to Van. Some of them were mere curiosity 
seekers. Some obviously came to flatter their ego, to be able 
to go back home and say, "I met George Van Tassel.” Some 
accepted his hospitality and scoffed at him behind his 
back. But others came with a deep and abiding interest in 
the subject of saucers and real confidence in Van. We mar
velled at the stature and qualities of this man they came 
to see, his incredible patience with the most flippant and 
annoying questions, his unfailing courtesy, his amazing 
selfrestraint and unselfish helpfulness toward all who 
came. 

We took time to drive around the property which was 
much larger than we first suspected. We went over to the 
ranch several miles distant where there was an attractive 
ranch house occupied by the family of one of his married 
daughters. There was even an outdoor swimming pood in 
this desert location. 

Here some interesting practical experiments in desert agri
culture were in progress based on O.S.C. information re
ceived from spacemen. These involved the use of univer
sal energy to stimulate plant growth and to produce other 
useful effects. We discussed this subject with Van at great 
length and he suggested that we also investigate an installa
tion at Riverside, California, which utilized universal ener
gy to prevent frost damage to an orange grove. Later he 
issued an article in his Proceedings of May, 1955, on this 
interesting subject. He also seemed convinced that a modi
fication of this principle could be used in a practical way 
to control “smog”, which is getting to be a major problem 
in some Pacific coast areas. 

Another activity interested us, although it is still pretty 
much in its preliminary stages. Ten acres had been set 
aside for it, and some architectural work had already been 
done. It was a proposed building to study the rejuvenation 
of the human body by means of universal energy, concen
trated and directed as per O.S.C. information received. The 
possibility of using O.S.C. information to speed up progress in
 many fields was discussed with Van. He feels that 
tremendous opportunities are opening up along this line, 
limited only by the following two factors: 

First, we must become actively willing to make use of 
O.S.C. information and vigorously try it out, to prove it 
experimentally to ourselves. In other words, we must ac
tively cooperate with the space intelligences giving the in
formation and do our part. Van Tassel states that such 
information is given out one step at a time, and that the 
spacebeings wait for each step to be completed before giv
ing the information for the next step. 

Second, we must have good, unselfish motives and not 
use the information either selfishly or destructively. Fail
ure to abide by these requirements, he stated, stops the flow 
of information almost instantly. He has learned these things 
from actual experience. 

Another interesting activity was the publication and 
mailing of the monthly bulletin called Proceedings in 
which, however, only a small percentage of O.S.C. infor
mation received by George Van Tassel is released to the 
public. The whole family pitches in to help on this proj
ect. Van carefully selects the material and develops the 
copy and the drawings himself. Members of the family 
assist on the stenographic work. Much of the material re
ceived is so advanced and so cosmic in nature that it would 
only be of interest to advanced or openminded scientists, 
astronomers, engineers, experimenters or metaphysicians. 
Only that deemed of more general interest is published. 
There is no fixed charge attached to a subscription to these 
Proceedings. Everything at the Rock is on a voluntary “love
offering” basis. We had the privilege of pitching in and 
helping the family with the mailing. We noted that one 
of the names on the mailing list of Proceedings was Uncle 
Sam’s F.B.I.l 

Then came an evening we had hoped for. We were in
vited to witness an O.S.C. contact with beings living 
in outer space. This process at one time was pretty much 

open to anybody who wished to attend. For good and suf
ficient reasons it is now by invitation. We went down a 
flight of stairs under the Rock, made a right angle turn 
down more stairs — fourteen steps in all — and found our
selves in a large paved room far beneath the mighty rock. 
The room contained chairs, davenports, tables and even a 
piano — also shelves filled with interesting books. 

Van took a seat in one corner and asked if I would sit 
next to him. The family gathered around forming a circle. 
An assistant rigged up a taperecorder to take down any 
communication received. 

We are trying to report accurately what we observed. 
We feel we owe it to our readers. Let us here state that 
the entire proceedings were all completly new and strange 
to us. This reporting would not be complete, if we did not 
mention one thing. I am not myself “psychic” at all — no 
more than a fence post! But I am rather sensitive to mild 
electric currents, to radiations and currents of energy, and 
I personally felt an amazing flow of energy in that room. 
It was something like a galvanic current through my body. 
I noticed that it manifested itself with particular strength 
before and during the contacts made by Van. We also 
wish to report for the sake of those who will be interested 
that some of the male members of the family circle are rath
er advanced students of the far eastern teachings of “Yoga”, 
and one of them had been with Paramhansa Yogananda 
during his years in the U nited States. 

The family started by singing songs — popular songs — 
and then some wellknown hymns. On one occasion they 
sang a certain song which Van had obtained directly from 
one of his space contacts. To us the music was very unusual, 
and the words were both simple and beautiful. It became 
a favorite song of one of his daughters. 

After a few moments Van succeeded in making the con
tact he desired. It was with a certain communications cen
ter in outerspace. Now once again let us say that we are 
not experts in such matters, but we are somewhat familiar 

with the “sight and sound rays” recognized in certain philo
sophic and esoteric works as one possible basis of cosmic 
communication. As near as we could make out, both a 
“sight ray” and a “sound ray” were being focused on Van 
from outerspace with pinpoint accuracy. Those familiar 
with Dr. Williamson’s experience will realize that this is 
far from being impossible. Advanced spacebeings are 
masters of energy. Van talks to his spacefriends in a mat
ter of fact way and helps them to focus these rays and to 
adjust their intensity so that he can endure the vibrations. 

If either the focus or the intensity of these rays or energy 
beams becomes maladjusted, Van suffers both pain and an 
excessive heating of some part of his body, often his feet. 
There is no lack of energy in the beams. On the contrary 
they appear to possess almost frightening power, and delicate 
control is of the utmost importance if Van’s body is not to 
be injured. Readjustments at times become necessary. In
cidentally Van can “see” the spacebeings with whom he 
talks and something of their surroundings, much as we ob
serve scenes on a television screen. He can “hear” them 
— sometimes like a voice inside his head and sometimes 
telepathically as powerful thoughts. 

Van told us that at one time the energy beams got so 
out of adjustment that it felt as if his body was actually 
burning up. Since then the control center has made in
stant adjustments in the rays at his slightest request. He 
also told us that the sound communication is not limited 
to these more formal occasions beneath the rock, but he 
has received the “voice” even when driving in a car on the 
highway or in his room, either during the day or night. The 
voice is not weak. It is so loud that it overpowers every
thing else in his mind. We also wish to state that Van is 
also conscious of his human surroundings during the contacts. 

When the adjustments were complete, the communica
tion center switched the contact to a spacebeing in an
other locality who gave us a remarkable discourse on an 

 

important subject of current interest. It was characterized 
by great wisdom, love, and a dispassionate but helpful at
titude toward some of our earth problems. A few ques
tions and answers were permissable — but not many. Van 
publishes some of this type of material in Proceedings, but 
he refrains from giving out very much of it. The reason 
for this is that our ways are not the ways of these advanced 
spacebeings, and their cosmic viewpoint treads too severe
ly upon some of our most orthodox and cherished beliefs. 
From the nature of the remarkable information we received 
that night, we could easily understand why Van only releases a 
small and often “watered down” version of it. How
ever, we feel that for those with sufficient understanding, 
Van might be willing to tilt the lid of the cosmic viewpoint 
of these beings on almost any subject. But sincerity of 
purpose, and a certain measure of receptivity are indis
pensable requisites. It is interesting to note that these 
spacebeings have shown themselves capable of instantly de
tecting hidden and ulterior motives. The presense of cer
tain human beings who are not sincere will in fact nullify 
the transmission. 

The history of the development of Van’s peculiar abilities 
in contacting extraterrestrial intelligences is worthy of a 
scientific study by those scientifically and seriously inter
ested in such matters. The development has gone through 
a definite series of steps or stages covering almost every 
phase of communication. More recently it has gone through 
a new phase where Van is privileged in some instances to 
initiate a contact himself. This was not true in the earlier 
stages. Van is also turning to the concept that there exists 
throughout our solar system, under the control of the com
munications section of the interplanetary government, a 
continuous “communications beam” which he calls the 
“omnibeam”. It is an energybeam somewhat in the 
thought frequency range which is “on” all of the time — 
something like a continuous T.V. or radio carrier wave. 
Those who are privileged and able to “tune in” on it mentally 
can accomplish extraterrestrial communication with
out the use of electronic or other equipment external to the 
human body. 

On another occasion we discussed with Van the photo
graph of a flying saucer which had attracted our attention 
on the wall in the mess shack. We found that he had written 
an article on it and included his own explanatory drawing 
in the Proceedings of May, 1955. The photograph first 
appeared in The Coming Of The Saucers by Kenneth Ar
nold and Ray Palmer, which stated that it was snapped at 
Hawthorne, California, on March 11, 1950, by Miss Bette 
Malles of Los Angeles. As we have stated Van is one of the 
saucerers who understands that there is both a physical 
and a supraphysical side to the saucers, and his commen
tary on this photograph bears this out. To quote briefly 
from Van’s article in Proceedings: 

“In her. (Miss Malle’s) picture she caught the ship be
tween the stages of visibility and invisibility. The light 
motor, which converts primary invisible light linesofforce 
into controllable magnetic energy, is clearly shown in oper
ation. These ships nullify our gravity by remaining inside 
their own selfgenerated force fields. Consequently the 
earth’s force field does not affect them.” 

At this point in our saucer pilgrimage both of us were 
fully aware of the fact that saucers were more than a phys
ical or earthly phenomenon. While there is definitely a 
physical aspect to the phenomenon — of infinitely more 
importance there is also a supraphysical aspect. Here is 
a saucerer with a deep understanding of both aspects and 
of many truths regarding outerspace itself which are not 
generally known. Here is a man with whom we could free
ly discuss these supraphysical aspects and learn much of 
value regarding the cosmic nature of the great subject we 
have been studying. 

Van occasionally gives saucer lectures to special groups. 
His address before the flying saucer convention at Giant 
Rock in 1954 — which was attended by many leading saucerers 
and several thousands of enthusiasts — was an outstand
ing and inspired denunciation of man’s misuse of atomic 
energy and the attendant dangers to the earth. In 1955 he 
lectured on flying saucers before the supervisory personnel 
of North American Aviation in California. This effort was 
enthusiastically received before a record attendance. 

WE TAKE LEAVE. 

We left the rock with regret, promising ourselves that 
we would return. This we were able to do on a number 
of occasions. As we headed our car westward toward Los 
Angeles, Helen asked, “What are you thinking about?” 

“Well, I am thinking,” I replied, “that we have just seen 
a great man — a cosmic minded soul — George Van Tassel. 
He is an advanced apostle in the ‘new age’ if there ever was 
one!” 

“Yes,” she agreed. “I will always think of him as the sage 
of Giant Rock and will always be grateful for the privilege 
of knowing him. He reminds me of a veritable modern 
‘John the Baptist’ crying in the wilderness, ‘Prepare ye for 
a new cosmic age’. But now, as in biblical times, the world 
pays little attention. I wonder why?” 

"Well,” I replied, “it looks as though we always need 
pioneers — rugged souls like George Van Tassel with the 
courage to be outinfront, to be ahead of the general level 
of human thought. At first no one seems to listen, but 
later — gradually perhaps they do.” 

“But what about the valuable information almost going 
to waste there at the Rock,” she protested. 

“Yes, I feel the same way,” I replied. “If the right peo
ple could take hold of such channels of cosmic informa
tion, learn to appreciate their value, and help develop 
them, finance them, protect them — there seems to be no 
limit to the practical applications that could be brought 
forth for the benefit of mankind. What an opportunity 
this would be for retired scientists or sincere cosmic minded 
resarchers — people of goodwill and with an unselfish spirit of 
service to mankind! But now Van is only one man and 
he can only do so much, but a group could accomplish much 
more. What impresses me is the willingness of the great 
cosmic beings he contacts in higher spheres of life to help 
us who are still on the earth plane.” 

“Just what type of spacebeings do you think Van is con
tacting?” asked Helen. 

“From the quality of the information coming through,” 
I answered, “which is probably as good a way as any to 
judge, they seem to be on a very high level. As near as I 
can judge they must be closely connected with the cosmic 
group which governs this solar system — particularly the 
communications group. It appears that mankind and the 
earth have reached such a critical state that we have run 
into the big boys — the planetary guardians.” 

“Why do you think the spacebeings are establishing 
these earth contacts at this time?” inquired Helen. 

“They certainly would not do this without some good 
reason,” I replied. “There are not too many of these ‘cos
mic telephones’ in the the world, but we have seen that 
they do exist and that they are available to certain people 
who learn about them and cooperate with them. Maybe if 
a sudden worldwide emergency should arise, they will be 
of untold value to those who are aware of them. Let us 
hope that we ourselves never lose touch with this space
contact. Sometime we might need it.” 

With these sobering thoughts we silently sped westward to 
our meeting with another pioneer saucerer, Daniel Fry. 

AN APPLICATION OF UNIVERSAL ENERGY.

On the way we passed through Riverside, California, 
and decided to make a brief detour to visit the orange grove 
which George Van Tassel had told us was protected from 
frost by an application of certain principles of universal 
energy. We understood that spaceships draw their energy 
from space” itself — from the sea of energy in which all 
life s manifestations take place. We often wondered why 
man on earth did not make more use of this type of ever 
present energy. We were, therefore, very curious to find 
out about this particular example first hand. It was first 
brought forth by Mr. John De Land, who passed on a few 
years ago, and it is known as the “De Land Magnetic Con
trol”. We found Mrs. De Land at home, and she directed 
us to the installation at a fifteen acre orange grove owned 
by Mrs. Eva B. Hibbs, also of Riverside. 

The owner kindly took us around the installation, part 
of which dates back to 1950. It consists primarily of a 
thirtytwo foot mast in the center of each acre of orange 
trees, down which run seven No. 10 bare copper wires paral
lel to the mast and spaced a few inches therefrom by means 
of plywood discs used as insulators and spacers. Each mast 
is made of ordinary galvanized iron pipe of two inch size 
at the base — which is set in concrete — reduced to one and 
onehalf inch and finally one inch size at the top. At the 
foot of the mast the wires run underground and then branch 
out in seven different dirrections about eighteen inches be
low the surface toward the confines of the acre plot. An 
interesting feature of the installation is that at the end of 
its underground run, each wire is first coiled around an 
"Alnico” permanent magnet about one inch in diameter 
by five inches long and then protrudes upwards slightly 
above the soil. A short length of each wire is bent back 
toward the head of the mast. One wire is oriented to mag
netic north, while the others are at equal seventh divisions 
of the compass. No man made energy or power is employed. 

The installation has done a remarkable job — not in 
reducing the atmospheric temperature in the grove — 
but in preventing the fruit from freezing, despite some 
freezing temperatures as low as 20 degrees fahrenheit and 
some unofficial temperatures of 17 degrees. Fruit that 
falls to the ground will freeze, but that attached to the 
trees will not freeze. Besides the effective frost control, 
the owner reports a noteworthy increase in both the yield 
and the quality of the fruit produced. 

One reason we were particularly interested in this installation is that it 
lends strength to a growing conviction with
in us that practical usage can actually be made of technical 
information received by O.S.C. methods — as Van has 
suggested. It seems that Mr. De Land had initially received 
the basic concepts for this work through a form of O.S.C. 
(outerspace communication). What an intriguing possi
bility! Think of the acceleration in human progress which 
could result! 

CHAPTER XIV. 
WE VISIT DANIEL FRY.

on April 26, 1955, we headed the car toward the little 
California town of Puente, some twentyfive miles 

east of Los Angeles to see Daniel Fry. Most saucer en
thusiasts know him as “the man who rode a flying saucer,” 
but his saucer experiences go way beyond this. We had 
read and reread his notable book The White Sands Inci
dent many times and likewise his later pamphlet Alan’s 
Message To Men Of Earth. 

We had difficulty finding his residence, but we finally 
located it by his name on the mailbox. Nobody was home 
so after waiting awhile we decided to return the next eve
ning. We were glad we did so, because this time we found 
him at home with all his family except the son. We met 
his wife and two nice daughters, one of whom was of high 
school age, while the other was younger. We had a wonder
ful visit. Mrs. Fry was interested in a little book store 
which she and a friend were starting in a nearby town. We 
went there with her the next day. They were specializing 
in Saucer books and allied “New Age” publications. . At 
that time Daniel Fry was still working as an instrumenta
tion technician on rockets and similar projects, which is 
his specialty. More lately, however, we have heard that he 
is writing another book and hopes to do experimental 
work on his own. We talked about our Mexican saucer ac
tivities, his own remarkable experiences and his estimate 
of the present world situation. For the sake of those who 
are not familiar with his experiences, it may be well to out
line them briefly. 

Daniel Fry up to the time of our visit had had four dis
tinct experiences with flying saucers and the extraterres
trial beings who operate them. The first experience — 
his trip on a saucer — was on a physical plane, the second 
and third were in the nature of outer space communication (O.S.C.), 
and the fourth was a combination of a physical experience and an O.S.C. experience. 
The first occurred 
on July 4, 1950, and included his 4,000 mile ride in a 
saucer and is covered in The White Sands Incident. The 
second happened about two years later, and the informa
tion obtained then has not yet been made public, but he 
is now considering releasing it. The third experience oc
curred on April 28, 1954, and is set forth in Alan’s Mes
sage. The fourth occurred on September 18, 1954, and 
we will mention it later. Both of the books came out in 
1954, and as researchers we have found it necessary to 
avoid confusing the dates of publication with the dates 
of his experiences. There was a long delay in publicizing 
the first experience. Besides his writings, Daniel Fry lec
tures occasionally on his experiences to special groups as 
do other saucerers. He delivered a lecture in Detroit, 
Michigan in 1955 sponsored by the Detroit Flying Saucer 
Club. It was a wonderful lecture and presented a wealth 
of saucer information relating to both the technical as
pects and the insistent messages of the spacebeings. 

Daniel Fry’s background should make his experiences 
of especial interest to those who are technically minded. 
While he was only able to complete his highschool course 
of education, he possesses a selfeducation in chemistry, 
physics and electronics which many a college graduate 
could well envy. Personally he appeals to us as a “saltof
theearth” type of man. He is a trained technical observer 
and a very precise thinker. He has a good reputation for 
reliability and integrity and is well respected. 

At the time of his first experience on July 4, 1950, he 
was stationed at the White Sands Proving Grounds, New 
Mexico, U.S.A., near the town of Las Cruces. The Organ 
Mountains are in the vicinity. He was then serving as an 
employee of the Aerojet General Corporation and was en
gaged in instrumentation work in connection with the 
testing of some extremely large rocket motors. It was near 
evening, and most of the personnel had gone to town to 

celebrate Independence Day — only a few remained at the 
post. Through a chain of “circumstances” he was one of 
those remaining on the base and toward evening he walked 
out onto a lonely portion of the grounds. 

A flying saucer appeared silently out of the darkened 
sky, decelerated and landed fairly near him. It was ap
proximately thirty feet in diameter and sixteen feet high. 
The shape was that of a flattened sphere — flattened at 
the top and the bottom. The material was some sort of 
metal, highly polished on the exterior, presenting a silvery 
color. There were no port holes at all, and at first he 
could see no entrance. He learned a few minutes later 
that no one was aboard it, but it was under remote control 
from a controlship or "mothership” located some 900 
miles above the earth. Its purpose was interesting. It was 
being used to gather some of our air and transport it to 
the controlship where it was mixed with the spacevisitor’s 
own air in an effort to acclimate them to breathing and liv
ing in our atmosphere, which is different from their own. 

Daniel Fry’s introduction to the visitors was quite dra
matic. After an intense inner struggle as to whether to 
run and call for help or stay and see what would happen 
— his technical curiosity finally got the better of him and 
impelled him to touch the strange object, first gingerly with 
one finger and then with the palm of his hand. He was 
noting the peculiar slippery surface of the metal and the 
fact that it was a little warmer than the air when a loud 
voice from the interior suddenly warned him in English 
that it was dangerous to touch. He jumped back, tripped 
and fell full length. A chuckle from within the saucer 
completed his utter humiliation — and this was his unique 
introduction to an extraterrestrial being — a spaceman with 
whom he was destined to have many experiences. By mu
tual agreement he calls this space friend by the name of 
"Alan”. 

Events moved quickly, and after recovering himself he 
was offered a short flight in this small ship which the 

owners called a small 'cargo carrier”. A door which fitted 
so perfectly that he had not noticed it before was opened, 
and suppressing his fears he stepped inside the saucer into 
a small cabin. The voice he had been hearing was coming 
through some type of loud speaker controlled by the moth
ership. The interior was lighted by a small projector, 
and he seated himself in one of the several available seats. 
After a short discussion it was agreed they would take him 
to see the lights of New York City, some two thousand miles 
away, and they assurred him it would not take very long. 
He asked how they expected him to see anything as the 
ship had no windows. The operator settled the question 
by directing a beam of bluish light from the projector to
ward the door. The door was of thinner material than the 
walls of the craft, and by this time the door had been 
closed. Under the action of the light beam, however, the 
door became transparent and thus served as an excellent 
window. The ship rose some thirty miles in elevation 
for most of the trip, but it descended to about twenty miles 
over New York for a better view. After circling the city, 
the ship headed westward for the return trip to White 
Sands. The entire flight covering approximately four 
thousand miles was accomplished in about thirty minutes 
time. This was an average speed of approximately eight 
thousand miles per hour, better than twice that of earth
made rockets then in use. 

All during the trip Daniel Fry persistently asked ques
tions. He told us there were literally hundreds of questions 
“beating at the fringe of his consciousness” and he asked as 
many as he could, one after the other. Each question 
brought forth a prompt, simple and understandable answer. 
As he put it, “It was as if one had placed in my hand an 
encyclopedia and said, ‘Here is all the knowledge in the 
Universe — you have thirty minutes’!” 

Most of the questions were technical. This was no in
terplanetary saucer but a small remote controlled utility 
affair, working on magnetic principles with a limited range 

and entirely dependent upon the controlship for recharg
ing its accumulator with energy. Despite some incredible 
accelerations during takeoff, Daniel Fry experienced no 
discomfort in the ship from this cause. The explanation 
given was that the application of energy was of such a na
ture that every atom of the ship and its contents — includ
ing his own body — was acted upon simultaneously, so 
that everything moved together and thus no pressures were 
felt from inertia forces. The accuracy and effectiveness of 
the remote control were noteworthy. The operators could 
control all of the forces acting upon the ship and maneuver 
it precisely, even controlling its turning on a vertical axis 
so that they could “point” the door toward objects to be 
viewed. The craft was landed with great accuracy only a 
few feet from the original takeoff point. 

However, not all of the questions were technical. Some 
were of a more general interest. Daniel Fry learned to 
his surprise that this contact was no accident but was plan
ned by the spacevisitors. In fact they even took a hand in 
some of the “circumstances” which made it possible, and 
they deliberately “ransacked” his mind prior to the con
tact to make sure of certain things. Their speaking English 
with considerable idiom was also no accident, because 
this took two years of preparation on their part. The con
trol ship was not from any particular planet but was from 
outerspace itself. 

In our own private research, we have applied our own 
methods of coordination and comparison to our study of 
this contact. We have even studied the history of various 
efforts which were made to ridicule it. We only wish that 
in our reporting we could somehow convey to our readers 
some of the qualities of Daniel Fry himself, especially his 
humility and sincerity. While our own ideas may not be 
too important to others, for the sake of the few who may 
wish to know — our own study indicated to us that this was 
a physical contact and we feel that the information gained 
will in time emerge as an historic landmark in man’s effort 

to understand and master outerspace. 

Daniel Fry’s second and third experiences took place at 
a location far distant from the first — at a little ranch which 
he had acquired in an isolated and wooded section in the 
State of Oregon not far from Grant’s Pass. In contrast to 
the first, these were not what would ordinarily be termed 
“physical” contacts. They were O.S.C. contacts, that is 
outerspace communication contacts, and took the form of 
“a voice inside his head”. The voice was that of his space 
friend Alan, so clear and distinct that Daniel Fry was able 
to carry on a conversation in this manner. We learned 
that this type of communication holds no mystery for him. 
He realizes that spacebeings are masters of energy and pos
sess the ability to “modulate” currents of energy on the 
auditory nerves of a human being, which will then appear 
to that person as sound or speech. 

On the occasion of the second contact, Alan in this man
ner was able to give him considerable information which, 
however, he has not yet published. As we have previously 
stated, he is now working on this and may release it in the 
near future. The third contact on April 28, 1954, was of 
a similar nature, but it was particularly interesting be
cause it was the only case in which he tried to initiate a 
contact himself. After a three day effort he finally suc
ceeded, only to be very severely rebuked by Alan for his 
failure to share and make public his other experiences. It 
was only after this severe prodding by his space friend that 
he overcame his fears and distrust of his own abilities and 
was stimulated to put his experiences in writing. It was 
this contact also which gave him Alan’s Message To Men Of 
Earth. 

This message is a remarkable exposition of what is wrong 
with our world and the chief remedy that is needed. The 
major earth difficulty, as set forth in Alan’s Message is that 
our physical science has developed so much faster than our 
social science and our religious science that we are danger
ously out of balance. By developing mutual understanding and 
helpfulness between peoples everywhere, we must 
strengthen our social and religious foundations sufficiently 
and develop them faster in order to support our scientific 
progress, or our entire civilization will soon collapse. It is 
a stirring message couched in noncritical terms of helpful
ness, wisdom and love. Many people want physical flying 
saucers without “any strings attached”. We doubt if this 
is possible. The spacepeople come to earth always with a 
purpose and a serious message. Why try to ignore this fact? 

While we were talking to Daniel Fry in his home, we ask
ed him if this third event had ended his experiences with the 
spacepeople. He went to a desk and drew forth a photo
graph of a small saucer flying over some trees and a build
ing which he had taken on September 18, 1954. He explain
ed that this was his fourth and latest experience with his 
extraterrestrial friend Alan. As saucer photographs go, it 
was not the best in the world by any means. But the cir
cumstances under which it was taken are so unique that 
we think it is worthy of special note. The taking of it in
volved both an O.S.C. and a physical experience. Daniel 
Fry was driving his car on Garvey Boulevard, east of Los 
Angeles, when he suddenly heard Alan’s voice inside his 
head telling him that if he had a camera he would be able 
very shortly to photograph a flying saucer. He did not 
have a camera, but he spied a drug store which he was then 
passing on the opposite side of the road. He made a quick 
Uturn on the Boulevard — a minor miracle in itself con
sidering the traffic — rushed into the drug store, and hur
riedly bought a little Brownie Holiday camera. He asked 
the proprietor to load it with film quickly as he wished to 
take some pictures of a flying saucer. One can well imagine 
what the proprietor thought. He resumed his trip toward 
his destination, and between the towns of Baldwin Park 
and Azusa, California, he spied the saucer. It hovered and 
tilted and practically “posed” for him while he took his 
pictures. Later he returned the film to the proprietor of 
the drug store, told him they were the flying saucer pictures 
and asked if he would please develop them. 
We include this picture in our book — a physical picture of 'a 
physical saucer, but taken as the result of an O.S.C. message. 

CHAPTER XV. 

OUR VISIT WITH MEADE LAYNE.

By this time in our pilgrimage we had been awakened 
to a very startling thing, at least it is very startling to 
most people when they first begin to grasp it, name
ly that flying saucers are more than a mere physical man
ifestation. Fortunately for us this astonishing fact was not 
suddenly thrust upon us in the early stages of our investi
gation. If it had been it is entirely possible that we too 
might have joined many others in quitting the whole thing 
as a silly waste of time, as fiction, or buncombe, or fakery, 
or dreams, or some such thing. As a matter of fact the supra
physical aspect of saucers dawned upon us so gradually that 
we never even felt it as a shock, but rather as a logical, reas
onable and even natural extension of human knowledge 
into higher dimensions of life. 

We quickly realized, however, that this supraphysical as
pect of saucers was indeed unexplored territory. Most 
saucer enthusiasts were in blissful ignorance of the fact that 
there even existed any aspect beyond the physical. They 
were so exicted about physical saucers that this phase alone 
was almost too much for them. But the people we most 
wanted to talk to were the more advanced researchers who 
had already put two and two together regarding the supra
physical aspects. One such researcher whom we especially 
wanted to meet was Meade Layne, a veteran of many years 
experience in probing the secrets of the borderland that 
lies between the seen and unseen worlds. Surely he could 
help us to understand the “unseen” phases of spacecraft. 

In order to meet him we headed our car toward Southern 
California, and on April 29, 1955, we rolled into San Diego 
where he lives. Our speedometer showed that our saucer 
pilgrimage to date had now covered over 16,000 miles — 
replete with many wonderful experiences. Life to us had 
indeed become a thrilling adventure. 

112 

It was still early afternoon and we decided to go directly 
to Meade Layne’s office. For years he has served as National 
Director of what is called the Borderland Sciences Re
search Associates. This is a somewhat informally organized 
group of individuals living in many different localities 
which for a number of years, under Meade Layne’s leader
ship, has been carrying on some exceptional research ac
tivities. Here is a representative group of curious people 
whose desire to investigate is uninhibited. The usual creeds, 
dogmas, theories and thought patterns of stiff orthodoxy 
mean nothing to them. They investigate and study almost 
every kind of phenomena in that “borderland” of science 
which lies between the physical and the higher manifesta
tions of life. Their “meat” is the interesting facts, events 
and phenomena which “orthodox” science either cannot or 
will not investigate. A few brief examples of the subjects 
they have tackled are such things as strange appearances or 
disappearances, variations in gravity, underground races, 
teleportation, apportation, materialization, clairvoyance, 
clairaudience, the powers of Huna, parapsychological phe
nomena, strange photographic phenomena, the auras of 
man, and many many other similar subjects. Any associate 
can mail a report of his individual research to headquarters 
where it is ably edited by Mr. Layne and often published 
in the B.S.R.A. periodical called the Round Robin. 

Fortunately we found both Mr. Layne and his wife “at 
home” in the B.S.R.A. Headquarters. They welcomed us 
as fellow researchers. We soon discovered that both of 
them had been to Mexico, and Mr. Layne could do an 
excellent job of speaking Spanish. The Mexican saucer 
situation was of great interest to them, and we discussed 
it at some length. 

We noted that a room was filled with many rare books on 
borderland subjects which are yet too little understood by 
man to be classed as “science”, yet too important to be 
neglected. We could have spent hours browsing, but as 
it was Mr. Layne loaded us up with enough fascinating books 

to keep us busy for weeks. The breadth and grasp of his 
brilliant mind, his vast knowledge of borderland things 
far beyond the level of the average human awareness, his 
keen sense of humor and his graciousness in sharing his 
investigations with others, all this combined made our 
visits a never to be forgotten privilege. We say visits, be
cause during the months we spent in San Diego we found 
ourselves returning many times to sit at the feet of this 
great researcher and to listen to his wisdom. We are very 
grateful for the benefit of his experience in understanding 
the more advanced phases of the peculiar phenomena now 
appearing in our skies. 

At one time he showed us an aurascope — an instrument 
which he and his associates have used to explore the aura 
or emanations of energy which surround the physical bodies 
of all living things. This proved to be a rather simple look
ing instrument consisting of a metal handle from which 
protruded a shiny metal wire. The wire came from the 
handle straight to start with, then went into a helix, and 
then straight again, ending in a peculiar tubular tip. It 
was like a metal “divining rod” or "dowsing wand”. 

I immediately tried it out on Helen. It worked! The 
tip of the instrument deflected away from her as much as 
fortyfive degrees. Heavens! What an aura she had, be
lieve it or not. She even had “wings” protruding from her 
back! I found myself wondering what a human being would 
really look like if anyone could see all of him — the “seen” 
and the “unseen” portions. Helen insisted on trying the 
instrument on me, but I strenuously demurred. I was 
afraid she might discover some horns protruding from my 
skull — or at least something not so flattering as wings. We 
also tried out Meade Layne’s “Kilner Goggles” — marked 
with the label of the London Psychic Educational Center, 
London, England. They are intended, as we understand it, 
to help develop auric vision. To us they made everything 
look a peculiar shade of red. 

Mr. Layne also showed us something of especial interest 

to saucer students — a substance which has been called 
“angel’s hair’’. It was a name given to the mysterious white 
and often matted hairlike substance which has sometimes 
fallen out of the sky and descended onto trees, telegraph 
wires, etc. It has been associated with the presence of fly
ing saucers. It has a way of evaporating when held too long 
in the hand. Later we found out what the spaceships use 
it for (See Chapter 18, Q. 22). 

We had numerous discussions with Meade Layne on 
the supraphysical aspects of flying saucers and allied sub
jects, and may we say that he and many of his associates, 
from their years of experience in borderland researches, 
have not been fooled by the glib and pat explanations with 
which orthodox scientists and entrenched officialdom have 
essayed to explain away and “whitewash” the entire saucer 
phenomena. They know from experience that the human 
mind of man will go to any lengths to rationalize in terms 
of natural phenomena that which it is incapable of under
standing. Failing in this it will deny the facts and do every
thing it can to discredit those who are having saucer ex
periences. This is exactly what has happened. The human 
mind is very jealous of its threedimension ignorance. This 
free thinking research group has been quick to discern the 
supraphysical aspect of the phenomena being reported 
and the fact that it can neither be explained nor explained 
away by a purely physical approach. Therefore, they have 
lost no time in investigating it from higher points of view. 
After all this is the type of thing in which they are both 
interested and experienced. 

It seems to us almost incredible that any serious minded 
researcher could overlook the noteworthy contributions of 
this veteran researcher and his group in this field of en
deavor. In our humble opinion their early work on the 
supraphysical aspects of saucers is outstanding and will be 
so recognized in due course of time. Parts of this research 
are set forth in Meade Layne’s book Flying Discs — The 
Ether Ship Mystery And Its Solution issued from B.S.R.A. 

headquarters in 1950 and The Coming Of The Guardians 
issued in 1954. The latter represents a work which he pro
duced with the assistance of Mark Probert’s “Inner Circle”. 
Not too many saucer enthusiasts we have met are familiar 
with these researches. What a pity — or maybe it is not 
a pity — because possibly they are just a little too advanced 
for the average “fan”. We have all learned that the higher 
aspects of saucers are not within the range of many people’s 
interests or their capacity to grasp the reality of things be
yond the boundaries of the five physical senses. As a great 
master scientist once remarked some twothousand years 
ago, “I have yet many things to say unto you, but ye cannot 
bear them now.” 

In our thought the great pioneer saucerers are helping 
to bring to present day humanity some of these things. 
Many cannot yet bear them, but there are also thousands 
who are ready to listen. It is for those “important few” that 
the pioneers labor. 

Because part of Mead Layne’s research had been in con
nection with Mark Probert’s “Inner Circle”, we resolved 
that Mark Probert would be the next stop on our Flying 
Saucer Pilgrimage. 

CHAPTER XVI. 

THE HOUR OF DECISION. 
to this point in our pilgrimage — before taking any 
further steps — there are valid reasons for our pausing for an hour of decision! We reached this point 
ourselves, and wish now to extend this consideration to 
our readers. You see we have had plenty of experience with 
those who reach a certain point and then retreat! For ex
ample, a friend of ours became interested in saucers and 
really went into the subject. We met him later and asked 
how he was getting along and he replied, “Well, studying 
saucers was fine as long as they were physical. But there 
came a time when ‘implications’ set in. To tell the truth, 
I almost died of the implications!” 

We have seen many good people fold up when they come 
to the implications. At first they were all agog with saucer 
enthusiasm. Then some of the truth of the implications 
began to dawn on them, and they just couldn't take it. Sud
denly they wanted to “give the saucers back to the Venu
sians” and wash their hands of them forever. The implica
tions dealt too severe a blow to their smug little view of 
life. The supraphysical aspects were too much for them. 
It takes a certain endowment of the pioneer spirit to pursue 
the saucers to their lairs and fearlessly appraise the implica
tions. 

A brilliant young engineer became enthusiastically in
terested in the subject of saucers. He read all the litera
ture, attended lectures, joined a saucer group. Then all 
of a sudden he became stone cold on the subject. He would 
not open his mouth about it. He developed a kind of fur
tive glance over his shoulder. He would not be “seen 
dead” with anybody who had saucer experiences or was 
interested or active in this research. This was such an in
teresting case that we persevered until we found the true 
answer. What do you think it turned out to be? His employer 
had found out about his saucer interest and dropped 
broad hints that it “wasn’t good for business”. He became 
fearful of losing his job and therefore quit all saucer activity. 

It looks as if in our “free” world some of the saucer 
pioneers who really want to learn may have to go under
ground. In fact many of them have. We found that there 
exists today a worldwide saucer underground — a newage 
underground — a fraternity of those who know, some of 
them instinctively, that great changes are due in this world 
and that help from “on high” is a solid actuality at this 
time. It is easier for many who are interested in saucers to 
meet in private. Then they do not have to face the scorn, 
ridicule and even persecution of this world. 

There is the case of the Mexican chauffeur Salvadore Vil
lanueva Medina who sat up most of the night with two 
men from outerspace. He did not tell his story to the 
public until many months after it happened. Why? Be
cause of fear. Fear of ridicule, fear of being thought insane 
or at least peculiar or unreliable, fear of his job. 

Then there was an exceptionally fine young man in a 
government position. He was a sincere researcher and join
ed with others in a research effort. Suddenly he too quit. 
He privately told us he was afraid for his job and his career. 
He found out that to his superiors the spacepeople were, to 
say the least, “personae non gratae”. 

Another enthusiastic saucerer belonged to a religious 
group. He was doing fine until the hierarchy of the group ex
pressed severe objections. He not only quit his saucer ac
tivity but began to point the finger of condemnation toward 
all saucer investigators. 

If this shocks you a bit, just remember that the subject 
of saucers at the present time is not respectable — no, not 
even that of physical saucers. They will be in time, but 
right now they are not a part of “tradition” or of “eminent 
conservative respectability” in the fields of education, astron
omy, science, engineering, religion or government. Saucerers are so far out in front of conventional concepts that the 
pioneers are in an exposed position. Everyone can take a 
crack at them with the impunity of timehonored knowledge. 

It takes courage to be a saucerer. It takes courage to be 
interested in saucers. But it takes more courage to follow 
the supraphysical aspects. The situation is not much dif
ferent in a way than that which existed in the time of 
Christopher Columbus. All of the organized, conservative 
and eminently respectable scientific and philosophical 
thought of the day was “against” — what? It was “against” 
the cosmic truth that the earth was round and that great 
unexplored continents existed. It was against anything in 
advance of the prevailing conventional and limited view 
of life in that day and age. The world was flat; everybody 
could see it was flat. If you sailed off the edge of the flat
ness, you would fall into oblivion. Prevailing science and 
officialdom was against and looked askance at any pro
ponent of a different view. As we see it, the saucerers of 
today are nothing more and nothing less than the rugged 
"Columbuses” of our time — with this noteworthy excep
tion: that while Columbus was calling attention merely 
to a round world and possibly a new continent or two, the 
saucerers of today are calling attention to entire inhabited 
planets, solar systems, and life and civilizations in outer
space. No wonder conventional thought is arrayed against 
them. 

At present these modern pioneers are putting up with 
much ridicule because they believe they are right. It seems 
increasingly evident that eventually it will be the hide
bound conventionalists, the “educated ignorant”, who will 
be driven from their seats of knowledge of things that are 
not so. We feel certain that their egotism is eventually going 
to experience a terrible deflation process, and they are not 
going to like it. Very few of our present “isms” and “ologies” 
are going to stand up under the impact of unfolding cosmic 
truth. It is going to take its toll of some of our most time

honored and sacred beliefs — whether they are called science, 
astronomy, religion, philosophy, psychology, metaphysics, 
medicine, or what not. Few branches of human learning are 
going to come through this unfoldment of truth unscathed 
or unchastised. 

We pride ourselves on our great civilization. Every 
civilization prides itself on being the greatest. The human 
ego knows no bounds. May we state that if we could see 
ourselves as the spacemen see us, our egotism would be 
flattened to 'a minus quantity. They tell us they, not we, 
have records of earth civilizations going back billions of 
years, right back to the starting “vortex” that formed the 
earth. They have records of civilizations on this earth 
that knew how to overcome gravity, how to travel in space 
without burning fuels, and how to tap sources of energy 
and make energy applications that we are only now begin
ning to relearn. Thus it is that when these modern pioneer 
saucerers begin to call our attention to these advanced 
things, we on earth resist the truth. This is no laughing 
matter. How are we ever going to learn if governments 
suppress the facts, business institutions fire their employees 
who become interested, religious groups say it is the work 
of the devil, and the public regards all pioneer saucerers 
as crackpots? 

When we found out that flying saucers led us right out of 
this world, we ourselves had to face a decision — whether 
to follow them into supraphysical realms or retreat to the 
physical. We decided to go ahead. But we cannot make this 
decision for you. Each one must decide for himself. 

You see, the truth which we were seeking turned out to 
be much bigger than we ever expected. Do not get the idea 
for one moment that we have learned all of the truth — not 
by any means. In fact we have learned how little we know. 
Maybe that is the beginning of wisdom! But we feel we 
have learned something about this great subject, something 
about the saucerers, the flying discs and the beings who oper
ate them, and about the regions of outerspace from which 

they come. But we realize that we have learned many of 
these things for ourselves. How can one learn something 
for someone else? That is our problem. Moreover, some 
of these things we have learned have come from sources 
which some of our readers may not wish to accept. We have 
reached a point where cosmic receptivity is the main fac
tor. A wise man once said, “You can never teach another 
anything. All you can do is hold a cosmic truth before his 
consciousness, and if he is ready, something from within 
him will respond to that truth. Learning comes, not from 
without, but from within.” 

Thus far we have acted as reporters and have reported 
things and events objectively as we saw them. Now we are 
about to go into the higher phases of space phenomena and 
to use higher sources of information. We are going to deal 
more with cosmic concepts than objective events. There
fore, in this second phase of our pilgrimage, as we turn to 
the supraphysical aspects of saucers rather than the phys
ical, we shall continue to report our experiences just as 
they were and not “pull any punches”. In the remainder 
of this book — to use some forceful American vernacular 
— we are going to “lay it on the line”. Some of you will go 
with us into the higher reaches of our subject — others will 
not. 

We have now come to a point where we realize that fly
ing saucers themselves per se are no longer of prime impor
tance . Certainly we would all like to take a ride in one. It 
would be a thrilling experience. But now it is not physical 
saucers that are the important thing but what lies behind 
the physical aspects. From now on we are not even particu
larly concerned with physical proofs. You see, we are going 
to study O.S.C. (outerspace communication) and messages 
being received, and we are going to give due weight to 
them in building our picture of outerspace. We are going 
to listen and let beings who live in higher dimensions of 
life tell us what flying saucers are. After all they ought to 
know more about them than we do. We are going to study 

many things which are of intense interest. 

It is not that the cosmic truth is either terrible or terrify
ing. That depends on our viewpoint. We think it is mag
nificent and glorious beyond all human conceptions. But 
it is different, very different, from ordinary human concepts. 
It is this difference which causes some people to run away 
from cosmic truth. The fear of the unknown engulfs them. 

How are we going to learn cosmic truth? Just the way 
every new worthwhile phase of truth has come to mankind 
in the past — the hard way — through pioneers. We are 
going to learn through the sturdy pioneers — the saucerers 
— those with enough “intestinal fortitude” to face ridicule, 
scorn, loss of jobs, scientific and religious ignorance, and to 
stick to their guns and eventually give painful but glorious 
birth to a new wisdom and a new age. If we but realized it, 
the advent of flying saucers and the opportunity of learning 
about them is a wonderful way to learn cosmic truth. The 
saucerers are an outstanding aid to present day cosmic 
education. 

Some people when they begin to glimpse the stupendous 
picture of inhabited outerspace feel very uncomfortable. 
This is perfectly understandable. They wish to wrap their 
beloved physical robes about themselves more closely and 
hurry back into the more familiar and congenial scenes of 
threedimensional life. Let no one blame them. Let each 
of us respect each other’s views — even though it means a 
parting of ways. New age students will understand that 
this parting of the ways which is now going on all over the 
world is a very deep thing in itself and one which carries 
with it a tinge of cosmic sadness. 

For those of you who are still with us, we are going to 
tilt the lid on some of the deep cosmic aspects of flying 
saucers. To do this we are actually going to use both phys
ical and O.S.C. information. Why not? It is a new age dis
pensation, is it not? It is pouring to earth through many 
channels, is it not? We are new age individuals, are we not? 
It is here for us to use, and it would not be intelligent to 

disregard it. So we propose to utilize all new age sources 
of information — both physical sources and O.S.C. sources 
— and consider each bit of information as an important lit
tle piece of an enormous crossword puzzle. We will analyze, 
sift and coordinate this information, and then we will en
deavor to fit all of the little pieces together into a gigantic 
whole — and then take a look at it. This will represent 
our new age panoramic view of outerspace and they that 
dwell therein! 

So — let’s get on with the most exciting part of our pil
grimage! 

CHAPTER XVII. 

MARK PROBERT AND THE INNER CIRCLE. 

We now invite those who did not desert our pilgrim
age — after they learned of our intention to utilize 
unconventional sources of information and probe 
the supraphysical aspects of flying saucers — to accompany 
us on our next adventure, that of becoming well acquainted 
with Mark Probert and his Inner Circle”. 

Mark Probert is the famous and respected “sensitive” of 
San Diego, California, whom Meade Layne worked with in 
bringing forth the remarkable book The Coming Of The 
Guardians. It is a veritable treasure house for the more 
advanced researcher who is not afraid of tackling the higher 
aspects of outerspace. In fact Mark Probert and his “Inner 
Circle” present an outstanding phenomenon all by them
selves, even if there were no such things as flying saucers. 
We have talked many times of O.S.C. (outerspace communi
cation), and we have already given the reader a few ex
amples of certain types. Now we are going to tell you about 
another interesting variation of O.S.C. — typified by that 
extraordinary individual Mark Probert. We are even going 
farther than that. We are going to show you exactly what 
happened when we asked his Inner Circle of teachers, liv
ing in a higher phase of life, to answer some specific ques
tions on flying saucers. We are going to show you what 
these O.S.C. messages are like. 

But let us not get ahead of ourselves. First let us meet 
the Proberts and get acquainted with their interesting 
history. Knowing that they travel extensively and are often 
away from home, we felt ourselves fortunate indeed when 
we discovered that they were in town. We were not strangers 
because we had met Mark and his wife Irene once before, 
but very briefly, in Detroit, Michigan. 

Mark and Irene Probert are very friendly people. They 
remembered us and extended a warm welcome. There is a 

very human side to the Proberts, and we were privileged 
to find this out through many weeks of close association 
during our extended stay in San Diego. We accompanied 
them on some of their lecture tours. It is not our inten
tion to tell the detailed story of this amazing phenomenon 
of the Proberts. It would take volumes to do it justice, 
and we hope that some day the true, full story will be made 
public. It is an Arabian Night’s story in every day life — 
if ever there was one. We do feel, however, that a few back
ground notes are pertinent to show the nature of this type 
of O.S.C. (outerspace communication). 

First let us trace briefly the development of Mark Pro
bert’s extraordinary O.S.C. abilities so the reader will un
derstand that such things are often a growth and not just 
a sudden development. The external manifestation of 
his abilities commenced back in 1943 shortly after Mark 
and Irene Probert were married. We have received per
mission to tell a few rather personal things which happened 
shortly thereafter. What happened was that Mark Probert 
started talking in his sleep. It was not just a little talk. It 
was a lot of talk, and it persisted and persisted. This would 
ordinarily be disturbing enough in any marriage, but that 
was not the half of it. He was doing a lot of talking — but 
in strange languages which Irene Probert could not under
stand! 

The situation reached such a pass that Mark was finally 
moved into a special room where two men friends who 
could speak seven different languages between them were 
able to keep watch and listen. In this manner they were able 
definitely to identify such languages as Italian, Portuguese, 
Spanish, German and French — some of them spoken very 
fluently by Mark during sound sleep. When he awakened 
he would remember nothing about it. In his sleep he would 
thus speak of politics, historical events, personal experiences, 
strange people and places, and even recite poetry in foreign 
tongues which he has never studied or been at all familiar 
with in his waking life. 

However, some of the languages still defied identifica
tion. In time, with the help of an expert on ancient and 
forgotten tongues, Chinese, Mongolian, Sanskrit and Hin
dustani dialects were added as further encores to Mark 
Probert’s amazing unconscious repertoire of languages. 
Finally, Meade Layne and a group of scientific researchers 
became interested in Mark Probert and started an orderly 
and scientific program of investigation and development 
which lasted over eight years. 

We shall briefly recount a few of the developments which 
followed as given to us by Mark Probert himself. The first 
thing they discovered was that Mark was a “sensitive” of 
extraordinary natural abilities — a veritable cosmic tele
phone. He could transmit messages from certain beings 
in other planes of life whether he was asleep or awake. He 
was both clairaudient and to a lesser extent clairvoyant. 
He could sit at a typewriter and get messages from these 
beings faster than his fingers could respond. It gradually 
developed that the strange languages came from an amazing 
tightknit group of advanced personalities in a different 
dimension of life who were developing Mark Probert as 
their mouthpiece or telephone to this world. They were 
practicing to get Mark into good operating condition. They 
had a purpose and a program to fulfill, hence the persis
tence of their voices — which still spoke in hardtounder
stand foreign tongues. 

The foreign language barrier proved a very great handi
cap to Meade Layne and to the researchers who were trying 
to interpret the messages. They made persistent efforts to 
see if the communicators could not bring forth the mes
sages in the English language. Fantastic as it may seem, 
this was eventually accomplished — at least to a degree of 
understandable English. 

However, even today the unseen communicators often 
start out in Chinese or something resembling Sanskrit, or 
some other very ancient language which represented the 
communicator’s “mother tongue” at one time on earth. 

126 

 

Then after they “warmup”, so to speak, they switch to 
English. Many times they have been asked how they are 
able to do this. The only reply they give is that they “shift 
their thought pattern” to English. They also have stated 
that the entire activity represents a very complicated hand
ling and control of energy from their plane of existence 
to ours. They even have to draw energy from Irene Probert 
as well as supply some of their own energy to make the 
“hookup” work. Apparently they regard it all as a bit of 
a miracle themselves. The type of English transmitted in
cidentally cannot be called fluent, except in the case of 
those mentors whose mother tongue was English, or who 
for some reason or another had occasion to talk it fluently 
at some time. Otherwise it resembles a “foreigner speaking 
English” — with a decided accent. 

His mentors, or “teachers” as Mark Probert prefers to 
call them, gradually began to reveal and introduce them
selves. Mark was as amazed and astounded as anyone when 
this cosmic “who’s who” began to unfold to him. In fact, 
he is still surprised to this day that he, Mark Probert, is 
actually a part of a circle of such vast cosmic knowledge 
and intelligence and its effort to bring certain informa
tion to earth. The Inner Circle is composed of sixteen ad
vanced beings, all of whom at one time or another ex
perienced earth life, some of them fairly recently, others 
thousands of years ago. Utilizing his clairvoyant ability on 
one occasion, six of these beings suddenly without any warn
ing showed themselves to Mark. They were arrayed in the 
costumes and colors which they wore at one time while on 
earth. Mark told us that this sudden event almost frighten
ed him out of his wits. He was in his home, and he tripped 
over a chair in his panic to run out of the house. But since 
he has come to know them and practically live with them, 
they are now like a loving family — only they are in a higher 
phase of life while Mark and Irene live on the earth plane. 
The higher mentors guard and watch over the earth mem
bers as if they were children of their special care. At times 

they exert amazing powers of assistance which only those 
close to the Proberts know anything about. No one can use 
Mark as a channel to earth without their express permission. 

The head of the group is an advanced being of excep
tional wisdom and kindliness called the “Yada Di ShiIte”. 
The word Yada means “high priest”. He lived in a very 
ancient civilization on earth called “Yu” or “Yuga”, over 
500,000 years ago, located in the region of the Himalayan 
Mountains. Another member of the group is Ramon Na
talli, who was an astronomer in Rome, Italy, in the 17th 
Century and was a friend of Galileo. Still another mem
ber is the Ancient Chinese Philosopher Laotse. Others in
clude a Maharaja and individuals who were teachers, phys
icians and holy men. There are also several interesting 
women in the group. Three of the sixteen members of the 
circle have not yet disclosed themselves, but Mark has been 
told they will at the right time. 

Mark Probert himself is an interesting and very likeable 
individual. He is of medium height and decidedly on the 
slender side. He possesses the most expressive face, the 
most “mobile” face, we have ever seen. Emotions are pic
tured on it instantly as on a screen. Certain Hollywood ac
tors whom he knows have urged him to use this ability in 
the motion picture field, but he has declined because of 
his amazing relationship to the Inner Circle. He loves 
to paint in either oils or water colors, and this is his 
dearest hobby. His ability along this line is remarkable as 
he has never had a painting lesson in his life. He has used 
this ability to paint the portraits of various members of 
the Inner Circle. Mark and his wife are both excellent 
company. He is witty, full of fun, enjoys a good laugh, and 
is totally unassuming. There are those who claim that Mark 
is the Inner Circle himself subconsciously. Nothing amuses 
Mark more than this. The idea that somehow he, Mark, 
is himself the sum total of all the cosmic wisdom and ex
perience of his great teachers sends him into peals of laugh
ter. We have all had some good laughs at this and have 

agreed with Mark that if this is the case, the world has 
certainly overlooked its greatest citizen! 

In our research efforts, we have had the privilege of 
being with Mark and Irene many times while these advanc
ed beings of the Inner Circle have expressed themselves 
through Mark. Sometimes Mark will sit down at his type
writer and simply type the “dictation” of his teachers like 
a stenographer, which he hears as clearly as if they were 
talking in the room. They have dictated two entire books 
to him in this manner, and they expect to dictate two more. 
As a sidelight we might add that they sometimes use words 
unfamiliar to Mark. In this case he takes the words down 
phonetically and later verifies them by the aid of a good
sized dictionary. His mentors’ knowledge of English words 
and word meanings is simply extraordinary. Their avowed 
purpose is to educate human beings, to help lift mankind 
out of its ignorance into greater cosmic knowledge, and to 
demonstrate the actuality and feasibility of useful con
tacts with higher spheres of life. Mark’s ability is not used 
for personal problems or trivial things. 

On other occasions the manner of communication is 
different. Mark Probert goes to sleep, and the members of 
the inner circle use his voice as their own. In this case 
they even control his gestures. There is nothing “spooky” 
or offensive about this whatever. It is always done in full 
daylight or in a fully lighted room. The whole thing has 
an incredible naturalness about it. It seems as if one is 
conversing directly with members of the Inner Circle (which 
is just what one is doing). We found to our amazement 
that they can talk on any subject of human interest in bril
liant fashion. They can hold their own with any group of 
the earth s scientists, astronomers, philosophers, metaphys
icians, doctors, teachers or government officials — and can 
show them unsuspected hidden errors in their theories and 
practices and help them in a kindly way. We feel it is 
too bad that university groups, engineering societies, astro
nomical researchers, philosophical and metaphysical groups 

do not avail themselves of this amazing and useful contact 
with higher beings. We feel sure that the Inner Circle 
would do its part — with one priviso: the motives and in
terest must be constructive and educational, not destructive. 
The Inner Circle at times gives lectures before worthy groups 
— with a question and answer period at the end. 

These beings of the Inner Circle evidently live in a high
er plane of consciousness than ours where they can observe 
and study anything they wish to on this earth. At the 
same time they have access to endless information regard
ing still higher planes of existence. They have explained 
to us that it is possible for men to tune into realms of life 
so advanced that these realms have little relationship to 
earth life. Very advanced beings who have never experi
enced earth life are not particularly interested in earth 
man, who to them is still almost in an antlike stage of de
velopment compared to their own. In other words, the 
Inner Circle informed us that earth man can tunein so high 
in outerspace that he will not receive much practical help, 
or tunein so low that the information received is useless. 
We must learn to contact the groups who are interested 
in us, feel a responsibility toward us, and are in a position 
to help us. 

All the Inner Circle members did take part in earth life 
at one time or another and thus still have a keen interest 
in helping earth man to progress from his threedimensional 
prison. The Mark Probert activity was planned with this 
in view and with the full consent of Mark Probert himself 
— otherwise it would not be possible. The thing that made 
a great impression on us was this: they of the Inner Circle 
are never dictatorial in anything they say or do. While 
they seem to possess an endless cosmic perspective, knowl
edge and wisdom, they never say, “Do this,” or “Do that.’ 
Nor do they ever say, “This is the Truth, the absolute 
Truth, take it or leave it.” All they say is, “This is our 
viewpoint, but if you cannot accept it, you are entitled to 
your own viewpoint.” Somehow or other, we have always 

expected that great advanced beings would be like this, 
and we have not been disappointed. 

We believe our readers will be interested in one particu
lar experience we had. The Proberts had come to our home 
in San Diego, and we were all seated and conversing in our 
living room. Suddenly Mark paused and said in a matter 
of fact way, 'Ramon Natalli (the astronomer and scien
tist) is here.” Before we knew it, with Mark’s help we 
were all engaged in an amazingly natural conversation with 
this great intelligence. As an engineer I was very much 
interested in the installation at Riverside, California, where 
universal energy is being used to prevent freezing of an 
orange grove. I asked our unseen scientist if he was familiar 
with it. He replied, “No, but please wait just a moment.” 
We waited. In a few minutes he returned knowing all about 
the installation! We discussed it in great detail — but some
thing was bothering me. How had he been able to inspect 
a technical installation 110 miles distant, find out all about 
it and return in about two minutes of earth time? Finally 
I summoned up enough courage to ask our visitor. His 
reply staggered us, and we shall never forget it. He simply 
said, “I did not have to go anywhere. There is no here 
nor there. There is no place to go to, or come from, but 
Mind!” 

After becoming acquainted with the Inner Circle and 
sensing something of its integrity, its cosmic viewpoint, and 
its kindliness, we found ourselves eager to ask them a 
series of questions on flying saucers. The prospect of clar
ifying some of the flying saucer phenomena and verifying 
other O.S.C. data regarding them through the viewpoint 
of these intelligences really intrigued us. However, we 
decided to move slowly. We did not know how the Inner 
Circle would react to this. 

While in Mexico we had read a recently published book 
which disturbed us. It referred to flying saucers, the new 
age ahead, and indulged in some rather disturbing predic
tions. We decided, before approaching the subject of the 

saucers, to find out if the Inner Circle would be willing 
to help clarify some of the disturbing points in this book. 
We prevailed upon Mark and Irene to ask the Inner Cir
cle if they would endeavor to do this. They graciously ex
pressed their willingness to answer questions relating to 
this book. 

Believe it or not friends, in this manner there came about 
an interworld or interfrequency or interdimensional book 
reviewl Beforehand we prepared a summary of the main 
points of the book. One after the other we read these 
points to the Inner Circle with Mark acting as cosmic tele
phone. One by one a member of the Inner Circle com
mented upon these points. We recorded the complete re
view on our tape recorder. We sat back thunderstruck at 
their instant grasp of complicated questions, their piercing, 
instantaneous and unprejudiced analysis, and their forth
right replies — never dictatorial, always logical, loving, and 
always with the attitude, “Don’t take us as final authority. 
This is the way we see it, but you are entitled to disagree.” 
We all felt a lifting of fear which the book had subtly en
gendered in us, and we shall always be grateful for the 
clarification of thought which came to us in this strange 
manner. Incidentally, the Inner Circle themselves seemed 
both amused at and grateful for our interworld book re
view. We left not knowing who enjoyed it most, we or 
they. 

This encouraged us to ask them, with Irene Probert’s 
help, if they would please consider answering some direct 
questions on flying saucers. The reply was that while they 
felt they had already answered many questions regarding 
the “discs” as they called them through their work with 
Meade Layne; nevertheless they would be glad to answer 
our questions on a certain date. 

This gave us the opportunity we were looking for, and 
we lost no time in preparing the questions. In so doing, we 
had you — the reader — in mind. We did our best to in
clude those questions which we felt that you, as well as we. 

would be most interested in. The next chapter will give 
you the direct questions on saucers and the direct answers 
as they were received from the Inner Circle. 

We want our readers to share with us a taste of the direct 
communication which we have had with these high in
telligences in this unusual manner so that all may judge for 
themselves the quality of the information thus received. 

Please note that we make no claims that the Inner Circle 
represents the ultimate in authority in such matters. They 
would not want us to make such a claim. However, in 
our opinion these beings have a tremendous cosmic out
look and are worth listening to. Perhaps if we are open
minded enough we may be able to learn a great deal from 
them. In this age we must break away from the old and 
develop new sources of cosmic information! 

CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE INNER CIRCLE ANSWERS QUESTIONS ON 
FLYING SAUCERS. 

this chapter presents an example of O.S.C. or outer
space communication, that is, information obtained 
from communicating with beings living in a different 
phase of life from our own threedimensional phase. 

As explained in the previous chapter, with the assistance 
of Mark Probert acting as the "cosmic telephone” of this 
twoway communication, we asked the Inner Circle a series 
of questions regarding flying saucers. Both the questions 
and the answers are given below. Some of them are given 
practically verbatim. Others have been edited and con
densed for the sake of clarity and in order to keep within 
the space limitations of this book. In a few cases where 
our question was evidently not clearly understood or we did 
not clearly understand the answer — the matter was cleared 
up by questions on other occasions. The punctuation, ital
ics, arrangement and of course the notations are our own. 
In every case we have made diligent effort to preserve the 
substance and meaning of their replies, so far as we under
stood them. A few of the questions refer more to the critical 
conditions now facing our civilization than to the saucers 
themselves. 

Q. 1. Is it true that so called flying saucers or space
ships are coming to earth at this time? There are still many 
skeptics who say that they are nothing but balloons, secret 
weapons, stars, temperature inversions, illusions, etc. 

A. 1. Yes, it is true. It is of little use to make further ef
fort to convince anybody. As to those who are still standing 
on the rim of belief, it is better to leave them stand there. Is 
it not so that life concerns you individually? You need 
have little concern whether somebody else goes along the 
path with you. 

Q. 2. Some say that space ships have been coming for 

many thousands of years and that our ancestors knew about 
them. Is this true? 

A. 2. In the early period of the earth’s affairs when man 
was beginning to show signs of thinking, spacebeings came 
to earth and instructed man on various secret things, not 
only regarding the planetary system but regarding their 
own inner living as well. Some of the greatest teachings 
man has received came to him by these spacebeings in or
der that various civilizations could advance more rapidly. 
Through enormous periods of time, the spacecraft beings 
have been making periodic visits to the earth. All races 
of men have seen them. Five hundred thousand years ago 
they were well known to the dwellers in Yu, the civiliza
tion of the Himalayas. They would come to do a certain 
work, and when that work was completed they departed for 
a period to see how well their efforts would work out. They 
even came to your American Indians and taught them much 
and took them for little rides in their ships. (Note: The 
Yada Di ShiIte, the head of the Inner Circle once lived in 
the Yu civilization referred to above — hence the reference). 

Q. 3. Is it true that our ancestors had spaceships of 
their own in antiquity? 

A. 3. Man had spaceships on the earth that could move 
about the earth in other civilizations and times. But these 
ships were not interplanetary. They were not of a technique 
to get out of the gravitational forces of the earth. 

Q. 4. Are the governments of the earth in possession of 
extensive information on spaceships, and are they with
holding this information from the people? 

A. 4. Yes, they are. They are frightened. They are so 
educated” they are frightened. Too little education makes 
one superstitious, and too much education makes one twice 
as superstitious! And so they fear. 

Q. 5. Have men of earth recently contacted spaceships 
in physical form and conversed with the spacepeople in 
physical form? 

A. 5. Yes, this has been done many times. 

 

135 

Q. 6. Have men of earth recently gone into spaceships 
and taken rides? 

A. 6. Yes, they have to a limited extent. 

Q. 7. Is there an interplanetary government of our solar 
system? 

A. 7. Most definitely. There is what is called a hier
archy throughout the entire solar system — throughout the 
entire galaxies and island universes. Certain groups of in
dividuals are assigned to certain planets and even to solar 
systems. Then there are other greater beings that watch 
over an entire galaxy. (Note: At this point in the inter
view, one of us could not refrain from exclaiming, “some 
jobl” This caused considerable amusement. We found 
these intelligences with whom we were talking to be warm, 
loving, patient and very "human”. They enjoy both a joke 
and even American slang — although sometimes the mean
ing of the slang has to be explained to them). 

Q. 8. Are the spaceships which are now in the atmos
phere of earth under the command of such an interplane
tary government? 

A. 8. Yes, they are. (Note: In some contacts the hierar
chy of planets is referred to as the Guardians, — planetary 
Guardians. In subsequent research we found that no 
spaceship, even a visitor or a tourist ship, can enter earth’s 
atmosphere or land on earth without permission of the 
Guardians. This took away any fear we previously had of 
unfriendly ships landing on earth). 

Q. 9. Where do the spaceships and spacepeople come 
from? Some say Venus or other planets of our system. Some 
say from distant solar systems. Some say outerspace or the 
etheric regions. 

A. 9. The occupants of these spacecraft are what are 
exactly called spacebeings. We can say, and truthfully, that 
they “come from” one or more of your bodies in space or 
planets like Venus or Mars or Uranus, or any or the rest 
of them, and we can also say that they “come from” galaxies 
or island universes many billions and billions of light years 

from your earth — measuring time as you measure it. But 
these spacebeings are not aware of these gigantic numbers of 
light years of distance — not aware of this at all. Billions of 
miles to these beings means nothing. They know what you 
think along these lines, and that these are your concepts 
of time and space. But these concepts do not exist for 
them. These spacebeings can go any place, visit all bodies 
wherever they feel it necessary to go. In this sense, we may 
say that they “come from” a planet, if you wish. 

Q. 10. But do they — the Guardian Ships — originate 
from a particular planet? 

A. 10. No. Their origin is not planetary. I reiterate 
what we ourselves have said many times before. These be
ings are spacebeings. If you like the word etheric and can 
understand it, it means the same thing anyway. They live 
in other densities or other frequencies, other dimensions of 
time, other laws of matter in motion — no more than this. 
This is difficult for man on earth to understand, very diffi
cult. What are you going to say to those who are not versed 
in what is called “dimensions of time?” You are going to 
say the same thing that your great Einstein said to the man 
in the street concerning relativity. What did he say? Noth
ing! It is the most wonderfully informative thing to say 
to the uninformed. Just nothing! (Note: This was said 
in a humorous vein. As a matter of fact few groups of ad
vanced beings to our knowledge have worked harder or 
done more to help earth man to really understand outer
space, spaceships and spacebeings than the members of 
the Inner Circle. See books by Probert and Meade Layne in 
Book List). 

Q. 11. Are planets outside of our system inhabited? 

A. 11. Among your sky visitors there are some who come 

from planets and others who come from space. Space is 
not the vacuous thing it has long been considered. The uni
verse swarms with life of many kinds. Some planets have 
inhabitants much like yourselves, but on others they differ 
much in size, weight, density and other characteristics. 

 

137 

There are giants and pigmies and all sizes in between. 

Q. 12. How is it possible for beings like ourselves to live 
on other planets of our solar system? How is this possible 
due to the different conditions of gravity, oxygen, pres
sure, etc? 

A. 12. Your scientific astronomical instruments are 
highly limited and do not always give reliable information. 
Some of your planets do not have the balance of oxygen 
you need or the ionosphere necessary to give the same type 
of protection. Earth man would find it difficult living on 
these planets for various reasons. Nevertheless some of 
them are inhabited by beings with bodies similar to yours. 
They were born into these environs and therefore are adapt
ed to these conditions. In the same way they would have 
difficulty living on your earth. 

Venus is not as hot as many people think. It has a great 
band of substance around it that protects it from much of 
the sun’s radiation. Mars is not an unhappy place to live. 
There is plant life and animal life there besides human life. 
The Moon, at least a great part of it, is uninhabitable for 
the same reason that your great deserts are uninhabitable. 
The side you see is desert. But on the other side of the 
Moon there are people who use it as a base to come from 
space to the Moon and from the Moon to the Earth. 

Q. 13. Can you please tell us a little about these space
beings? Did they live on the earth at one time, and are 
they more advanced than we? 

A. 13. Many of them have never lived on earth but 
were born and live in their own dimensions of time. Tech
nically speaking, many of these beings are advanced from 
what you are. Philosophically speaking, they are indeed 
many strides ahead of you, for wars and murders do not 
prevail. 

Q. 14. How does our planet compare with others? 

A. 14. The Earth is a very beautiful spot from space. 
Indeed, compared with the other planets it is like a beautiful oasis in the vast sea of space. 
Q. 15. Are some spacepeople actually on our earth 
now? 

A. 15. Spacepeople can and do mix with your people 
on earth. They can even eat your terrible foods without dire 
results for they know how to relieve themselves from it 
without taking a purgative that you would get from your 
nearest drug store. You see I have been listening to your 
radio! 

Q. 16. Are we also spacepeople? 

A. 16. You are spacepeople yourselves in a very defi
nite sense of that word. You originated from a higher di
mension or frequency and are in the process of wakingup 
and returning there. When you re learn to control matter, 
you will be able once again to move in and out of the various 
frequencies or “time periods”. It is difficult to make you 
feel this now, and it is something you must approach slowly. 

Q. 17a. Will you please explain the nature of space 
travel? We have been told it has several different phases? 
(Note: Q. 17 has for the sake of clarity been broken down 
into several parts). 

A. 17a. Spacetime travel. Between the ships and not 
only your sun but all suns in space there are great fields 
of energy. When these spacebeings start moving in what 
you call spacetime (miles per hour type of travel in a 
threedimension world like ours), it is this solar energy 
they are working on. They tune to the frequency of cer
tain bands of energy. It is not exactly like a magnetic field. 
It is substance in a great rate of motion. They contact and 
control certain bands of light or radiation from the sun. 
This causes the ships to look as if they are glowing. It 
produces colors which can run the gamut of the spectrum. 
The ships are not hot either outside or inside; in fact they 
are very comfortable inside. 

Q. 17b. Just to make the record clear, these spaceships 
coming from other frequencies have to convert to our fre
quency in coming into our atmosphere or else we do not 

see them? Is this correct? 

A. 17b. That is right. They can be in your atmosphere 
without your seeing them if they want to be. 

Q. 17c. When they change their vibratory frequency it 
can take them out of our range of both sight and touch. Is 
this correct? 

A. 17c. This is right. And nearness also. The moment 
they go out of what is called your frequency, the moment 
they do this they could be on Venus, or close to it, by tele
portation. Practically instantaneous. Now your scientists 
are going to come to know more about this in the course of 
time. The closest man that has come to it is your late great 
man Einstein. 

Q. 18. Can the body of an earth man stand such a trip 
(distant spacetravel to higher frequencies)? 

A. 18. Remember that your body is primarily a water 
body. In taking someone from your earth to another body 
in space, that one’s body has to be changed. It will have 
to be changed before it can go into another frequency. It 
will have to be “rechemicalized.” There will have to be a 
"polarization” of the atomic substance that goes to make 
up every cell of the body. 

Q. 19. Is this difficult for the spacepeople to do? 

A. 19. No, because the spacepeople know how to manip
ulate matter. This would be impossible at present for earth 
man to do himself. But they might do it for him if he wish
ed. The blood of earth man would congeal if his body 
were taken into outerspace of a different frequency. But 
with new polarization of the body, this would not happen. 
They would have to take care of your physical structures. 
Things are different, so different, in these higher dimensions 
or higher frequencies. For example there is a greater state 
of what is called purity of form. Most of what might be 
called dross or the poisons of the system are eliminated. 

Q. 20. What about things falling out of the sky? 

A. 20. In your country, in California, not long ago 
and not too far from this city (San Diego) huge blocks of ice 

fell down and smashed some of your cars in the streets. 
The authorities, to keep things quiet, said that this ice 
came from airplanes that were being defrosted, (laughter) 
They surely must have been frozen in ice because some of the 
blocks weighed over 250 poundsl My friends, where did 
this ice really come from? A body in space, from Mars, 
from Venus? Did it fall off the poles of Venus? No. My 
friends, it came from what you incorrectly call “empty” 
space. Should space really open up, all kinds of things 
would come out of it — this space that I am now waving 
my hand in. (Waves Mark Probert’s hand amusingly in 
the air). Holes in space — simply meaning other frequencies 
— in which there exists other worlds containing many of 
the things you have here and many other things you do 
not have here. (Note: Above ice incident occurred at Long 
Beach, California, a few years ago, and surprisingly enough 
was well known to the Inner Circle). 

Q. 21. The ice came out of another frequency then? 

A. 21. That is correct. A condition took place at that 
moment in that particular section over that city which was 
something like the condition preceding an earthquake. It 
caused a rent in space and an upset in frequency through 
which the ice fell into your frequency. 

Q. 22. What about the strange white stuff that has been 
observed in the air or caught on trees and wires that grad
ually disintegrates when held in the hand? Some call it 
"angel’s hair” and have connected it with saucers. 

A. 22. Spaceships from outerspace are sometimes pick
ed up on your radar machines under certain conditions. 
To avoid this detection they release showers of this sub
stance. In my own language we call this substance “luckney” 
(phonetic spelling). It is a kind of radar shield. 

Q. 23. Do you wish this printed? (Note: This ques
tion was followed by a definite pause, while members of 
the Inner Circle conferred. Then came the answer). 

A. 23. Nol (Note: It is only because full permission 
was later given that this information is being included). 

141 

Q. 24. How many or approximately what quantity of 
spacecraft are now in our atmosphere? 

A. 24. In the upper atmosphere of the earth you have 
between five and ten million spaceships . (Note: we fully 
realize that this may come as a great shock to many people, 
but it has been coordinated with many other O.S.C. sources. 
We comment on the reasons for this enormous concentra
tion of spaceships in the last chapter). 

Q. 25. Could you please briefly give us some idea of 
the size of spaceships? It is a very confused picture to us. 

A. 25. They vary greatly from the little discs that are 
used like electronic eyes, to the huge mother ships. My 
friends, it may sound as if we are dealing with fantasy, 
but some of the large ships are known to be five miles or 
more in diameter. (Note: This could mean their length is 
many times this. Later information intimated they could 
be of planetary size). 

Q. 26. Many people of this earth think that the space
people have established certain physical bases or artificial 
physical planets from which to operate their ships near the 
earth. Will you please comment? 

A. 26. There are of course giant ships which can act 
as bases and send out smaller ships. They do not need 
“physical'’ bases. A fish in water does not need more water 
to “take off”. 

Q. 27. There are a lot of veiled references in our world 
today regarding the likelihood of our world experiencing a 
“polar flip” or change of axis of rotation. Is this likely? 

A. 27. A “flip” is not going to take place. There is a 
change, of course, in the magnetic poles and very much of 
a change. It may look a little dangerous, but this “flip” will 
not take place. Things have changed a little. They always 
do. The change is that the sun is giving off more cosmic 
energy to the earth, more is getting through the ionosphere 
now. By this I mean greater quantities, and also it is in a 
purer state than before. This is causing much heat to be 
let loose in the undercrust of the earth. This is causing the 

polar caps to melt rapidly so that you will have not an
other ice age but great floods which will sweep across the 
earth. You will also have great storms, but no ice age — 
no “flip”. (Note: From this it would appear that it is pos
sible to confuse changes in the magnetic poles with the likely
hood of an axial flip. We realize this conflicts with the 
views of others, but we feel impelled to publish the views of 
the Inner Circle just as they were received. The Inner Circle 
always disclaims absolute knowledge and gives only their 
views). 

Q. 28. What is the greatest immediate danger facing 
the people of earth? 

A. 28. Your greatest world danger is atomic power and 
its experimental use in these times. This is the greatest 
worry of the world — more so than the world yet knows. 
No matter where on earth man may be, it will effect him 
regardless. If it is not stopped immediately, the earth is 
going to suffer a great and long lasting effect upon its peo
ple. Widespread genetic changes will result. The human 
form will be drastically changed, and not for the better. 
Plant life and all earth life will be affected. The under
water experiments are even worse than the others. If 
earthman ever has to turn to the sea for his food, he will 
be unable to do so. 

Today your scientific men who are going on with this 
are mad in the head. They think because they make tests 
to see if there is very much radiation, and not finding very 
much, they think this is all right. They do not stop to 
think of the effect of the “little” they are able to find. 
The little they find, if that little was not placed there by 
nature — a natural condition then it is an unbalanced 
condition. They are playing like children with a toy. Aft
er the experiments are over, what have they found out? 
What have they proven by this thing? Do you know? The 
effects are not going to come fast but slowly. They will 
come slowly — like a thief in the night. (Note: The Inner 
Circle is in earnest in its forthright warnings regarding the 

dangers we face with atomic energy. They also state that 
there are other energy differentials, far less dangerous, which 
we should seek). 

Q. 29. What about so called “fireballs”? Some are green 
fireballs. 

A. 29 The Guardians are doing all they can under cos
mic law to help men of earth. They send these great balls 
of light into the atmosphere to help neutralize dangerous 
atomic radiations. They gather the radiation and convert 
it to forms less dangerous to the human body. (Note: If 
this is true, and some experienced researchers have for years 
found the Inner Circle both honorable and reliable — it is 
certainly a comment on our civilization. What a picture 
— our scientists poisoning our earth — and the spacemen, 
our elder brothers, neutralizing the poison!) 

Q. 30. Is this why the spaceships have come to earth in 
such numbers? 

A. 30. We do not like to come and talk to you of un
happy conditions. Yet we must. You cannot bury your 
heads in the sand. Primarily they are coming to warn you 
to be careful, but not this alone. The time for warnings is 
getting short. You are poisoning your atmosphere. Your 
people will not be able to live on the earth if you con
tinue it. You will turn your beautiful earth to desolation. 
(Note: While great emphasis is here placed on the danger 
of atomic radiation, note the phrase “but not this alone”. 
See last chapter for further discussion of why they are here). 

Q. 31. Do you mean there is a possibility of man des
troying himself from the earth? 

A. 31. Man definitely may destroy himself from the 
earth. He is seeking to do this now. He has an unconscious 
masochistic desire for destruction — and so it may be! As 
time does not matter very much in the cosmic scheme of 
things, if man wants to destroy himself physically from 
the earth for a period of time that is his right. This may 
be a necessary experience, but he will eventually come back 
again and try again, for this he must. (Note: This is 

somewhat condensed but the intimation appeared to be 
that if man wipes himself from the earth, he will come 
back to earth again and again until he finally learns the 
lesson that destruction does not pay). 

Q. 32. Will man be permitted to destroy the earth it
self? 

A. 32 No! The main concern of the spacepeople is 
not that man may destroy himself from the earth. What 
they do not want to happen is sudden mutations or chemi
cal changes in the physical structure of the earth due to 
radiations from these bombs! Remember that the cosmic 
radiation from the sun itself is highly diluted as it comes 
through the ionosphere, so that only a bearable part gets 
through. By letting loose these bombs you get pure energy 
into your atmosphere with nothing to dilute it or break it 
down into more or less harmless substances. The planet 
earth is a school, a very necessary school. Man is not going 
to destroy the earth. 

Q. 33. In a dire emergency would these spacecraft take 
some of the people off the earth — take them somewhere 
else? 

A. 33. That is right. It would be voluntary. Those that 
did not want to go could stay. 

Q. 34. Is there anything we humans can do — things 
we should be doing and are not doing? 

A. 34. There are of course many things you are not 
doing. There are also many things that you do not know 
to do, and I am in no position to tell you now. Many great 
teachers have shown you the way. My friends, do you know 
how to live day by day? To center your thoughts upon 
what you are doing? To forget what others are doing? To 
play your own part to the best of your ability? Do the best 
you can. Learn meditation. Learn emotional control. It 
is very important. Learn detachment — to be the “dreamer” 
and not the dream. Live your life to the fullest with LOVE. 
You cannot do more. 

CHAPTER XIX. 

OUR BEAUTIFUL EARTH. 

I s it not an awe inspiring thing to talk to people in oth
er dimensions of life? Just think of piercing through 
the veil of the frequencies and saying “Hello” to some
one living in a different frequency. No matter who that 
person was, it would be a thrilling experience. But just 
suppose the person you talked to was in a “place” in the 
universe and was of a mentality to know many things that 
people on this earth have never been able to find out — 
at least not in our generation. What a chance that would 
be to ask questions and to find out some things! And yet 
that is the position we actually felt ourselves, to be in when 
we were talking to the members of the Inner Circle with the 
assistance of our friend Mark Probert. 

We wanted to find out more about our planet Earth and 
how it compared with the other planets in our solar sys
tem. In the preceding interview with the Inner Circle 
we found out a little, but later we were privileged to find 
out a bit more. We feel that our readers will be interested. 
So let us summarize it all and take a look at our earth 
through the eyes of those who can do what we cannot do — 
namely, view it and the other planets from outerspace. 
Here is what they say. 

The Yada Di ShiIte: “The earth is a very beautiful spot 
from space. Indeed compared with the other planets, it 
is like a beautiful oasis in the vast sea of space. The Guar
dians know that your earth is the greatest, the most beau
tiful spot in the solar system. It is the most livable body 
in your solar system. 

Astronomer Ramon Natalli: “Observing the earth 
through these huge astroscreens on Venus, it is found to be 
a multicolored jewel — with a comparatively short comet
like tail, trailing sunward from it. From my observation 
of it, I would say that it is the most beautiful planet in the 

entire solar system. The colors due to the changing seas
ons vary considerably. There are pale greens and dark
jungle greens and reds and yellows. The vast oceans, ex
cept when the sun is shining at a slanting angle upon them, 
are a dark slate blue. Due to the fact that there is more wa
ter than land, the predominating color tends naturally to 
be dark slate blue. On land the chief color is green — that 
is the outstanding color”.* 

Since receiving this information we have asked many of 
our earth friends just why it is that earthman, who it seems 
has been given the most beautiful living quarters in the en
tire solar system, seems so unappreciative of his Maker’s 
generosity and persists in such destructiveness? The reply 
of one of them seems worthy of note: 

“Well, maybe the spacebeings feel that the delinquent 
children and the mental defectives somehow need the best 
educational facilities!” 

•See Mystic Magazine, January, 1956, for further Inner Circle infor
mation on planets. 

CHAPTER XX.

WHAT THE PUBLIC EXPECTS OF A SAUCERER. 

after we had met many a saucerer, studied many a 

sighting or contact, listened to many saucer experiences, read a number of books on the subject, joined 
in innumerable saucer discussions, and attended all avail
able lectures — we were truly appalled by one thing. That 
was what the public expects of a saucerer! 

It is like this. Some decent, honest, selfrespecting chap 
is going someplace, or is just sitting someplace minding his 
own business. Then down comes a saucer — and bang! All 
of a sudden he is a genius. In a flash he is supposed to 
know everything. Overnight he is catapulted into promi
nence. He suddenly becomes a somebody, even if that 
somebody is only a target for ridicule and the butt of many 
a joke. His friends hear about his experience, and they 
all start asking him questions. They ask this question and 
that question and some inbetween questions. They amuse 
themselves at his expense. 

Soon a group, pining for a “lecture”, gets hold of him 
and puts him on the platform. His saucerexperience only 
lasted shall we say ten minutes or possibly thirty^ minutes. 
But what does that matter to his public. They have cap
tured a real live saucerer, a celebrity. But that is putting 
it too mildly, they have literally corralled a saucer authority! 
So they put him on a public lecture platform, and what does 
the public expect of him. Did you ever listen to the ques
tions in a saucer lecture? We have many times, and can 
give you some idea. 

The public expects just about everything of a saucerer. 
They expect him to be a combination of a modern cosmic 
Galileo, Columbus, Einstein, Kinsey, and Messiah — all 
from a few minutes saucer experience. They expect him 
to know all about everything, including such minor items 
as the planets, the galaxies, the ethers, outerspace, energy, 

staticelectricity, magnetism, cosmology, spaceship technol
ogy, metallurgy and instrumentation, extraterrestrial sci
ence, sociology, agriculture, education, religion, government, 
living conditions on Mars, the latest fashions on Venus, the 
sexual behavior of the Plutonians, and real estate and busi
ness opportunities on the asteroids! As we have listened 
to the questions hurled by the public at some poor lectur
ing saucerers, we have wondered why some of them did not 
just give the public “an earful”, right out of their own imag
ination. It would have served the questioners right! 

At first we enjoyed many a hearty laugh at these impos
sible questions the public saw fit to ask. But later we be
gan to see that the public was in the process of sadly spoil
ing some very decent individuals. In the name of reason, 
let the public and the saucer enthusiasts realize the inevitable 
limitations of each and every saucer experience and 
stop expecting the entire cosmos and all its secrets from 
one or two worthy fellows who were fortunate to have a con
tact or experience. Saucerers and saucer experiences are 
valuable. If we wish to learn more about outerspace, we 
should certainly encourage them to tell of their experiences. 
But let us not spoil them or tempt them beyond their depth. 
We feel the public owes this to the saucerers. 

And likewise, as we see it, the saucerer has a duty to the 
public. All saucer experiences have their limitations. Most 
of them are of short duration, and telling about the ex
periences themselves in most cases will not occupy the en
tire time of an average lecture period. Therefore, what
ever else is presentd must be clearly distinguished from the 
experiences and should be properly labelled as interpreta
tion or opinion or the philosophy of the lecturer. More
over, since all of us in our efforts to understand outerspace 
are definitely going to be dealing more and more with the 
phenomena of various states and stages of consciousness, it 
is increasingly important to distinguish an experience as 
either occurring in threedimensional (physical) conscious
ness or in some other state of consciousness. We like the 

 
saucerers who plainly say "I don’t know” once in awhile, 
at least often enough to make us feel sure that they have 
not lost that priceless quality of a true saucerer — humility. 

In our thinking, another related point is important to 
remember at this time. We are living in an age when great 
changes are rapidly taking place in human thought. New 
cosmic concepts, ideas and truths are literally pouring into 
human consciousness everywhere in the world. Without 
in the least minimizing the importance of the saucerers’ 
contributions to this Truth, nevertheless it is wise to rec
ognize the fact that the entire saucer phenomena represent 
only one channel of unfoldment of this incoming avalanche 
of new knowledge. This knowledge is flowing in through 
countless other channels on a worldwide basis. It is being 
“beamed” to our world from higher dimensions of life as 
a part of the activities of this new age. 

Anyone who tries to say “this is my idea because I obtain
ed it from a spaceman” is going to discover that other peo
ple in the world may have received it even before he did. 
Moreover, no saucer contact may have been necessary for 
their particular unfoldment. Cosmic truth is flowing to 
this world by itself. Thus it is going to be more and more 
difficult and eventually useless to try to pin down the exact 
source or outlet. New truth is nothing but old truth coming 
again into conscious awareness. Truth is truth whether it 
comes from a saucerer’s contact with a spacebeing, a sauc
erer 's own mind, or anyone else’s mind. The truth itself 
is the important thing, not the source. It is free, universal, 
and belongs to all of us. The spacepeople tell us that in 
the last analysis there is only one consciousness, one mind 
— the AllMind. The AllMind is rapidly unfolding Itself 
to all of us in its own way. Few “patents” are going to be 
granted on Cosmic Truth. This is something to ponderl 

CHAPTER XXI.

SAUCERS AND SEMANTICS. 

W e have listened to many a saucer discussion or lec
ture. Too often we have watched the discussion 
degenerate into an argument, and soon there was 
too much heat and not enough lightl As we sat back and 
listened to such performances, we honestly felt that if 
everybody had the same meaning for the same words, about 
seventyfive percent of the arguments would turn out to 
be agreements, and — to borrow a phrase from the Immortal 
Bard — a “deal of stinking breath” could be avoided. 
Thus we ran headlong into semantics, and the problem of 
the meaning of words as applied to saucers and space phe
nomena. 

But this was not all. We found that the advent of sauc
ers in our modern world has been such an overwhelming 
thing that we actually lack new words with which to ex
plain them. The saucer phenomena represent something 
so far outinfront of all branches of human knowledge that 
they leave many of us gasping for breath and pawing around 
for new words to describe them. We are dealing with things 
so extremely different from what we are used to the outer
space “norm” is so different from our physical “norm” — 
that we actually run into this lack of suitable words. 

We also discovered another interesting point. Certain 
words we tried to use in connection with saucers, which 
seemed to us to have fairly usable dictionary definitions, 
produced such an unexpected and horrible effect on our 
listeners that we actually had to stop using them. We had 
to avoid them like hot pokers. It seems that certain words 
actually engender a feeling of distrust or fear in the minds 
of some listeners. We presume this is a phase of man’s fear 
of the unknown — his distrust of what he does not under
stand. These words seemed to close some people’s minds 
to the subject in a sort of selfprotection or an automatic 

resistance to the cosmic concepts we were trying to present. 
Not that there was anything fearful or dangerous in these 
concepts. To us the supraphysical aspects of outerspace 
are infinitely beautiful and magnificent. But we found 
that certain words were, let us say, inadvisable in connec
tion with saucers. We shall later discuss a few such words 
which we found must be used sparingly, cautiously or not 
at all, at least in public discussions of the subject. 

We hope that new and more suitable words can be found. 
We need new words which do not have clinging to them 
the "old vibrations” or any of the old meanings which act 
as mental blocks to understanding the more advanced as
pects of space phenomena. If we can all get together on 
words, terms and meanings, maybe we can get together in 
much better fashion in our understanding of these phe
nomena. 

Let us briefly illustrate a few of these practical difficul
ties. What overall term would you apply to communica
tion between spacebeings and men of earth? The methods 
used in such communications vary enormously. They can 
be physical, or electronic, or some phase of E.S.P. (extra 
sensory perception) or some other method. We felt the 
need of an inclusive term to cover these remarkable phe
nomena as a whole. We found no suitable word or term 
being used, and so we decided to use the expression “O.S.C.” 
(outerspace communication). We hereby bequeath it with
out charge to all students of saucery! 

Now let us consider another example of the need of new 
words for the new wonders of outerspace. What term would 
you apply to a cosmic action in which an object goes out 
of the range of all of the human senses, but still exists with 
just as much visibility and just as much (or more) solidity 
or tangibility? The point is that our human senses lose 
track of the object’s “reality”, but its "reality” goes right 
on undiminished and even heightened for those whose sens
es can keep it "tunedin”. We, with our five physical 
senses, can only tune into one waveband of reality of life 

— the physical waveband. But the more advanced space
beings can tune into several wavebands of reality. Now 
what would you call such an activity, or the reverse of it, in 
which the object comes into the waveband of our human 
senses? 

The above represents one or more of the cosmic actions 
of spaceships and is more fully setforth in Chapter 27. But 
what words shall we apply to such cosmic actions? Maybe 
the Greeks had a word for it. Let us hope they did because 
it is hard to find modern readymade words whose defini
tions and meanings will fit these cases. These actions are 
typical of the characteristics of spacecraft and spacepeople 
which stump our dictionaries and floor many of us both 
mentally and emotionally. 

We had a bit of fun trying to get some practical answers 
to this particular word puzzle. A group of us were discuss
ing the problem. A friend asked, 'Why not simply use 
the words “appear” and “disappear?” 

Because,” answered one, “if you are in an airplane and 
you fly away from me out of my sight, you disappear but I 
can overtake yqu in a faster plane and find you. But I can 
never find, with my human senses, a spaceship after it has 
passed into a higher frequency.” 

"What about materialize and dematerialize?” asked an
other friend. “Mat and demat. Some saucer lecturers are 
using those terms.” 

I replied, “The trouble with that is that a spaceship 
in going into a higher frequency does not dematerialize, 
but merely goes beyond our sense range. It is then actually 
denser more ‘material’ than it was before at least to 
the people who accompany it.” 

Several other words were suggested but none seemed to 
fit the need. The group recognized the fact that the muta
tions of spaceships are not a simple matter. Well authen
ticated reports show that spaceships often show up on ra
darscopes even though they are in a state of invisibility 
to humansight but close enough so that they should be 
seen. 

Finally our group decided upon the terms “emerge” and 
“transcend”, and we hereby also bequeath these terms pro
perly redefined to cover spacephenomena to the New Age 
Dictionary — which we hope someone soon will produce. 
Will some cosmic Samuel Johnson please step forward!* 

That is what we really need. A New Age or Flying Saucer 
Dictionary! It should be filled to the brim with new age 
words and definitions and descriptions of spacepeople and 
spaceships and the cosmic capers they go through. We cer
tainly hope some of our readers will tackle this worthy 
project. We suggest it be called the “A. S. Dictionary”, 
the “After Saucers Dictionary”. This would properly dis
tinguish it from those old, forlorn, decrepit, useless and to
tally outmoded “B. S. Dictionaries”, the “Before Saucers” 
variety which are not even “hep” to saucers! After all, of 
what use are old threedimensional words to convey higher
dimensional meanings. And may we modestly suggest that 
because of their usefulness the following words and defini
tions be assigned a prominent place in this new A. S. Dic
tionary. 

Note. As a matter of fact Meade Layne and Mark Probert’s Inner 
Circle contributed the word "emerge”, and should be given full 
credit. However, the selection of the term "transcend” for the op
posite action is our own effort. 

SAMPLE WORDS NEEDED IN NEW DICTIONARY.

Apportation — The process of reducing a formed object 
to thoughtenergy, attracting this energy to the conscious
ness of the individual controlling the process, transform
ing the energy back into the form in which it originally 
existed, and thus gaining possession of the object. 

Emergence — Applied to spacecreft descending to earth 
from higher frequencies of life. The act of tuning 
into earth’s threedimensional form of existence by reduc
ing the vibratory frequency and changing the polarization 
or plane of energy motion of a spaceship so that the craft 
and its contents become visible and tangible to the human 
senses. 

Foo Fighters — Glowing discs or fireballs ranging from 
a few inches to several feet in size which were seen by pilots 
of World War II planes. The Germans thought they were 
secret devices of the Allies. The Allies thought they were of 
German origin. Now considered to be remote controlled 
electronic devices sent out by spaceships to gather data 
and transmit sounds, pictures and telepathic reports to 
the control ships. 

Levitation The process of mentally controlling the 
energy constituting an object in such a manner as to bal
ance or nearly balance the gravitational and antigravita
tional forces acting upon it, thereby causing the object to 
rise, float, or fall. Can be applied to any object including 
the human body. 

O.S.C. — Outerspace communication. Communication 
between earthmen and beings living in outerspace or in 
other phases of life without reference to the method or 
means used to effect the communication. Any means may 
be used, such as physical, electronic, mental, spiritual, cos
mic, etc. The communication may be either oneway or 
twoway in nature. 

Precipitation — Applied to cosmic actions. The act of 
forming a solid object directly from universal energy by 
mind control. Used by adepts and advanced spacebeings. 
A mental mold or visualization controls the shape and size 
of the object, and feeling controls the quality of the object. 

Saucer Often called flying saucer. 1. A disc shaped 
spaceship. The name saucer dates back to June 24, 1947, 
when Kenneth Arnold, a business man of Boise, Idaho, 
while flying his plane near Mount Ranier, Washington,' 
U.S.A., sighted nine large gleaming discs flying in forma
tion. He described them later as resembling “saucers”, 
and from this incident the term flying saucer developed. 
2. Any type of spaceship. 3. A fireball or similar space
phenomena. 4. Foo Fighter type of disc. 

Saucerer 1. One who contacts a saucer, or spacebeing, 

or who has some noteworthy experience relating to space
ships or spacephenomena. 2. One who is especially inter
ested in spaceships and allied space phenomena. 

Spaceman — A man or individualized consciousness living 
outside the confines of terrestrial earth. He may be of the 
same or of a higher or of a lower degree of cosmic evolution 
than earthman. He may also live on a higher or a lower 
plane of frequency than that of earth life. CF : Spacebeing, 
angel, master, heavenly host. 

Spaceship — 1. Noninterplanetary type. A space con
veyance capable of transporting materials and personnel 
within the confines of a planet’s atmosphere. Such a ship 
is capable of overcoming gravity and distance without the 
necessity of burning fuel but is incapable of operating out
side the atmosphere of a planet. It cannot make interplan
etary flights. 2. Interplanetary type. Same as above, ex
cept that ships can make interplanetary flights within the 
confines of a solar system by spacetime (miles per hour) 
methods. 3. Intergalactic type: These are true spaceships. 
They are capable of fuelless flight to any part of the uni
verse. They are interplanetary and intergalactic and can 
employ either spacetime means or instantaneous cosmic 
means of flight. 

Teleportation — The process of reducing a formed object 
to thoughtenergy, mentally directing this energy to a de
sired destination or activity of consciousness, and then 
transforming the energy back into the form in which it 
originally existed. Note: there are numerous variations 
and types of this basic principle. 

Transcendence Applied to spacecraft ascending from 
the earth. The act of tuning out of earth’s threedimen
sional type of existence by increasing the vibratory fre
quency and altering the polarization or plane of energy 
motion of a spaceship so that the craft and its contents 
pass out of the range of the human senses and enter a high
er phase of existence. The reverse of emergence. 

156 

 

APPROXIMATE SYNONYMS. 

As we went our rounds we found many people using dif
ferent names and words applied to certain phases of saucer 
phenomena. They were trying to express certain ideas 
about saucers, and they were using some interesting words 
and phrases to indicate their meaning. We tabulated a few 
of these as “approximate synonyms”, and we present them 
as a matter of interest to saucer students. 

Spaceship — Flying saucer, saucer, mothership, U.F.O. 
(unidentified flying object), valix, vimana (Sanskrit), ka
reta, fireball, chariotoffire, signs in the heavens (Bible) 
"light” ship, ether or etheric ship. 

Outer space — Empty space, vacuity, the black void. Dif
ferent vibratory frequencies, densities, dimensions of time, 
or time frames. Different modes of vibration of energy or 
matter. Planes, planes of consciousness, consciousness un
limited. Octaves or bands or ranges of consciousness, or of 
awareness, or of sense. Spectrums of sense. The Locas 
(oriental philosophy). The astral and etheric worlds. The 
heavens. Heaven and hell. Worlds without end (religion). 
The Universe. The Cosmos. 

WORDS TO BE USED WITH CAUTION. 

We shall now briefly discuss a few of the words which 
we found undesirable to use in connection with modern 
space phenomena. The word astral seems to stir up visions 
of hell and damnation for certain people. The word 
etheric is a fine word, but it conveys a sense of nonsolidity 
— exactly the opposite of the truth regarding spaceship 
mutations. The words spirit or spiritual , fine as they are, 
never seem to mean the same thing to any two people. We 
use them, but sparingly. The word psychic is still worse 
in its effects upon some individuals. We need a good sub
stitute. The word seance conjures up wild visions of spooks, 
ectoplasm and mediums of low estate. Most people never 
delve below the outer shell of human knowledge, and how 
to convey to them the mysteries of outerspace without treading on certain latent fears — which they hardly recognize 
themselves — is quite a problem. We believe a good new 
saucer dictionary and plenty of new words would help. 
After all every new activity such as the automobile, tele
vision, or atomic energy, develops its own vocabulary. Why 
not saucers? 

CHAPTER XXII.
WHY DON’T THEY? 

T here is one interesting point about this subject of 
saucers which we found everywhere we went. It 
is, in fact, practically the only point we found upon 
which just about everybody seemed to agree. It is that 
the gentlemen in the spaceships never do anything right! 
Whatever they do or did, they should have done it different
ly. What they did not do — well, they should have done 
it. The saucer “kibitzers” on earth are a mighty unhappy 
lot. 

This is an interesting point, to say the least. We found 
some individuals who were really wrought up and even 
sarcastic about the shortcomings of the “boys upstairs.” 
On our trip we could have collected a book full of "Why 
Don’t Theys!” The complaints were endless. Why don’t 
they do this? Why don’t they do that? Some of the com
plainers almost convinced us that they rather than the 
spacepeople should be operating the saucers! Some of 
these “Why Don’t Theys” were on the trivial side, but 
others seemed to have a bit of merit. Out of interest, we 
thought we might mention a few of the latter variety — 
together with the best answers which we found along the 
way. 

One of the most persistent complaints was, “Why don’t 
they land on the White House lawn in Washington, D. C., 
and declare themselves and their purpose?” We think this 
is a good question. We discovered that a good answer can
not be given in a few words, but that there is a good answer 
for the thoughtful students of saucers. 

Much of this answer is set forth in the Twentieth Cen
tury Fox motion picture film The Day The Earth Stood 
Still, which, although fiction, nevertheless presents the 
story of a saucer landing right in Washington. It tells 
about the spaceman in the saucer and his friendly effort 

to deliver the true message of the spacepeople to our govern
ment, the treatment accorded him by our armed forces, and 
the dire events that ensued. Many saucer students who 
know something of the history of this film sincerely be
lieve that it was “inspired” by the spacebeings in our 
midst. Many are also convinced that the spacepeople have 
declared themselves and their purpose to selected officials in 
the major governments of the world. Many O.S.C. messages 
we have studied state this to be true. 

Another common complaint is, "Why don’t they come 
down and stop evil and stop wars and really help us if they 
are as good and as powerful as they are portrayed?” We be
lieve there are two valid answers to this common question. 
First, most earth men are so constituted that they only 
learn by experience, and this earth life is intended as a 
kindergarten in which man can learn life’s lessons by ex
perience. The spacepeople have through countless ages 
sent great teachers to help us and show us the way. The 
trouble is we have not followed these teachings. If the 
spacepeople now solved all our problems for us we would 
be deprived of the lessons we need. The spacepeople are 
not permitted to live our lives for us. Cosmic law wisely 
puts limits on the help they can give us. Secondly, they are 
helping us right now — within the bounds of cosmic law — 
in hundreds of ways we do not recognize because we do not 
understand them or how they operate. They operate most
ly unseen — through energy and through helpful thoughts, 
inspirations and “right ideas” with which they surround 
us. When things get hopeless for us, however, they do take 
an unseen hand in our affairs and even bring about drastic 
changes in the world. 

Another prevalent complaint is along the following vein. 
If they really want us to know them, why don’t they arrange 
a different type of contact in which without harm to them
selves they could land and meet a group of earthpeople of 
unquestionable authority and standing under circumstances 
where photographs could be taken, objects could be exchanged and all the “proofs” which most people would like 
to have could be provided along with proper publicity? 

Frankly, we are as much in favor of such a contact as 
anyone else. We have also found that many good saucer 
students feel that such things will come about in due time 
when the world is better conditioned for them and when 
it can be done without fear of panic or undue upset to our 
economic, scientific, governmental and religious views. 
These saucerers say we are too impatient and that we do 
not recognize or “believe” the steps already taken by the 
spacepeople to acquaint man with their true nature and 
purpose. The saucerers declare the spacepeople know what 
they are doing and that they are acting with great wisdom. 
After some study, we are inclined to agree with these sauc
erers — especially after our talks with Orfeo Angelucci, who 
from actual experiences has a keen understanding of the 
problem the spacepeople themselves face in their efforts 
to reveal their true nature to us without frightening us. 
(See chapter 28). 

Just let us suppose that you, the reader, wanted to let 
all the fish in the ocean know about yourself and your civi
lization. Just how would you go about it? Please do not 
laugh at this comparison. The first problem you would face 
in revealing yourself to the fish would be a language bar
rier. So do the spacepeople in communicating with us. 
You might have to resort to telepathy! Maybe you would 
discover the “poor fish” are a little stupid about respond
ing. Heaven forbid that any spaceman might find some 
of us in that category! Then there is that little problem 
of the difference in the densities of the medium “water” in 
which they — the fish — live and the medium “air” in 
which you live. Is it much different with the spacepeople 
coming from their medium or vibratory frequency into our 
physical frequency? 

Can you not just imagine a “poor fish” whom you “con
tacted” trying desperately to explain his “contact” to a 
school of his fellow fish. He might be saying something 

like this: “And then the monster from outerair with two 
tails (that’s you) said to me, We live our lives in air!” 

Second fish: “Impossible! No one can live in air!” 

First fish: Then he told me they had nests in which they 
live ten times higher than our longest whale!” 

Third fish: “I think our brother fish must have dream
ed this experience.” 

Fourth fish: “Sounds fishy to me too!” 

First fish: “Then he told me they can travel in the air 
thirtyfive times faster than the fastest shark.” 

Chorus of fishes: “Now we know he’s crazy. Better send 
him to the phishiatrist!” 

Many, many people on earth are almost screaming for 
the spacepeople, the planetary Guardians, to land and dis
close themselves. Disclose themselves as what? As physical 
beings just like you and me? They have appeared in phys
ical form, but in so doing they are not actually disclosing 
themselves. What do we wish them to do? Misrepresent 
themselves? Most of them are not physical beings, al
though they can appear as that — if that is all we are cap
able of understanding. But that is not their true nature. 
They are true spacebeings, and they live in a different me
dium, a different frequency than we do — just as we live 
in a different medium than do the fish in the ocean. 

The point is, that they are disclosing themselves to us 
— faster than most of us can take it! They are doing so in 
their own way. The officialdom of the world is not a chan
nel they can use. Our timehonored, ultrarespectable in
stitutions are not channels they can employ. So they do what 
they can — choose “little people”, receptive people with 
certain qualities here and there throughout the globe and 
use them as little “points of light”, little pieces of leaven, 
which eventually will enlighten and leaven humanity and 
bring the knowledge of inhabited outerspace to everyone. 

From this point of view, let us examine briefly the ledger 
of unfoldment, the indications that spacepeople have dis
closed themselves and are disclosing themselves in their own 

way, systematically, gradually, year by year, step by step, to 
ignorant and doubting humanity. 

STEPS OF UNFOLDMENT. 

(1) First, many strange lights were seen in the sky, and 
other unusual phenomena. 

(2) A degree of form and intelligent control was noted 
in connection with these phenomena. 

(S) The foo fighters” of World War II were reapprais
ed by many as part of the same phenomena. 

(4) Fireballs of many sizes and colors were noted in the 
skys. 

(5) Sightings were made of actual space ships of many 
different types all over the world. They are continuing. 

(6) Strange appearing and disappearing phenomena have 
been observed. 

(7) Actual photographs of these objects have been ob
tained and presented to a startled public. 

(8) Many O.S.C. messages and communications have 
been reported from widely divergent localities disclosing 
much information on spacephenomena. 

(9) Then came a few isolated landings and “contacts.” 

(10) Then a few selected individuals were given rides. 

(11) Then a few highly sensitive people were able to 
contact saucers somewhat above our average level of fre
quency. 

In other words, there has been an orderly and progres
sive disclosure of their presence by the spacepeople in their 
own way. Many saucerers who have taken the trouble to 
study the matter first hand have gotten over the idea that 
officialdom will help them in any way and have come to the 
conclusion that these revelations are actually coming faster 
than most people can absorb them. They feel that the space
people are actually doing a fine job of revealing themselves 
progressively, in their own way, with wisdom far superior to 
ours. Be patient, they say. Further unfoldments will come 
when we are readyl 

CHAPTER XXIII. 

ARE SAUCERERS CHOSEN BY THE 
SPACEPEOPLE? 

are saucerers chosen by the spacepeople? Are those 
individuals who are having contacts or other out

underfstanding saucer experiences, or those who are receiving noteworthy messages from outerspace — are they 
chosen by the spacepeople? Are they singled out and given 
such experiences by the spacepeople for definite reasons? 
Or do these experiences just happen? 

Many people have asked us about this, and we have asked 
ourselves these interesting questions many times. In fact, 
we have become so interested in them that we really have 
given the matter a good deal of study. Without going into 
too many details the following represents our present estimate of the situation. 

We do believe that there is indeed a factor of "choice” 
by the spacepeople in every single case of contact or out
standing saucer experience. But we believe that this is 
never the only factor involved. There are two other im
portant factors which enter in, and these are the qualities 
of the person contacted and his availability. Thus there 
are three major factors in such experiences: first, some de
gree of selection or choice by the spacepeople; second, the 
qualities or character of the earthman contacted, and third, 
his availability. The emphasis on one or another of these 
factors appears to vary greatly in different cases. But all 
three seem evident in varying degrees in all major experi
ences. By major experiences we are not including ordinary 
sightings of which there are many. Most of these we classify 
as happenstances, although a few special sightings may rep
resent some degree of premeditation on the part of the space
people. A whole book could be directed to this subject 
alone. Let it suffice to consider very briefly a few cases. 

164 

But first let us always remember this: that back of all 
flights of spaceships to this earth there is always a definite 
purpose. Spaceships do not just happen to come into the 
atmosphere of our earth. They always have some kind of 
a mission, and they must receive permission of the planetary 
Guardians. A few spaceships come on exploring, sight
seeing or educational trips. But due to the present critical 
situation on our earth, most of the ships now contacting us 
come on much more serious missions. Many of these mis
sions are for scientific study of the conditions of our earth, 
our people, and our atmosphere. 

Consider now the case of the Mexican chauffeur. As we 
see it, the spaceship was on a definite mission and had land
ed off the highway in fulfilling that mission prior to the 
chauffeur’s stopping on the road due to a car breakdown. 
The spacepeople did not cause the breakdown. He was 
available near the spot where they were working due to 
their mission. Here is the factor of availability. But where 
is the factor of choice? It is this, that they did not have to 
contact him if they did not wish to. From what we know 
about the ability of spacemen, they doubtless “televised” 
his mind and character through and through before decid
ing to make a contact. They knew in advance that he was 
amiable, stable and a suitable subject for a contact and 
that he was some one they could talk to and learn about 
human conditions on our earth. This represents the other 
factors of choice and of character. 

Take the case of George Adamski. Anyone who studies 
his first contact and the steps that gradually led up to it 
can trace these factors of choice, character and availability. 
Here was a man of rugged qualities who for months had been 
patiently trying to photograph saucers. Also for years he 
had been teaching brotherly love, which is the chief mes
sage of all the spacepeople. Moreover he had a certain 
measure of telepathic ability, and he was available at the 
time a contact was desirable to the spacepeople. He had 
definite qualifications as a messenger, and to those who 

know anything about the spacepeople, his association with 
Desmond Leslie was no accident. 

In the case of Daniel Fry the choosing was so deliberate 
on the part of the spacemen that this factor plus his tech
nical and his “receiving” abilities all bulk large in this 
experience. As to his availability at the right time — well 
the spacemen simply took a hand in this and made him 
available. These same three factors may be traced through
out the experiences of the great saucerers, but we cannot go 
into all the cases now. It is a study all by itself. 

One other comment. It is interesting to note the great 
divergence in the types of people chosen for contact and 
communications. The variations in character, education 
and social status are worth noting. We believe that this 
is significant. It seems as if our spacebrothers are inter
ested in studying the reaction of different types of individ
uals to a contact or a communication. How do different 
types of earth people react to such experiences? The space
people appear to be finding this out as well as selecting 
channels through which to disclose themselves and trans
mit their great messages to humanity. 

CHAPTER XXIV. 

OUTERSPACE AND THEY THAT 
DWELL THEREIN.

I f we are ever going to understand spacecraft and space
people, the first thing we must understand is logically 
enough outerspace itself. What is outerspace? If we 
really understood the answer to this question, it would be 
the very key to our "conquest” of outerspace, a task to 
which man on earth is even now seriously dedicating him
self. Before we could build a submarine we needed to 
understand water, the medium in which the submarine had 
to operate. Before we could bring forth successful air
planes we had to learn more about the air itself. Before 
we can make any real progress in spaceflight, we will cer
tainly have to expand our concepts and our understand
ing of the basic nature of outerspace itself. It seems to 
us that many people these days have the cart before the 
horse. Or shall we say the saucer before the cup before 
the cup of knowledge of outerspace itself which must pre
cede our understanding of space ships and spacetravel. 

OLD AND NEW CONCEPTS OF OUTERSPACE.

On our pilgrimage we found a very interesting thing. 
We still found plenty of the old conventional, materialistic 
concept of outerspace. Everybody knows about this con
cept. One looks into the starry heavens and sees "solid” 
bodies like stars and suns and planets, and between them 
one sees vast reaches of “empty” space. Of course the most 
learned ones among us also see "nebulous” formations, 
but these also float around in “empty” space. And so it is 
all very simple. All we have to deal with is solid or nebu
lous bodies on the one hand and "empty” space on the other 
hand. What one cannot see with the physical eyes does 

not exist. Outerspace is just nothingness, vacuityl This 
is the usual materialistic concept of outerspace. 

But what surprised us most was that here and there we 
found some very astute but practical thinkers who were talk
ing about new and entirely different concepts of outerspace. 
These concepts seemed to us to be so startlingly different 
from the conventional view, to be so far reaching, so impres
sive, or shall we say so “new age", that we made a special 
note of them. As these remarkable concepts cannot be pre
sented in one or two sentences, we shall make the effort to 
present them in some detail, step by step, in the simplest 
possible terms. We feel that they merit this attention. We 
shall call them “the vibratory frequency explanation of 
outerspace.” Let us now examine the essential points in 
this challenging explanation of outerspace. 

VIBRATORY FREQUENCY EXPLANATION 
OF OUTERSPACE.

Life Is Consciousness. The background concept of this 
entire explanation of outerspace is in the proposition that 
life is primarily a manifestation of consciousness, or if one 
prefers it: life is consciousness. Now there is life as a whole 
and there is individual life. Life as a whole is the sum total 
of all consciousness. This summation of consciousness takes 
in all life, all existence and all reality. On the other hand 
individual consciousness takes in only that particular por
tion of total life, existence and reality which the individual 
is aware of at any given period of his evolution. 

Limitations Of Human Consciousness. Human conscious
ness, or the consciousness of individuals like ourselves, has 
great limitations. It cognizes only a very limited phase of 
total existence. Its chief limitation lies in the fact that its 
view of life is confined to a timespacematter type of reality. 
It recognizes only a “physical" type of existence. It “tunes 
in" to only one narrow waveband of life and thus presents 
a very narrow view of total reality. As one researcher put 
it, “Viewing life through the human consciousness is like 

looking at a great football game through a knothole in the 
fence. All one sees is a very small portion of the spectacular 
game. Thus, human consciousness only sees — is only 
aware of — one small part of the great game of life!” 

This limited view is all the five physical senses or human 
consciousness can give us, but life as a whole extends far 
beyond this physical plane into infinite realms. But these 
are outside of the present ‘tune in” range of the human con
sciousness. 

Vibratory Frequencies. Reality as a whole in “outer
space exists in various bands or octaves of vibratory fre
quencies. These correspond to different planes of con
sciousness. The human or earthman’s band of vibratory 
frequency presents only the manifestations of physical life 
or reality as we know them. But there are many other bands 
of vibratory frequency in outerspace. These other bands 
of frequency are definite vibratory motions of energy rep
resenting different types of matter which go to make up 
other phases of reality and existence. Consciousness pro
duces energy in many frequencies and modes of motion and 
with it creates the “matter” or the “substance” of things or 
activities which it is conscious of. 

The great error of the human mind is its limited belief 
that matter or substance in the higher realms of life is va
porous, weightless and nonsolid. Nothing is farther from 
cosmic truth. Each vibratory frequency has its own “solid” 
matter, its own reality of existence that is, it is solid and 
real to those who live in that frequency. 

And how many bands of vibratory frequency or planes 
of consciousness are there? Please do not ask us. Oriental 
philosophy mentions seven or possibly eight. An advanced 
teacher we knew spoke of twentyone. We doubt if any 
human being knows. If he knew, he would not be living 
in the human octave! Possibly all the frequencies merge 
or join each other. Possibly there are an infinite number of 
life’s frequencies “worlds without end.” 

 

169 

THE DEPARTMENT STORE SIMILE.

A simile which has helped many people to grasp this 
“vibratory frequency” explanation of outerspace is as follows. 

Outerspace is like a department store. We refer to one 
of those modern mercantile establishments with many dif
ferent floors devoted to many different kinds of merchandise 
which are reached by elevators. One cannot reach the floors 
above the ground floor unless one goes up to a different 
level — up the elevator. 

Now the groundlevel corresponds to the human vibra
tory frequency, the human plane of consciousness. Then if 
one desires to go into a higher frequency or reach another 
dimension of life, one enters the “frequency elevator” and 
goes up the scale of vibratory frequencies. Then one gets 
off at a new floor, a new level — a new level of frequency 
of life or consciousness. Here one finds a new world in 
which there are different people, different things, a differ
ent atmosphere from what existed on the ground level. 
Even the individual taking the trip is different because 
his entire being, physical, mental, and spiritual undergoes a 
quickening, an increase in vibratory frequency, by virtue 
of his “ascension” in the frequency elevator. Anyone who 
is still on the earth level cannot see the reality, the solidity 
of what is going on at the higher levels. The higher levels 
are outside of the range of his human senses. This is the 
“department store simile” or parable if one prefers that 
term designed to aid us in grasping the vibratory frequency 
explanation of outerspace. 

THE TELEVISION SIMILE. 

Another simile or parable which has been found helpful 
in comprehending outerspace is the television simile. 

Outerspace is like television. A person sits in a room 
with a television set. He tunes into a program and behold 
a miracle! Suddenly he becomes aware of people, things, 
motion, activity, sounds, speech, music — yes and even 

color! He experiences a part of life! But is this all of life? 
No! It is only one program. Where are the other programs? 
They are right there right in the room with him. They 
are in the atmosphere which surrounds him in the form 
of vibrating energy. The programs coexist in the “empty” 
space of the room. But how can it be “empty” when it is 
filled with programs which coexist and interpenetrate 
each other? 

The man at the television set cannot see or hear or cog
nize any program unless he tunes into it. What separates 
these invisible programs? Nothing but vibratory frequencies 
or the type of energy vibrations which characterize and dif
ferentiate each one. 

After the man has tuned into all the different programs in 
the atmosphere and has enjoyed all these little manifesta
tions of life is this the extent of life? Are there no other 
manifestations of life for him to tune into? Indeed there 
are! But he cannot do so with his television set. All that his 
television set will give him consists of things and happen
ings in the physical octave of life. But the cosmic programs, 
the cosmic realities of life in other cosmic frequencies, are 
also present in the room. It is just a matter of tuning in. 
This is the “television simile” or parable which is designed 
to help us better to understand the mysteries of outerspace. 

THE BEST SIMILE 

All similes of course have their limitations, and these 
two similes are no exceptions. They both have limitations. 
But to us, one is definitely better than the other, in a certain respect. There is a certain important point which 
makes the television simile better than the department store 
simile. In case some of our readers may wish to puzzle this 
out for themselves, we will not state the answer at this 
point. However, to make sure that our thinking and that 
of our readers is not too far apart on this point, we will 
state it as a note at the end of this chapter. 

COSMIC RELATIONSHIPS. 

There exists an important cosmic relationship between 
outerspace and consciousness. As we see it, this is a very 
simple relationship — simple but profound. Outerspace 
equates with consciousness! Outerspace is consciousness un
limited! It is the infinitely large “room” in which con
sciousness acts and produces the things it wishes to be con
scious of. But outerspace is not something apart from con
sciousness. The two interact. They are one. 

Outerspace is not empty. It is filled with the crea
tions of consciousness. It vibrates with energy in dif
ferent frequencies, motions and densities unseen by and un
known to the physical senses. But energy in motion con
stitutes substance. When we learn to tunein to these un
seen levels of vibrating energy or substance in outerspace, 
we will find new worlds, entire new civilizations, just as 
solid, visible, tangible and real to those who live there as 
our world is to us. 

Outerspace contains endless LIFE in endless forms, end
less modes of energy in motion! It thus contains every
thing — everything that limitless consciousness (or imagina
tion) has conceived throughout endless existence and is 
still conceiving. It is all “planes of conscoiusness” put to
gether. Outerspace is the field of activity in which con
sciousness expresses itself. It is that in which consciousness 
manifests and gives reality to its own concepts, that in 
which all action takes place. It is the endless stage on 
which the producer consciousness “struts its stuff” for a 
season and then rings down the curtain only to reappear 
at another season with new actors, new scenery, new cos
tumes, new dramas, new cosmic productions. Outerspace 
is pulsating, scintillating, living consciousness without end 
— ever new, ever changing. Outerspace! Consciousness un
limited! 

In contrast to all this, the little human senses are con
sciousness limited. The only reason we are not aware of 
the magnificent and endless manifestations of life in outer

space is that we have lost our way on the threedimensional 
level and cannot find the 'frequency elevator” — the only 
means of rising into the higher levels of consciousness. But 
in this age we feel that many will find their way back to 
the elevator, will regain their lost “tunein” ability, and 
will once again enjoy the freedom of the frequencies! 

THEY THAT DWELL IN OUTERSPACE.

And what can be said of those who dwell in outerspace? 
Some saucerers claim that outerspace is filled with nothing 
but “humanbeings” just like ourselves. In other words 
that nothing exists but earthlife, threedimensional life, 
indefinitely extended into outerspace — just “more of the 
same” ad infinituml Others take the view that outerspace 
is filled with nothing less than advanced beings, almost 
Godlike in their evolvement and always thousands of years 
in advance of us. Personally we prefer Dr. George Wil
liamson’s statement that while outerspace does contain 
advanced beings, it also contains less advanced beings — 
“who have just discovered the wheel and the fact that if 
they put beeswax on the axle it will last longer and squeakless!” 

It seems to us that the deepest thinkers of all have ar
rived at the “vibratory frequency” concept of outerspace, 
and to them outerspace contains every conceivable type of 
life or manifestation of consciousness. It takes courage to 
pioneer these concepts. But we feel they are right. From 
this advanced viewpoint some of the dwellers in outer
space are like us, but others are unlike us both as to form 
and consciousness. Some are mostly consciousness with a 
minimum of form, and in others form is given a more pre
dominant emphasis. Some are more advanced in cosmic 
evolution than we and some less advanced. Some belong 
to an earthtype of evolution, and some belong to totally 
different types of evolution. Some live in higher frequencies, 
some in lower frequencies — different types of matter. 

The veils between the frequencies make some spacebeings and their worlds of life invisible and intangible to 
each other and to us. Thus in outerspace there are both 
visible and invisible worlds, suns and planets. Awareness 
of any of them depends on one’s “tunein”ability. 

From this cosmic viewpoint some spacebeings possess 
spaceships and understand spacetravel, and some are still 
in the horse and buggy stage or even the stone age. The 
more advanced beings are masters of energy or of “matter", 
which is merely a phase of energy. They can con
trol and convert energy to matter and vice versa. They 
are able to precipitate matter directly from energy, to 
levitate and to effect teleportation and to perform many 
other feats which seem impossible to us but are natural to 
them. These more advanced spacebeings include the Guar
dians of the planets and the solar systems — beings of great 
wisdom and love as well as of power. Such beings utilize 
spacecraft if needed for any mission, but they are able to 
travel without the necessity of spacecraft, passing at will 
into or out of the vibratory frequencies of outerspace. Thus 
we must be prepared to find anything and everything in 
outerspace or consciousness unlimited. 

FREEDOM OF THOUGHT.

Out of interest we asked a number of these profound 
thinkers who had arrived at the vibratory frequency view 
of outerspace why they did not stick with the simple, old 
conventional view of solid bodies and empty space. Some re
plied rather tartly that this view was “simple” all right — 
so “simple” in fact that it was inadequate to explain modern 
saucer and space phenomena! Too many things were “fall
ing out of nowhere and appearing and disappearing”. This 
was one reason given. Another reason given was that many 
O.S.C. messages were being received from spacebeings 
themselves which definitely set forth the vibratory frequency 
principles of outerspace. They felt that these advanced 
beings who live in outerspace ought to know more about it 
than we do! 

174.

 

Regarding the old conventional view, so far as they were 
concerned it was like another conventional view held at 
one time by many educated and intelligent people: namely, 
that the earth was flat. This was a simple view, but it was 
not adequate. These advanced thinkers felt they did not 
wish to go down in history as 1955 simpletons who thought 
that outerspace was empty. They did not however, criti
cize the views of others because they themselves were just 
emerging from the conventional view. They felt it was 
all right for others, particularly those to whom thinking is 
a painful process. Some people, they thought, still needed 
a materialistic 'Santa Claus” or 'Kriss Kringle” view of 
outerspace, spacebeings and space craft. Therefore, why 
disturb them? Time itself would unfold the true picture of 
inhabited outerspace existing in different levels of vibra
tory frequency. 

Friends, as we see it, at the present time each one of you 
will have to decide for yourself how you feel about outer
space. There is no other way. The view you accept will 
depend upon your own individual conditioning and devel
opment your own physical, mental, emotional, scientific 
and even spiritual evolution. Your view, the best view for 
you at this time is the view you like best, the view that ap
peals to you most, the one that rings truest to your individ
ual understanding. 

We hope you appreciate the fact that we have not been 
dogmatic on any point. We have learned better. We do 
not say, "This is it, or that is not it” to the exclusion of all 
else. If you have some other view of outerspace which you 
feel is better we would like to know about it. We are not 
trying to convince anyone of any particular view. We are 
reporting, not preaching. We feel that tolerance, open 
mindedness and keen free thinking are the best ways to 
cosmic truth, and that everyone is entitled to his own in
dividual interpretation of modern spacephenomena and 
their tremendous implications. 

But the thing that has impressed us is that to the advanced 
spacebeings there are no conflicting divisions of knowl
edge or of truth. Long ago they were able to reconcile re
ligion and science, physics and metaphysics. If we are ever 
to progress we also must bridge these gapsl It seems to us 
that the vibratory frequency explanation of outerspace 
goes farther in this direction than any other. However, each 
to his own! So here is indeed food for thought. Is outer
space empty? Or does it teem with infinite life in frequenc
ies unseen by human eyes? 

Note: The department store simile gives a good idea of the different 
planes of consciousness but says nothing about the fact that different 
planes interpenetrate each other. This we realize is difficult for the 
human mind to grasp. Thus the television simile is better in that it 
sets forth the everpresence and interpenetration of the frequencies 
of outerspace. In cosmic reality there is no here and no there. All is 
always present — in consciousness. But to become aware of the reality 
of things in any frequency requires "tunein’’ ability to that particular 
octave of life. 

CHAPTER XXV.
WE AND THEY.

We found two questions of great general interest. 

First: how do we look to the spacepeople? Secondly: what are they like? These 
are very challenging questions, and drawing upon all of our pilgrimage and all 
of the contacts and discussions we have had with 
saucerers and profound researchers and all of our studies of 
unpublished O.S.C. messages, the following represents the 
best composite replies we are able to give at this time. 

HOW DO WE LOOK TO THE SPACEPEOPLE? 

In the first place when we say ’’spacepeople” in this 
chapter, we refer only to the advanced beings and the plan
etary Guardians whose ships are now standing by in the 
atmosphere of our planet earth. The question is how do 
we on the surface of the earth look to them. 

The consensus of opinion is that we do not look very 
good to them, but yet they are not critical of us — not 
condemning — only helpful. They see our faults as an 
openbook. They see our terrible ignorance of the cosmic 
law of cause and effect. They understand how we have be
come lost in the jungle of our own ignorance and our own 
discordant creations. 

One important point often overlooked by earthmen is 
that the spacepeople look upon the earth as a whole — as 
a unit of evolution. They see our present civilization on 
earth as a whole. They are interested in the whole picture 
of man upon the earth — without any divisions of national 
boundaries, races, creeds, etc. They recognize men through
out the cosmos as a universal brotherhood. Therefore as 
they look at our earth they observe our civilization from 
the viewpoint of the status of the brotherhood of man upon 
the earth. As they thus look upon our civilization with 
great detachment what do they see? 

We know well enough what they see. Here and there 

they see individuals who understand the universal law and 
who in a spirit of unselfish service are helping others to 
grasp it. They see some nations which, despite many faults, 
are nevertheless working for universal peace and progress. 
To these constructive individuals and nations the space 
people are giving an abundance of unseen and silent help. 
But they are also giving assistance to the constructive ele
ments in backward nations. 

The spacepeople see that men of earth throughout cen
turies of ignorance have by their own discordant thoughts 
and feelings created about themselves a destructive at
mosphere which, unless reversed and nullified in time, can 
and will wipe man off the surface of the earth. That is 
why our elder brothers have come in this time of crisis 
not to plead with us but in a thoroughly detached way to 
remind us calmly but forcefully of the law of cause and ef
fect. They are here to warn us that our preoccupation with 
destruction will inevitably destroy us physically from the 
earth unless we wakeup in time. 

They have sent us great masters and teachers over thou
sands of years to show us the way — to teach us obedience 
to cosmic law. They have found us as a whole very slow to 
learn, very backward children. To them we look wayward, 
egotistical, ignorant and childish. After all these years of 
teaching, they look in vain upon our earth for the externa
lization or outward expression of a planetary brotherhood. 
They see a world divided, a world in which selfishness, greed 
and destruction are accepted as normal. They see: 

A world in which human slavery still exists — not only 
physical slavery, but mental slavery, economic slavery, re
ligious slavery — in a word ignorance slavery. 

A world in which half of the population is undernourish
ed and half gorges itself on surpluses. 

A world in which illiteracy and ignorance exists in the 
masses and advanced scientific knwoledge without corres
ponding wisdom is dangerously concentrated in the hands 
of a few. 

A civilization based for countless generations on the con
cept of “war” and “killing enemies” as the only final solu
tion to tribal, national and international differences and 
problems. 

A civilization so badly out of balance within itself and 
with respect to the laws of the universe that it is actually in 
danger of destroying itself from the most beautiful planet 
of all. 

Our spacebrothers cannot understand our fatuous be
lief that this particular civilization is somehow or other im
mune from the cosmic law of cause and effect. What we 
sow we reap over centuries of time. There is a cumulative 
effect that we have conveniently overlooked. Do we really 
think we can go on forever putting our substance, our 
thought, our feelings, our life efforts and energy into de
structive things — without finally reaping exactly what we 
have sown: destruction! 

How do we look to the spacepeople? We look very 
childish and badly in need of help. That is one reason why 
they are here. But their help will never be forced upon us 
— no, not even if we "choose” to destroy ourselves from this 
beautiful planet, either by quick poisoning (atomicwar) 
or by slow poisoning (continued ignorant experiments by 
the world’s scientists). We will be and have been warned 
and told. No coercion will ever come from our elder broth
ers — except we start to destroy the planet itself — the 
school room. That we will never be permitted to do be
cause if this civilization does not appreciate and respect 
this planet in all its beauty — the Guardians have other 
uses for it. It is strictly up to us, we the people! 

WHAT ARE THE SPACEPEOPLE LIKE? 

Once again since outerspace contains all phases of life, 
both less advanced and more advanced than we are, we 
are referring only to the advanced beings and planetary 
Guardians in this discussion. Our understanding is that 
they come from many ancient races, some of which lived 

on the earth at one time or another and some of which have 
never experienced threedimensional earth life. We un
derstand that they come from many different solar systems 
and from outerspace itself. They all have assigned tasks in 
relation to the earth and to our solar system at this critical 
time. Some act as planetary historians (corresponding to 
the “recording angels” of the Bible). Others are concerned 
with scientific and astronomical matters relating to the 
planets and solar systems. Still others are concerned with 
cosmic governmental matters. All of them are in advance 
of us in respect to scientific knowledge and achievements 
and even more so in their understanding of life’s laws and 
how to live in obedience to them. 

The historical group have the history of our planet from 
the time the first vortex was formed about ten billion years 
ago to the time the earth became solid about seven billion 
years ago and all the history since then. They have rec
ords of all of man’s efforts to colonize the earth from outer
space throughout these seven billion years. They under
stand how and why man colonized it, how and why prehis
toric animals came to it, and the different periods of evolu
tion it has gone through. They understand the long time 
cycles of planetary evolution and how through thousands 
of years ocean beds rise and become dry land and how dry 
lands sink and become oceans. They also know how and 
why various civilizations of man have failed. They regard 
planets as schoolrooms in which the suns of God learn 
their A.B.C.’s. We have used the cosmic word “sun” in
stead of “son” because they regard man primarily as a user, 
transmitter and qualifier of universal energy. 

The scientific and astronomical group understand the 
formations and mutations of planets, suns, galaxies and is
land universes. Time and space to them are only a phase 
of threedimensional consciousness, and they live and op
erate in higher phases of consciousness, travelling at will 
through various bands of vibratory frequencies. They un
derstand, however, our threedimensional viewpoint, and 

its limitations. They are masters of energy and therefore 
of “matter” or the “forms” which energy can operate in. 
They mentally manipulate energy, and the more advanced 
these beings are the more nearly transportation becomes 
an instantaneous activity of consciousness. They realize 
that no planet or sun or object in space lasts forever from 
the time viewpoint but undergoes growth, maturity, dimi
nution and rebirth. They keep scientific tab on solar sys
tems and planets and their suitability as classrooms for man 
in which to learn certain lessons and have certain experi
ences. Their scientific attainments are far in advance of 
ours but are not misused for malicious or destructive pur
poses. 

The governmental groups are part, of the vast hierarchy 
of outerspace who are entrusted with the government of 
everything from solar systems to galaxies and universes. 
These great beings are chosen for their fitness and their at
tainments. The spaceships and their crews operate under 
their command. No cruising spaceship from outerspace 
can enter the atmosphere of a planet without the permis
sion of the Guardians. They have great councils in which 
matters pertaining to cosmic welfare are discussed and de
cided. 

These advanced spacebeings are not “Gods”. That is 
the last thing they would permit themselves to be called. 
They are all humble “servants” of what they call the 
“Light” which proceeds from the one great infinite source 
of existence. They are obedient to the laws of the universe. 
They also are in the eternal process of learning and “be
coming”, and they assure us of inevitable progress of our 
own. They are balanced beings of balanced knowledge, 
wisdom, love and power. As stated they are great masters 
of energy out of which all “things” are formed. To them 
form is secondary to consciousness. Some wear forms simi
lar to ours, some larger, some smaller and some actually dif
ferent. They operate in forms best suited to their immediate 
purpose. They control form and size as easily as we control 

thought. Their attitude toward us is that of advanced elder 
brothers. They would like to see us progress back again into 
the higher frequencies from which we came, and they will 
help both individuals and groups who are constructive and 
receptive. However, they know that man must learn largely 
by experience, and they are forbidden by cosmic law to live 
our lives for us. 

They know exactly how we “got this way’’ and also “the 
way out”. Very few men on this earth know these things, 
but our spacebrothers do know and that is why they un
derstand us better than we understand ourselves. Their 
attitude is that there is nothing basically wrong with a so
journ into threedimensional life, particularly on the planet 
earth which is one of the most livable and beautiful of all 
the planets. Life experience here was intended to be in
teresting, enjoyable and instructive — but the forgetfulness 
of man in the threedimensional frequency has turned the 
experience needlessly into a veritable hell and nightmare 
for many. In entering threedimensional life many souls 
fall into a hypnotic state and forget who they are and what 
they are and how to wakeup. They become lost in their 
own frightening creations. Our spacebrothers know this 
and will help those who really desire to “go home” — to 
attain this goal, that is to return into the higher dimensions 
of life from which we came. 

CHAPTER XXVI. 

O.S.C. OUTERSPACE COMMUNICATION. 

I s it actually possible to contact spaceships and space
beings and to communicate with them? It seems to us the 
correct answer is that it has been done throughout ages 
past, and we are just reawakening to some old truths and 
again becoming aware of the fact that such things are ac
tually going on “right under our noses’’ so to speak. It 
may be interesting to review briefly some of the different 
ways in which these contacts and communications are now 
being carried on, as we learned about them on our trip. 

Please note that the term “contact” as commonly used 
sometimes overlaps with the term “communication” to a 
degree. We often say “we contacted him” — meaning that 
we got in touch with someone and also that we communicat
ed with him. But this should cause no confusion as long 
as one’s attention has been called to it. Also please note 
that this subject of “contacts and communications” with 
beings in outerspace is a tremendous subject all by it
self. We cannot do it justice in this book. All we can do 
is to touch upon a few salient phases. 

Let us first consider a few different types of contacts 
and then get into the matter of communications. The first 
and simplest type of contact is generally called a “physical” 
contact. It goes something like this. A flying saucer lands 
near some people living on the earth. The saucer is in a 
solid, visible, tangible state of matter and so are the space
men or spacewomen aboard it. Out they come and the 
earth people see and talk to these spacebeings. Sometimes 
but not always they also get a chance to touch them, and 
the spacepeople are as solid and “real” as anyone could 
wish. Communication is sometimes carried on by sign
language, or it may be by speech or even by telepathy. And 
there we have a “physical” type of contact. Whether this 
is the best and most useful type of contact is a different 
matter which we will touch upon later. 

After our investigation there is no doubt in our own minds 
but that there have actually been recent contacts and com
munications of this physical type. If we could get the whole 
worldwide picture, there probably have been quite a few 
such contacts in the last few years. There is no way of 
telling how many have occurred behind the Iron Curtain 
or in nonEnglish speaking countries or in primitive re
gions of the earth. Also we are convinced that there are 
people who have had such contacts but for various reasons 
they have not seen fit to tell about them publicly. Those 
who have lold about them have been ridiculed and even 
persecuted far more than most people realize. So the at
titude in some cases is why tell about such experiences? 

A second type of contact to note is a physical one in which 
the flying saucer or spaceship is not seen. Only the space
man is seen and heard. In other words, the spaceman may 
have been landed by a spacecraft at some different time 
or place, and we may contact him unaware that he is a 
spaceman — unless he sees fit to disclose this — and even 
then we probably would doubt him anyway. Is this type 
of contact possible? Yes, we believe there have been con
tacts of this nature also. What is the difference in princi
ple whether the space ship is seen or not except that it 
might increase one’s confidence in the fact that the being 
contacted is from outerspace. 

A third type of contact is one in which the physical sauc
er is seen but the spaceman is not seen. Daniel Fry’s first 
experience illustrates this type. Here was a physical con
tact with a remotecontrolled saucer. Daniel Fry saw and 
touched and climbed aboard a flying saucer which was 
in a solid physical state. But he did not see the spaceman 
who was controlling the saucer. The spaceman was locat
ed in the controlship miles above the saucer. However, 
he did hear and communicate with the spaceman over 
something resembling a twoway radio telephone. How 
should we classify this encounter? We would be inclined 

to classify it as a physical contact and an electronic com
munication. 

A fourth type of contact and communication is one in 
which neither the saucer nor the spaceman is seen! But 
these are contacts and communications just the same, and 
anyone who neglects to study these different types or any
one who thinks that a physical contact represents the only 
type of contact or communication has not made much of 
a study of this tremendous subject. Dr. Williamson’s group 
has made numerous contacts in which neither the space
beings nor their ships were visible, and so has George Van 
Tassel, and others. 

Daniel Fry’s first experience also illustrates still another, 
a fifth type of contact. We regard it as a very important 
type although it is not generally thought about. In Daniel 
Fry s case it occurred in advance of his physical contact 
with a saucer. He was not even aware of it until later. He 
found out later that preceding the physical saucer con
tact, the spaceman had “ransacked his mind”. Just think 
of what this means! The spaceman had ransacked Daniel 
Fry’s mind! The spaceman therefore made a oneway 
mental contact with Daniel Fry — contacted his mind, read 
his thoughts and his experiences and found out all he de
sired to know ahead of the physical contact. Are there men
tal contacts going on in the world today between space
men and earthmen? Indeed there are! And they can either 
be oneway or twoway contacts and communications. We 
would classify this as a oneway telepathic contact. 

Still later Daniel Fry received communications from the 
spaceman by hearing an unmistakable “voice in his head”, 
and he replied both audibly and mentally. Thus his re
plies were in the mental or telepathic category, and the 
voice in his head was a type of clairaudience. So here we 
have telepathy and clairaudience added to the list of meth
ods used in contacting and communicating with space
beings. 

Still another variation of contact is to see a saucer land 
and see spacemen get off of it and perform certain acts — 
such as gathering up soil samples — and then see them de
part. Such cases have been reported. This of course does not 
involve a communication and might be classed more as a 
type of "sighting” or “landing.” There are also a few 
reports of people actually being struck or hit by a saucer. 
As previously stated, maybe this is a type of "physical con
tact” that some skeptics are looking for to convince them 
of the reality and solidity of these objects! 

o.s.c. 

Here we have already cited six or seven different types 
of contacts and communications before we have barely 
started on the subject. What we are trying to convey is 
first that this is a very extensive subject about which vol
umes could be written. Secondly, that contacts and com
munications with spacebeings are by no means confined 
to ‘physical contacts”. In fact we found that the most 
significant, interesting and valuable information regarding 
outerspace has not been coming through physical con
tacts but through other means — electronic, mental or 
cosmic .means of communication, or whatever one wishes to 
call these phenomena. 

In fact we found such a tremendous variety of means of 
communicating with outerspace actually being used that 
we had to develop a new term to cover them all as a whole. 
As previously stated we use the term O.S.C. — outerspace 
communication — to cover them all regardless of the means 
used, whether they are physical, electronic, mental or otherwise. 

Here is a list of some of the classifications or different 
types of O.S.C. which we have studied. In classifying com
munications remember also that they can be either one
way or twoway. 

Physical contacts Projections of consciousness. 

Contact by emergence Automatic writing. 

Electronic Dictation. 

E. S. P. Mediumship. 

Telepathy Samadhic meditation. 

Clairaudience Reading cosmic history. 

Clairvoyance Inspired writings. 

Sound & sight rays. 

The above is only a partial list, but it should convey 
some idea of the many different ways in which communi
cations are being carried on with those living in other 
phases of life. Remember that some spacebeings are phys
ical or threedimensional, but many others live in higher 
dimensions of life and in different types of solidity and are 
unseen by us because we lack the necessary “tunein” abil
ity. At this point we can almost hear some of our readers 
protest and say, "Heavens, we are now getting into subjects 
which are taboo!” Are they indeed? Well if any reader 
feels that way we fear that he will have a hard time under

standing outerspace because outerspace itself will by its 
very nature become taboo to him! We have painstakingly 
pointed out that outerspace, while it has a physical aspect, 
also possesses many aspects which are not physical. If this 
ts so, why should we be surprised to find that communica
tions with outerspace also have not only a physical aspect 
but also other aspects beyond the physical. Anyone who is 
afraid to venture beyond the physical world had best leave 
the subject of outerspace communications strictly alone. 
We shall again touch upon this matter of taboos later in 
this chapter. Meanwhile let us briefly consider some of 
these different means by which contacts and communica
tions with those in outerspace are now being carried on. 

PHYSICAL CONTACTS. 

We have already mentioned these. As we understand it, 
a physical contact involves several of the five physical 
senses being aware of the contact. We must either see, 
hear, touch, smell or taste the spaceman or spaceship! 
Usually we insist on at least hearing and seeing the space
man. This is the only type of contact which some people 
recognize. So be it. That is their privilege. But most physical 
contacts only last a few moments, and the information 
gained is usually negligible. From our point of view, it 
is not the most desirable or useful or profitable type of 
contact. There are other types which are more important. 

CONTACT BY EMERGENCE. 

A contact may occur when a spaceship or spacebeings 
“emerge” from a higher frequency of life into our physical 
range of consciousness. This can then be followed by a 
communication in the physical realm. Such an emergence 
must precede a spaceship’s entrance into the atmosphere 
of earth if the spacebeings live in or pass through a higher 
frequency. If they normally exist in a threedimensional fre
quency corresponding to our own and do not pass through 
a higher frequency in coming to earth, such an emergence 
is not necessary (See Chapter 27 “Emergence”). 

ELECTRONIC CONTACTS.

Our research indicates that electrical or electronic types 
of contact and communication with spacebeings have been 
accomplished by amateurs to a limited extent. How much 
farther national governments or scientists have gone is 
shrouded by the veil of official secrecy. Mr. John Otto of 
Chicago and others have worked on this. Dr. George Wil
liamson is one of the sincere exponents of this method of 
communication, and he is diligently working on it on a 
twoway basis of both sending and receiving (Chapter 4). 

We should also remind our readers that in the last two 
decades earth scientists have made tremendous efforts to 
communicate with the moon and other planets by means 
of radio and radar signals. Efforts were made to “beam” 
signals to certain bodies in outerspace. At the time, these 
efforts were considered pretty much of a failure by many 
because return signals were not forthcoming in the man
ner expected or hoped for. It now begins to appear that 
these efforts may have been far more successful than at first 
realized. In the years following these attempts, spaceships 

began coming into the earth’s atmosphere in large quan
tities, and some of the saucerers insist that there is a definite 
connection between these events. 

In World War II the phenomenon of “foo fighters” was 
observed and known to many airplane pilots and their 
crews. These were usually described as “fireballs” which 
appeared either singly or in groups and glowing with 
various colors. They ranged from a few inches in size to 
several feet and seemed to be intelligently controlled. 
They would follow along with the planes, appear and dis
appear, and maneuver in strange fashion. These foo fight
ers have been so well covered by other written works that 
it is not our intention to duplicate this information. How
ever, we would like to say that everything we have learned 
indicates to us that these foo fighters are small “scanning 
saucers” or "instrument saucers” or “electronic eyes” sent 
out from spaceships by remote control to gather various 
types of information or data. We understand that these 
small instrument saucers not only send back physical data 
such as speeds, altitudes, or air pressures, but they can tele
vise their surroundings and send back pictures and even 
telepathic impressions. We are inclined to classify this phe
nomena as another type of oneway electronic contact and 
communication. Many of us are always thinking about our 
contacting of the spacebeings. It might be well for us to 
think that they are also contacting us — observing us, and 
even reading our minds when they wish to. 

E.S.P. EXTRASENSORY PERCEPTION. 

E.S.P., extrasensory perception, is a technical term which 
refers to the acquisition of knowledge by extrasensory means, 
rather than by sensory means. It is a limited term and not 
a general term as many people suppose. It does, however, 
include telepathy and certain phases of clairvoyance and 
“precognition”. In case the extrasensory perception reaches 
into the future it is called "precognition”. 

We ourselves feel we have no right to criticize the term 

E.S.P. especially i£ it helps any student to understand the 
phenomena involved. However, it may be interesting to 
point out that many of the O.S.C. messages which we have 
studied do object to this term E.S.P. One reason is that 
it pulls man apart and does not put him together again. 
“Where,” the spacebeings ask, “does thought leave off and 
sense begin?” Also they object to the word "extra” as 
conveying the concept of something “extra”, or beyond the 
normal equipment of man. They state that man is natural
ly complete and has all the equipment for telepathy, clair
audience, clairvoyance and many other things. Through 
the abuses of his body and mind and through lack of edu
cation and practice however, he has all but lost his ability 
to use this equipment. The spacebeings emphasize and 
reemphasize the fact that man’s body — rightly conditioned 
and controlled — cannot be excelled as an instrument for 
communication with outerspace. 

There should be no difficulty in differentiating between 
O.S.C. and E.S.P. We repeat that O.S.C. is an overall term 
covering all types of outerspace communications, whereas 
as we understand it E.S.P. is a limited technical term cover
ing acquisition of knowledge by means other than the use 
of the senses. 

TELEPATHY. 

Telepathy, as we use the term, represents communication 
by thoughts. It is a subdivision of E.S.P. Telepathy is often 
used in contacts and communications with spacemen for 
the reason that thought is the language of outerspace. 
Spacemen do not need speech. They normally communi
cate directly by thoughts. 

The only reason that all of us are not now in free com
munication with spacebeings is because our thoughtre
ceiving ability, more than our sending ability, has been 
lost — and we will have to regain it. Most of us have lost 
this sensitivity, but some people do have this ability right 
now and are using it for O.S.C. 

190. 

Many materialists insist that a communication must be 
by means of human speech to be valid. What is so wonderful about human speech? 
It is one of the crudest and most 
inefficient means of communication! Words are forever 
changing, and there is no universal language. If one per
son wishes to convey a thought to another by means of 
speech what does he do? He codes the thought first into 
words, then he codes the words into sound symbols. The 
receiver has to pick these up despite intervening noises and 
decode the sounds into words and the words back into 
thoughts. What an antiquated method! Why not com
municate direct by thought? That is exactly what the 
spacepeople do, and they tell us it is vastly superior to 
speech in every way. 

CLAIRAUDIENCE.

This literally means clearhearing, and refers to hearing 
above the range of ordinary hearing — above the human 
“octave” of hearing. Most people are familiar with certain 
dog whistles which are pitched so that the human ear hears 
no sound whatsoever, but a dog can hear the whistle and 
respond to it. In the same way certain people are clair
audient in that they can hear sounds in higher ranges of 
frequency than most humans. This brings them nearer to 
the spacebeings so far as sound communications are con
cerned because the more advanced spacebeings dwell in 
higher frequencies. Mark Probert is an example of a per
son who is clairaudient. He can hear beings in other phases 
of life talk to him as if they were in the same room. An
other noteworthy variation of clairaudience is a powerful 
voice inside one’s head. (See Chapter 14). 

CLAIRVOYANCE. 

This literally means clearseeing. It refers to the ability 
to see above the “octave” or “spectrum” of human sight. 
This ability, depending upon its perfection, places one in 
a more favorable position actually to see spacepeople and 

spacecraft. Advanced spacebeings live in a higherfre
quency and in a different spectrum than we do, and those 
with clairvoyant ability can often see them or their space
ships when those of duller vision are not able to. It is quite 
a thing to be with a person who can see somewhat “higher” 
than human sight. We have had this interesting experience. 
Another variation of clairvoyance, as applied to communi
cations, occurs when the receiver sees the spacemessages 
spelled out in lights or contrasting colors as if on a screen. 

SIGHT AND SOUND RAYS. 

The spacebeings are able to focus rays of energy on a 
human being and thus transmit sounds or “pictures” to 
that individual. They can employ either or both of these 
rays. These rays can be tremendously powerful and have 
to be adjusted carefully to the individual to avoid injuring 
him. (See Chapter 13). 

PROJECTIONS OF CONSCIOUSNESS. 

Some individuals have the ability to project their con
sciousness into outerspace and to bring back a conscious 
recollection of what they observed. The body remains in 
one place, but the consciousness travels anywhere it wishes 
without the human limitations of time or space. Sopie pos
sess this ability naturally, while others acquire it by instruc
tion and practice. Some projections are entirely involun
tary. Suddenly a person finds himself in a distant place 
which he may have been thinking of. In some instances 
he is actually seen there and recognized by others. In other 
cases the projections are voluntary and controlled. We 
have witnessed this phenomenon of projection by others 
and we know it can seem very startling to the uninformed. 
During a projection extraterrestrial regions can be visited, 
and communication with spacebeings can be accomplished. 
The West is particularly ignorant of this phenomenon, but 
in the Orient, it is much better known. 

192.

 Incidentally we asked the great Yada Di ShiIte regard
ing projections into higher dimensions of life, and his re
ply may be of interest to some of our readers. He said, 
“Many people have gone in projected bodies to many plac
es, but this becomes what is called a personal revelation 
and you are not called upon to believe it at all. It is some
thing that belongs to them, and while it may be very in
teresting and very fascinating to listen to — the only one 
who holds any actual proof of what happened is the in
dividual who had the projection.” 

AUTOMATIC WRITING.

This form of communication is interesting. Usually a 
person takes a pencil and paper or sits at a typewriter or 
provides himself with some other convenient means of 
writing. Then he clears his mind and completely relaxes. 
In this condition it is possible for a spacebeing to take 
control of the nerves which actuate his fingers and cause 
him to write or draw and thus effect communication. In 
some cases the recipient is not even aware of the material 
being transmitted until later when he reads it. Note that 
this method involves a degree of muscular control by the 
spacebeing. The Oahspe Bible is said to be an example 
of this. There are also other works which have been re
ceived by automatic writing — some published and many 
more unpublished. 

DICTATION.

This is somewhat similar to automatic writing but does 
not involve the same muscular control. It occurs when a 
spacebeing “dictates” a message or an entire manuscript to 
someone on earth who takes it down, either in longhand 
or on a typewriter, etc. The spaceman may “emerge” into 
the frequency of earth and give the message audibly (so 
that others could hear it as speech if they were present), 
or it can be transmitted telepathically or by virtue of clair
audience. In the latter cases it would not be audible to 

others present — unless they possessed the needed sensitiv
ity. The point to note about dictation is that the spacebe
ing is intent on transmitting a written message — not 
merely a verbal one. A Dweller On Two Planets by Phylos 
is an example of a book written by this method. 

MEDIUMSHIP. 

Mediumship is an interesting means of communication 
with beings living in other planes of life. In some cases 
it occurs as a division of consciousness in which one part of 
the medium’s mind is controlled temporarily by the com
municator, while the rest is still conscious of human sur
roundings. In “deep trance” mediumship the medium en
ters a type of “sleep” and is unaware of human surround
ings or of the communication being transmitted. Some re
searchers consider the latter form superior in that they 
think the message is less apt to be influenced by the mind of 
the medium. In very ancient phases of man’s history on 
earth, the gift of mediumship was very highly regarded as 
one of the very highest and greatest of spiritual gifts. We 
feel that this attitude will return in time as we rediscover 
the scientific and practical value of good mediumship. We 
make good use of telephones. Why should we not make 
good use of sensitive individuals who have the ability to 
act as cosmic telephones? 

SAMADHIC MEDITATION.

Samadhic meditation is somewhat similar to a projection 
of consciousness, but it is usually induced and controlled 
by the individual. In India and the Orient it is often re
garded as a high goal of attainment. It is sometimes ac
quired by a long and arduous course of training under an 
adept involving dieting, deep meditation and breathing 
techniques. In samadhi the consciousness leaves the body 
and enters a state of “illumination” in which knowledge 
far beyond the human is attainable. The body remains in 

a state of low metabolism. We know several individuals 
who have attained this state, and they are indeed remark
able examples of advanced souls with powers far beyond 
the human and natures which are almost saintlike. 

Incidentally, some O.S.C. messages advise against the 
general use of samadhi by the peoples of the West because 
it is not suited in general to the Western mind and body. 
But there are exceptions. It is also pointed out that samad
hi can be misused if it is employed as a mere “escape” from 
earth consciousness instead of as a means of making this 
world more livable. 

READING COSMIC HISTORY. 

There is such a thing as cosmic history. Spacebeings 
have access to it, but it is not recorded in books. We under
stand that all the events and happenings in the universe 
are recorded in a phase of universal energy. These records 
are sometimes called the “Akashic Records”. A few individ
uals on earth possess this rare gift of being able to cognize or 
read ’ these records. This is another method of contact
ing the mysteries of outerspace and gaining information. 
We personally know at least one individual who has this 
ability. Also the late Edgar Cayce of Virginia Beach, 
Virginia, U.S.A., possessed it (as well as other remarkable 
gifts) to an extraordinary degree. Those familiar with his 
life and works know of the many practical uses to which 
he devoted this ability. 

The ordinary human being has no means of knowing any
thing that goes back very far. But by utilizing individuals 
with this ability, it is possible to regain lost knowledge of 
the past. 

INSPIRED WRITINGS.

In connection with our subject we feel it would be a mis
take not to mention present day inspired writings. Many 
people these days receive inspired thoughts regarding outer
space and the spaceships and the planets and the new age 

we have entered as well as what lies ahead. As we un
derstand it, the spacebeings are actually directing cosmic 
ideas to the earth, and these are being received inspiration
ally by many individuals all over the world. They do not 
know where these ideas come from. They are like intui
tions and inspirations, but the individuals somehow feel 
sure that they have received something good and fine and 
true. This is a characteristic of this age, and we classify 
this as a oneway inspirational broadcast or communication 
from the spacebeings to their brothers and sisters on earth. 
It is part of the unseen help they are lovingly giving us in 
these critical times. 

COMMENT ON O.S.C. 

Quantity. The amount of outerspace communication 
going on through all of these various channels right under 
our noses is truly amazing. We could only evaluate the 
tiny part of it which we as private researchers came across. 
But if this were multiplied in proportion around the 
world, it presents a picture of staggering dimensions. 

Quality And Content. We have examined and pored 
over literally hundreds of pages of O.S.C. messages which 
have been transcribed in different ways but never published. 
Some are on tape recordings. Here is no petty discussion of 
individual human problems. Far from it. Here is ma
terial with a marvelous cosmic sweep and breadth. It cov
ers all kinds of great subjects. Most of it refers to the great 
new age in which our earth is now moving and the great 
changes which lie ahead of us. It tells about the nature of 
life and substance in outerspace and also of the great 
spacebeings who guard the planets and solar systems. It 
touches upon interplanetary governments and their coun
cils. 

Some of it is astronomical and refers to conditions in 
outerspace and on the surface of other planets. Part of 
it is historical, going back millions of years. Part of it is 
technical and refers to the techniques of space ships and of 

cosmic transportation. These things should be of interest 
to astronomers, archeologists, scientists and engineers — 
at least those who are not too hide bound and are not afraid 
of O.S.C. 

There is also no lack of forthright warning regarding 
our misuse of atomic energy. Occasionally there are teach
ings in regard to cosmic law and the paramount necessity 
of our understanding the law of cause and effect. But nev
er have we seen an O.S.C. message delivered in a “preach
ing” tone! Warnings are always given with an amazing dis
cernment, compassion, love and a detached viewpoint. It 
is never, "Do this or don’t do thatl” It is more, “This is 
the cosmic law. If you persist in this or that, then this or 
that is bound to happen. Now you do what you please — 
but we, your elder brothers, are warning you of the inevit
able consequences.” 

O.S.C. messages also state that there is going to be a great 
housecleaning on this earth; in fact it has already begun 
and will come before the “golden” part of the new age 
can take place. We shall speak more about these things in 
chapters 29, 30 and 31. The point we wish to make here 
is that none of these vast changes are ever presented in a 
fearful or frightening way. In other words none of these 
great spacebeings will ever say anything to engender fear 
in the human mindl We present this as an interesting ob
servation. We are therefore suspicious of any claimed O.S. 
C. messages which tend to frighten people to death. To us 
anyone with such messages has not “tunedin” very high up! 
Most of the messages are of very high order. As our friend 
Meade Layne puts it, “They present a great danger and a 
great hope!” Some of them reach the very heights of majes
ty and sublimity. It has been an inspiring thing to study 
them. We felt as though we were actually listening to the 
teachings of great loving masters residing in outerspace. 
How any student of modern spacephenomena can overlook 
O.S.C. is beyond us. We found it the most worthwhile and 
intriguing phase of our entire investigation. 

POSSIBLE ERRORS AND DANGERS. 

We have been asked if there is not danger in O.S.C. of 
contacting some being in a different phase of life who is 
illdisposed toward us or possibly vicious. Yes, we believe 
there is such a danger in many of the methods referred 
to. In fact we have noted three things that bear careful 
watching in O.S.C. 

First, there is a possibility of contacting ourselves — our 
own higher selves or subconscious — and thinking mistaken
ly that we are in touch with a spacebeing. As we see it, 
there is nothing wrong with contacting one’s higherself. It 
knows a great deal and can be very helpful. But let us 
distinguish between this and a spacebeingl We must learn 
how to distinguish between one’s own ideas and the mes
sages from outerspace. This is a part of the scientific train
ing and practice which we need in these matters. 

Secondly, there is the danger of contacting the “wrong” 
being — someone who is downright ignorant or who may 
know less about life than we do. Also we must be careful 
about contacting someone who is of evil intent or who is 
crafty or whose only desire is to make a sport of an earth
ling who voluntarily follows his lead. This is no laughing 
matter. On our trip we saw a few pitiful examples of this. 
How can we tell the reliability of the being we contact? 
We must painstakingly prove out the contact — slowly de
velop the cosmic “reputation” of the communicator. This 
takes time, patience and a scientific attitude. “By their 
fruits ye shall know them.” (Bible, Matthew 7:20). 

Thirdly, we have been asked if there is a possibility of 
confusing a mental experience with a physical experience. 
Yes, we believe there is. We feel that this item must be very 
carefully watched by both the person having the experi
ence and the public. For example an individual may ex
perience a “projection of consciousness” into outerspace 
and gather valuable information. There is nothing basic
ally wrong with this. But if such an experience is presented 
as a physical experience — this, of course, is wrong and can 

lead to great confusion. 

THE BEST CONTACT AND COMMUNICATION. 
We have been asked what we consider the best type of 
contact and communication. Our reply may surprise some 
of our readers. The very best type of contact as we see it — 
the ultimate of outerspace communication — is not with 
another individual at all! It is to make a direct contact with 
Cosmic Consciousness, or the Divine Mind, or the All 
Mind! When a spacebeing has attained a certain state of 
progress and wants to know something, he does not go 
and ask another spacebeing for the answer. He goes direct
ly to Cosmic Consciousness and gets his answer. They tell 
us we are in the process of relearning this ourselves. 

As to contacting spacebeings, the best contact we think 
is the most continuous contact on the basis of proven re
liability of the information received. In such a contact 
one can keep going back again and again for additional in
formation or assistance. This is not necessarily a physical 
type of contact. We feel that this is food for thought. 

TABOOS HOLD US BACK. 
As we see it nothing holds us back more from learning 
rapidly about outerspace and they that dwell therein than 
our taboos. The great teachings of the Eastern seers are 
largely taboo in the West. The spiritual nature and pow
ers of man are taboo to medicine. Metaphysics is taboo to 
physics. One branch of religious thought is taboo to an
other branch. Thus throughout the centuries we have just 
about “booed" ourselves out of all cosmic knowledge! 

If anyone so much as whispers the word “occult” — heav
ens, just watch the rush for the door! The word “occult” 
simply means “hidden”. That is all. Just “hidden”. In 
the name of truth what is being hidden from us? It is 
about time we found out. We are convinced from our re
search that when we have the courage to bring the hidden 
truths of life out into the sunlight, we will find ourselves 
in possession of many of the secrets of outerspace! When 

are we going to cast aside our little threedimensional fears, 
prejudices and taboos and open our minds to the previ
ously hidden truths which are even now pouring to earth 
like a rain of pure clean water. 

ATTITUDE. 

What should be our attitude toward O.S.C.? Should 
this subject be taboo in modern, intelligent circles? Should 
we sneer at it, scorn it or disregard it? We feel that such 
an attitude is highly unintelligent. If we wish to conquer 
outerspace, how can we afford to overlook any channel 
of contact or communication? How can we afford to leave 
any stone unturned? After all the best, quickest and most 
practical way to learn the secrets of outerspace is to ask 
the beings who live therel Who knows more about it 
than they do. This is just plain common sense. 

As we see it, the only correct attitude toward O.S.C. is 
to develop it scientifically. The scientific attitude is the 
right attitude. The approach of Dr. J. B. Rhine of Duke 
University, Durham, North Carolina, in his study of “Para
psychology” typifies this scientific attitude. Certain other 
groups also have a proper scientific approach. We need 
this approach applied to every type of O.S.C. We need to 
investigate, study and evaluate all these methods scientif
ically. We are always out of balance on the physical side. 
We spend millions of dollars on a physical approach to out
erspace. What we have tried to point out is that outer
space is more than physical so why confine our efforts to 
the physical? Who can say that equal efforts in the realm 
of O.S.C. will not get us into outerspace faster than our 
present efforts along purely physical lines! 

CHAPTER XXVII. 

FOR ENGINEERS, SCIENTISTS AND 
THINKERS EVERYWHERE, 
SMASHING THE COSMIC BARRIER.

we on the earth have been doing a bit of “smashing” of late. We have smashed the sonic barrier 
in the air. We have smashed the speed limit at 
which man can travel so often that “here” and “there” are 
about ready to give up the ghost! We are now making 
plans to smash the “thermal” barrier. The Campbell clan 
in England is taking delight in smashing the water barrier. 
And of course several nations are already smashing the 
atom. But the real barrier which we need to smash is 
the “cosmic barrier”. What do we mean by that? We refer 
to the barrier of incredible human ignorance which keeps 
us from cosmic knowledge. 

For thousands of years we on earth — we of this particular 
round of civilization — have been cosmic isolationists. A 
great part of our consciousness of reality has actually been 
blackedout, so that we have been aware only of life on 
our own little flyspeck which we call the earth. We have 
been dead to the fact that we are not alone in the universe, 
dead to the fact that there is life all around us in the heav
ens, and that we are a part of an endless cosmic communi
ty of life, purpose, activity and progress. 

Of one thing we may be sure: that we will never under
stand spaceships, spacepeople or outerspace itself through 
the medium of a little finite mind — no matter how “scien
tific” or well trained it may be in finite concepts or in reas
oning from finite premises. There is no ignorance so dense 
as “educated” or “scientific” ignorance — the kind that 
can always prove to its own satisfaction that nothing can 
possibly "be” outside of its own limited concepts. Scientific 

 
finality is the death of scientific progress. The answers we 
are looking for are not to be found in the realms of emi
nent, respectable, conventional teachings — even though 
they bear the label of “science” and the seal of time. 

THREEDIMENSIONAL CONCEPTS 
NOT ADEQUATE. 

At this point, please permit me to ask our engineering 
and scientific friends a simple question: How many of you 
have studied teleportation? Frankly I for one would not 
know how to approach the subject of intergalactic space
travel without talking about “teleportation”! How many 
of you have studied teleportation? 

What? Not one of you? What in the name of cosmic 
truth is wrong with our present day technical schools? 
Are we at fault or is it our schools? No courses in telepor
tation! No knowledge of levitation either? How can we 
approach an intelligent discussion of the principles upon 
which spacetravel is based if our education in cosmic con
cepts has been so woefully neglected? The old threedimen
sional concepts will not explain the modern phenomena of 
spacetravel or the actions of space ships or spacepeople. 
We must seek new and cosmic concepts before we can in
telligently start upon the design or construction of a fly
ing saucer or a magnificent intergalactic spaceship. In 
fact we need these cosmic concepts before we can even per
form worthwhile experimentation! Threedimensional ideas 
will never produce a fourdimensional product. Is that not 
correct? 

BOOKS WITH A COSMIC VIEWPOINT.

Where in the name of heaven can you and I start to 
learn about spacecraft engineering? Can we expect to 
learn from those threedimensional textbooks which our 
technical schools give us? Or from those fat and expen
sive little "Engineering Handbooks”? We will grant you 
that they are crammed full of endless threedimensional 

knowledge. But we are now dealing with phenomena which 
extend beyond threedimensional truths, and if we wish to 
understand spacetravel we will have to screwup our cour
age and start reaching out for fourdimensional and higher
dimensional books and concepts — in other words cosmic 
concepts. 

So we suggest at this point that we all throw away our 
threedimensional textbooks — or at least lay them aside for 
the time being. Let us start picking up and studying some 
fourdimensional books. Let us get our minds out of the 
old threedimensional ruts that our technical schools have 
pounded us into until we are literally hypnotized into a 
limited spacetimematter view of life and reality. Someone 
has to break this hypnotism, and that is what we mean 
when we refer to breaking through the hard shell of "edu
cated ignorance’’, and the need of "smashing the cosmic 
barrier”. How can we do it? By turning our attention to 
books, writings and O.S.C. messages with a cosmic outlook. 

We suggest that we start with Phylos’ great book A 
Dweller On Two Planets. Some practical engineers regard 
this book as a great eyeopener to cosmic engineering. 
It tells of civilizations on this earth thousands of years ago 
in which space ships were so common that the little ones 
were used like taxicabsl It is also filled with many hints 
regarding the principles on which they operated without 
fuel. While we are at it, why not make a study of the man
ner in which this book was written? If we are openminded, 
we may learn a thing or two about the different ways in 
which cosmic knowledge comes to those who possess a 
certain peculiar degree of receptivity to it. We may even 
“cut our eye teeth” on the present actuality of O.S.C. — 
outerspace communication. 

If your conventionality has not thwarted you by now and 
caused you to turn back congratulations! You are now 
making a start at least in the direction of cosmic knowl
edge and where some of it may be found, and that should 
be an important thing to you. If you are still with us, we 

suggest that you next turn to Autobiography Of A Yogi 
by Paramhansa Yogananda. Let us not become frightened. 
We are not turning to this book so we may all become Yogis! 
That is not the point. Let us study it with detachment — 
scientifically — from an engineer’s viewpoint. In it we 
may learn about universal energy called “Prana”. We may 
discover what "Prana” can do in a human body when 
this everpresent energy is consciously controlled and direct
ed. Once we learn that there is such a thing as levitation 
and that people have lived for twenty years without phys
ical food, then the question of where spaceships get their 
energy and how they overcome gravity may not seem so 
baffling to us. These are samples of conditioning books 
for conditioning thought in the direction of cosmic truth. 
Other similar books are listed at the end of this book. After 
you have once “broken the ice”, you can find your own 
books of this nature. If you do not like these particular 
books get some other books — but be sure they are in the 
cosmic range of thought. We must get out of the old three
dimensional rut. We must “go cosmic” if we wish to un
derstand cosmic things beyond the physical plane. 

EXPANDING OUR HORIZONS.

Engineers and scientists of this generation have an unpre
cedented opportunity for breaking down the high parti
tions that have separated and divided man’s knowledge of 
the truths of existence. From what we have learned about 
our advanced spacebrothers, they have been able to merge 
the divided portions of knowledge which we call science, 
physics, astronomy, engineering, morality, religion, philos
ophy, metaphysics and the occult they have been able 
to merge all of these parts of knowledge into one great 
whole which they call Cosmic Truth, or Cosmic Law, or 
the Universal Law. By doing this they have progressed to 
degrees of mastery which make us look like kindergarten 
children. We are not talking about fanciful things. En
gineers have to be "practical”, and we are talking only of 

practical things. 

Truth is Truth. It is a seamless garment. There are 
no divisions in it. It is these manmade divisions of knowl
edge that have for ages slowed us down to a snail’s pace in 
cosmic progress. But the darkness is even now giving way 
to the light at an accelerated pace. It is smart engineering 
to recognize these things. Some of the most successful en
gineers we have known are both engineers and metaphysi
cians. They are cosmic thinkers. They combined a knowl
edge of the physical and the supraphysical into a successful 
engineering practice which has caused their associates to 
call them “marvels” or "geniuses”. The head of a certain 
sizable industry in a great city, unknown to his associates, 
is an adept — a seer. He has learned and is practicing a 
type of what is called "meditation” that gives him all the 
answers he needs. His wisdom and judgment are astound
ing. This illustrates modern cosmic engineering practice. 

We must expand our horizons as to our sources of cosmic 
information. Let us remember the following. The earth 
is about seven billion years old from the time it began to 
get solid. A lot of “school children” have passed through 
this “schoolhouse” the earth during this time. Many 
long forgotten civilizations have come and gone which 
were far in advance of us today. Some of these past civili
zations had their atomic power, and what is more impor
tant they had better and less destructive sources of energy. 
They also had spaceships, some of which at least overcame 
gravity and burned no fuel. Thus we, who think of our
selves as such an advanced civilization, are only relearning 
what our ancestors knew countless ages ago. There is liter
ally nothing “new” under the sun. There are very few 
historical or even archeological records of these things on 
earth, but there are inspired writings and O.S.C. messages 
which tell about them. Also ancient occult teachings and 
philosophies are brim full of cosmic principles which 
relate both directly and indirectly to spacetravel and 
man s mastery over energy or matter. 

We realize this world is filled with engineers and scien
tists who are burning with the desire to build spaceships 
and spaceplatforms and to get out into the fascinating 
and fathomless regions of outerspace. Wonderful, we say! 
Keep it up! We are with you all the way, shall we say to 
the Moon, to Mars, to Venus, to Jupiter! But why stop 
there. The goal is really “outerspace” itself. 

Let us never give up the desire to get there. Everything 
starts with desire, and it is a potent factor in all progress. 
And fortunately cosmic progress is the destiny of man — 
including, of course, engineers and scientists! But what we 
are pointing out is that outerspace is more than a phys
ical thing, and that physical engineering is not enough to 
get us there. We must get into cosmic engineering. It is 
a wise engineer who will learn all he can about levitation, 
precipitation, teleportation and allied subjects. This knowl
edge is not to be found through conventional sources. We 
must turn to inspired writings, books with a cosmic view
point, and even O.S.C. 

The most direct way to learn about spaceships is to “ask 
the man who owns one” — or at least to get in touch with 
the extraterrestrial intelligences who know about them. 
Impossible! Not at all, but there may be certain restric
tions on the information they give out. Such informa
tion must not be used destructively or selfishly. But why 
overlook these avenues to cosmic knowledge? It might 
save us years, or even decades, of haphazard human experi
mentation. 

THE EARTH AS A SPACE SHIP. 

Before we go on to further discussions of spacecraft 
technology, let us ask you the question which caused so 
much excitement for us in Mexico City. “Did you ever 
see or talk to a spaceman?” 

Certainly you have! You and your neighbor are space
men or spacewomen. We are all spacepeople. We live in 
space, do we not — even though we know only precious 

little about it. And we travel through spacel The trouble 
with us is that we have been so engrossed in the little af
fairs of this world that we have almost forgotten these tre
mendous truths. We are spacepeople right nowl 

Many engineers say they would give anything for a ride on 
a spaceship. But we have been riding on a spaceship for 
years. Our space ship at the present time is of round de
sign and is called the earth. Of course we are not privileged 
to steer this particular spaceship anywhere we wish. In 
fact the spacebeings tell us that if we understood the tech
nology of this ship, it would help us tremendously in build
ing an artificial one. 

Many of us are aghast at the speeds of flying saucers. But 
if they travel at fantastic speeds — well our own little space
ship does not exactly loaf! Let us consider a few of the 
speed characteristics of our spaceship, the earth. The 
earth at the equator is roughly 24,000 miles around, and 
it turns on its axis once in twentyfour hours. This rep
resents a speed of about 1,000 miles per hour for those of us 
who live near the equator. It would be slightly less for 
those who live a little farther away from the equator. The 
speed of sound at sea level is only about 750 miles per 
hour, so most of us spacepeople have been nonchalantly 
travelling faster than the “speed of sound” without batting 
an eyelash! We have all of us — every one of us — cracked 
the “sonic barrier”. 

But this is not all. Our spaceship cruises around the 
sun once a year in a long loop many millions of miles in 
length at an approximate speed of over 66,000 miles per 
hour. This is more than ten times the speed of our fastest 
rockets. That is going some, is it not? But now hang onto 
your hats! Some elementary astronomy books tell us that 
the part of the galaxy in which our spaceship cruises is 
itself moving through space at some 170 miles per second. 
That, my friends, is about 612,000 miles per hour — more 
than half a million miles per hour! If we could steer our 
spaceship and point it toward Venus, at that rate we could 

reach Venus in about 42 hours. So why be shocked when 
someone speaks of the "fantastic” speeds of spaceships. We 
are not so slow ourselves! 

Now one important question. We know that storms or 
winds blowing say at 150 miles per hour can damage a city. 
How come then that we spacepeople travelling at over 
600,000 miles per hour through space manage to survive? 
Why don’t our hats blow off, followed by our clothes and 
our skin? Why is not our space ship the earth blown to 
bits? You have guessed it. Our “atmosphere” travels along 
with our ship. Our spaceship carries its own protective 
field or protective atmosphere along with it. Ponder this, 
friends, and you may get an inkling of how spaceships sur
vive at fantastic speeds even if outerspace is filled with 
dangerous cosmic debris and violent cosmic rays which the 
unprotected human body cannot withstand. 

By the way we have not even yet mentioned any cosmic 
ultimate in speed. Many deep thinkers place this at the 
apparent “speed of light” or at about 670,000,000 miles 
per hour. Our research indicates that even this concept 
of ultimate speed needs revising. Instantaneous intergalac
tic travel can never be explained by any such human con
cepts as time, space and threedimensional matter. 

THREE EXPLANATIONS OF SPACETRAVEL. 

On our pilgrimage we found three different explanations 
of spacetravel. These are: first, the physical explanation, 
secondly, the combined explanation and thirdly the cos
mic explanation. Let us now consider these three with 
great care. Please refer to Chapter 21 for definitions. 

The Physical Explanation Of SpaceTravel. In this 
explanation everything is physical and stays physical all 
the time. A normally physical spaceman living on the 
surface of a physical planet gets into a physical spaceship 
and makes a spacetime type of flight at “x” miles per 
hour to the physical earth. 

It is a “miles per hour” type of spacetravel such as we 

recognize on earth only much faster — up into the hundreds 
of thousands of miles per hour. It would have to be this, 
otherwise even trips between the planets of our solar sys
tem would take a long time. To overcome the problems of 
propulsion, acceleration, cosmic ray bombardment and 
cosmic debris, some form of cosmic energy is harnessed and 
is converted into the required effects of levitation, direc
tional motion, independent gravitational field and a pro
tective force about the ship. 

In this concept of spacetravel nothing approaching tele
portation is employed. The spacemen and the spaceship 
never depart from the physical state of matter. A trip to 
earth starts from a physical plane, continues physical dur
ing flight and winds up physical on the earth. This is the 
onehundred percent physical explanation of spacetravel. 
It is basically the same as our spacetime or miles per hour 
type of travel only more so — with new means of propul
sion, gravity control and protection. 

The Combined Explanation Of SpaceTravel. In this 
explanation, a flight starts from a physical plane on a phys
ical basis, goes into teleportation en route, but winds up on 
a physical basis. 

A normally physical spaceman residing on the surface 
of a physical planet is sufficiently evolved to understand 
teleportation and to apply it to spacetravel. May we point 
out that this is a very different thing from mere physical 
flight. It involves converting the entire space ship and the 
bodies of the passengers into energy during flight, and 
then reconverting this energy back to matter and form. 

The space ship is constructed of suitable materials which 
are adapted to teleportation. On earth at present we do 
not know this combination of materials — although we 
may have the elements needed. Note that the spaceman’s 
body must also be capable of teleportation. This involves 
a temporary rechemicalization or change in the atomic 
structure of the physical body. Our present earth bodies 
are illadapted to this mutation even if we knew how to accomplish it. 
But the spaceman is sufficiently advanced to 
understand and control these activities of energy. 

The spaceman enters his ship in a physical state and 
takes off for the earth. At first he employs physical flight 
— the miles per hour or spacetime kind of flight we are 
familiar with. But he has millions of miles to go. Space
time flight is too slow for him. Therefore he turns tem
porarily to teleportation or timelessflight to speed his 
journey. He converts his spaceship and himself tempo
rarily into energy. He tunes into earth’s atmosphere and 
instantly finds himself there. He then re converts his ship 
to physical matter and flys the remaining short distance 
to the surface of the earth by the conventional or miles 
per hour method. 

If an earthman happens to be watching at the instant 
of conversion, the spaceship will seem to emerge from no
where. In conventional flight in the earth’s atmosphere the 
speed of the space ship is limited to say about 25,000 miles 
per hour by frictional resistance despite the protective ra
diation employed. In the teleportation stage there is no 
speed limit, not even the so called speed of light. When 
the spaceman steps off his ship onto the earth, both he and 
his ship are as solid or physical as any earthman could 
wish. In fact he started that way from his physical planet. 
Physicality is his normal state. The teleportation represent
ed only a temporary supraphysical state used to speed up 
the trip. 

This is the combined explanation of spacetravel. Its 
norm is physical. It starts on a physical basis but loses its 
physical status momentarily due to teleportation. Then 
it returns to the physical. The spaceship and the spaceman 
must be capable of both spacetime flight and teleportation. 

The Cosmic Explanation Of Space Travel. In this ex
planation, physicality is not the norm at all. Physicality is 
only a temporary state which the spacebeings employ to 
make us aware of them. In this case we are not dealing 
with beings who are normally physical or threedimensional 

and live on the surface of planets. We are dealing with 
true “spacebeings”. They live in outerspace itself in a 
different plane of consciousness, in a higher frequency or 
octave of life. They and their entire civilizations are be
yond the range of our physical senses. We cannot normally 
see them or touch them. But they have a solidity and reality 
of their own. 

These advanced spacebeings are not vaporous or evanes
cent. This is a great mistake which many otherwise good 
researchers make. They have their own solid ground, their 
families, buildings, libraries, schools, factories, powerplants, 
governments, and spaceships. But we must realize that all 
this exists in the higher frequencies of outerspace. In fact 
these higher frequencies of reality interpenetrate our own 
threedimensional spacetimematter frequency. 

These great beings are far in advance of us both tech
nically and morally. They are masters of energy, which 
means that they are also masters of matter. They can in
stantly convert matter to energy and vice versa. Their nor
mal substance or matter is different from ours in both fre
quency and mode of vibration. Their matter can pass 
through our matter unobserved and without damage to 
either. Time and space are not entities outside of their 
control. However, they realize that the limitations of time 
and space are very real to us. 

There are only two ways in which these spacebeings 
can become visible and tangible to us. Either they must 
descend into our frequency or we must ascend into their 
frequency. There are not many earthmen who can accom
plish this, but there are a few who to a certain extent can 
go up the “frequency elevator”. In most cases of contact, 
however, the spacebeings have to come down to our level.

Now let us assume that a spaceman of this advanced 
nature wishes to visit the earth. The first thing to note is 
that he can do this without any equipment whatsoever — 
without any space ship if he wishes to. He can do it as 

a being invisible to us, which he normally is, or he can ad
just his frequency and form to our norm and appear to us 
as a physical being. This is one type of cosmic space flight 
in which no equipment is used. 

If the spaceman wishes to come to earth with a large 
spaceship full of equipment and personnel, all the ma
terial and personnel are moved into the “spaceship”. A 
better name than space ship would be a “converter” — an 
energy or frequency converter. To the spaceman the opera
tion of flying to the earth has very little to do with time or 
space or miles per hour. He may however employ space
time flight to a small extent at the end of his trip, mostly 
to avoid scaring us to death. 

When all is ready, the spaceman tunes the entire space
ship and its contents into the frequency of earth and in
stantly arrives at the destination. This is a type of tele
portation or instantaneous cosmic travel. At this point 
the space ship, although it has reached the atmosphere of 
our earth, may still be in a state of matter both invisible 
and intangible to us. A further mutation of energy brings 
it into a physical state which we can both see and feel. The 
ship can then proceed by the spacetime method of travel 
to the surface of the earth. 

However, we understand that the large ships rarely land, 
although it has happened in isolated areas of the earth in 
a few cases. Most of these ships are very large — too large 
for our airports. Usually they launch smaller scoutsaucers 
with men and equipment aboard them for specific mis
sions on the surface of the earth. Or they may send out 
remote controlled saucers to study certain conditions. 

When spacemen come to earth in this manner, it is pos
sible to see them and talk to them and touch them. In this 
condition they resemble “human beings” like ourselves. 
But remember this is an abnormal state of matter for them 
to be in. When they teleport themselves back to their 
homes they live there normally in a different frequency, 
a different state of substance, outside of the tunein range 

of our physical senses. 

When they are temporarily on earth, someone may ask 
them, “What planet are you from?’’ Instantly they may 
sense that the questioner is incapable of understanding 
their true nature. They may telepathically discern that 
he can only comprehend life as physical on the surface of 
a physical planet — that the reality of life in higher fre
quencies is beyond his range of thought. Therefore they 
adapt their reply to the mentality of the questioner — wave 
their hands toward the sky and say, "Oh, we are from Ve
nus, or Mars, or from a planet behind the Moon!” 

This is the cosmic explanation of spacetravel. Its norm 
is cosmic throughout. It starts from a plane above the phys
ical and employs teleportation and energy conversion to 
bring the spaceships and the spacebeings temporarily into 
our physical range of awareness. It is timeless, cosmic space
travel. 

AN O.S.C. MESSAGE EXPLAINING 
COSMIC TRANSPORTATION.

(By Courstesy Of Mr. George Van Tassel).

The following extraordinary information on cosmic 
transportation was received in an O.S.C. message in 1955 
by Mr. George Van Tassel of Giant Rock, California. We 
are including it for two reasons. First, because we feel 
certain that many saucer investigators will appreciate it. 
We know that many students are not satisfied with the off
hand and casual explanation with which saucer phenomena 
are often dismissed. We believe they would like to hear 
what a spaceman has to say about cosmic transportation. 
Secondly, because we would like to illustrate the quality 
and depth of some of the technical information which is 
coming to earth by O.S.C. methods but which ordinarily 
is not made public because of its advanced nature. 

This explanation of cosmic transportation was given 
by a spaceman who was in direct charge of certain cosmic 
transportation activities a being who should know because 
transportation is his specialty in higher dimensions 
of life. A verbatim transcript would be too lengthy for 
this book. Therefore we have with the permission of Mr. 
Van Tassel condensed the message into a brief summary of 
the sequence of operations as given by the spaceman. Here 
it is in brief: 

First, we isolate a cubic portion of what you call space by 
“charging” ft or "ionizing” it. The size of the cube is de
termined by the size of the objects, material and personnel 
we wish to transport. It may measure a few of your “yards” 
on a side or some thousands of miles depending on what is 
being transported. 

Secondly, we move everything we wish to transport into 
this cube in space: people, materials, objects, even scores 
of large spacecraft, if desired. 

Thirdly, we create a vibratory null or silence inside of the 
cube. This is something we have learned to do. 

Fourthly, we tune into the “place” we wish to go to — the 
destination. 

Fifthly, we release the null and find ourselves instantly 
at our destination. 

Comment: We are very grateful to Mr. Van Tassel for 
permission to publish this. During our research we have 
found some extraordinary information received by O.S.C. 
methods. Apparently the higher one goes in the scale of 
cosmic evolution, the nearer does the activity of transporta
tion approach a direct mental control of time, space and 
matter rather than a physical phenomenon. 

EMERGENCE AND TRANSCENDENCE. 

We have selected the terms “emergence” and “trans
cendence” to cover the activities of spaceships and space
beings when they come into or pass out of our limited state 
of awareness. In chapter 21 we explained the difficulty of 
finding suitable words to convey the nature of such activ
ities or mutations. 

We cannot see or touch spaceships or spacepeople when 
they are in their higher frequencies because they exist out
side of the range of our human senses. However, they have 
a reality and solidity of their own. Within their own band 
of vibratory frequency they are visible, solid, and tangible 
to beings who live on their level. These remarks, of course, 
apply only to spacebeings living in higher frequencies — 
not to other threedimensional beings. 

When they come to earth and make themselves visible 
and tangible to us, they have to descend into our octave of 
frequency. This activity we call “emergence”. Our present 
understanding of the nature of emergence includes the fol
lowing four steps. 

Steps Of Emergence. 

1. Decrease in vibratory frequency or rate of motion to 
conform to earth’s conditions. 

2. Decrease in density. 

3. Loss of energy. 

4. Polarization or change in plane or form of energy mo
tion to conform to earth matter. 

Our understanding is that step 1 brings the spaceship and 
its personnel into our range of visibility. Step 4 makes the 
space ship tangible to us. 

When they leave our earth to return to the higher fre
quencies of outerspace from which they come, they must 
go through a reverse action which we call “transcendence”. 
We understand that transcendence involves four steps as 
follows: 

1. Increase in vibratory frequency. 

2. Increase in density. 

3. Absorption of energy. 

4. Polarization back to the form of energy motion or 
matter from which the spaceship came. 

We understand that step 1 nullifies visibility of the ship 
and its personnel so far as human sight is concerned. Step 
4 nullifies tangibility so far as human touch is concerned. 
It is possible, however, for a spaceship to complete step 1 
without completing step 4. In this case we have a phenomenon
far in advance of most human knowledge, namely 
tangibility without visibility. The reverse is also possible. 
In other words there are conditions of highfrequency mat
ter in which we cannot see an object, but we can feel it. 
Also there are conditions in which we can see spaceships or 
spacepeople but they have little tangibility or solidity 
from our viewpoint. Remember that one great characteris
tic of advanced spacebeings is their complete mastery of 
energy or matter. 

SPECTRUMS OF SENSE.

VVe have discussed the important subject of the limi
tations of the human senses and how they present only a 
narrow band of awareness of existence — like a oneband 
radio which can only tune into one frequency of broad
cast programs. A more technical name for these limitations 
would be “spectrums” of the senses. Most of us are familiar 
with the fact that there is a spectrum of human hearing. 
Human hearing only detects or responds to sound vibra
tions within a given range of frequencies. Some readers 
may be familiar with dog whistles which give forth a note 
of such high pitch that the human ear cannot hear it at 
all. In this case the sound can not be heard because it is 
higher than the human sound spectrum — it tops the spec
trum — it is above the “upperend” of the spectrum. Re
member, however, that a spectrum has a "high” and a “low” 
end, and that we can lose awareness of an activity of energy 
such as sound either because it is above the highend or be
low the lowend of our human spectrum. Thus there are 
sounds too high or too fast for us to hear and also sounds 
too low or too slow for us to hear. There actually are sounds 
we cannot hear, but they do exist, they do have reality just 
the same. 

Just as sound is a manifestation of energy, so is every
thing else in existence from the hardest piece of metal to 
the most exotic perfume or the most transcendent thought 
or concept or feeling. All is energy created and cognized 

by consciousness. To us this is the beachhead of knowl
edge in our present sea of ignorance. We must recognize 
the limited spectrum of the human senses. This is the 
first rung up the ladder to cosmic knowledge. 

We have mentioned the human spectrum of sound. 
There are also human spectrums of smell, taste, sight and 
feeling. There are odors and fragrances we cannot smell, 
and there are flavors we cannot taste. There are also colors 
and things we cannot see which exist outside of our spec
trum of sight. We are all familiar with solid fan blades 
which when stationary seem solid and visible to us and 
obscure any object behind them. But when we add mo
tion or vibration to the blades by revolving them, they dis
appear to our sight and we can even see the objects behind 
them. In this state of increased motion the blades have 
“transcended” the upper end of our spectrum of visibility 
but not our spectrum of tangibility. We cannot see them, 
but we can feel them. If you doubt this, put your fingers 
in the revolving blades. Why is it, friends, that most of us 
are perfectly familiar with these simple things, and yet if 
anyone suggests that a spaceship can exist in a vibratory 
state of matter in which it is invisible but tangible — well, 
many people start running as if they had seen a ghost! 

DENSITIES AND THE SPECTRUM 
OF TANGIBILITY.

This leads us to the subject of the densities of highfre
quency matter out of which spaceships are made. The 
difficulty which many people have in grasping the density 
angle revolves around our spectrum of tangibility or touch 
or feeling. We are all familiar with solid objects passing 
beyond the upper range of our spectrum of tangibility 
and thus becoming intangible — because they become more 
vaporous, more evanescent and therefore less dense. Take 
for example ice. We heat it and speed up its energy ac
tivity. It melts and changes to a liquid — water. More heat 
is applied and it expands and becomes a vapor — steam. 

p
217.

We can put our hand through this vapor if it is cool enough. 
It is intangible. A substance ice in a solid form became 
water and then steam — an intangible form if the same 
substance. In this state it is above the upper range of 
human tangibility. 

But this is not the way in which a spaceship becomes 
intangible.* When a space ship transcends our spectrum 
of both visibility and tangibility, it goes through a mutation 
which increases the energy frequency and also a polari
zation which changes the type of motion of the energy out 
of which it is constructed. The net result is a form of mat
ter which has a higher frequency and a greater density. 
This causes invisibility and intangibility so far as the human 
senses are concerned. But the high frequency matter of the 
spaceship in this condition is not more vaporous than 
before. On the contrary it is denser than before. High fre
quency matter is denser than earth matter and can pass 
right through the “openings” in earth matter. It becomes 
intangible to us because it passess beyond the lower (denser) 
end of our spectrum of tangibility. 

If this is too much for the layman, we suggest he leave 
it alone. However, engineers and scientists should be in
terested in it. At this point, a friend exclaimed, “In other 
words, a spaceship in the transcended state can pass through 
us like a wind through a wire fence. Is that it?” 

“That is not too bad,” I replied, “provided you recognize 
in your simile exactly which thing corresponds to the wind 
and which to the wire fence. The spaceship represents the 
wire fence because it is denser. Earth matter represents the 
wind because it is porous and vaporous compared to the 
highfrequency substance of the spaceship. 

NOTES ON SPACE CRAFT TECHNOLOGY.

One thing to note is that in outerspace throughout count
less ages there have been spacecraft of every conceivable 
type, size, shape and design using many different operating principles. 
Spacecraft are not confined to cigar shaped 
ships or saucer like ships. A study of Desmond Leslie’s historical research will give some ideas of the great variety. 

One of the greatest puzzles to mankind has been the 
acceleration of spacecraft when flying in a conventional 
spacetime type of flight. Their speeds in earth’s atmos
phere have been clocked upwards of 20,000 miles per hour. 
The tight turns, sudden stops and sudden changes in direc
tion they are able to effect at these great speeds would pro
duce gravity pressures or "G’s”, from our viewpoint, which 
no human being could live through. Another puzzle has 
been what type of protection or protective atmosphere 
they employ to ward off cosmic debris existing in outer
space. We feel that the works of Daniel Fry have covered 
these points so well that there is no need of duplicating the 
explanations in detail. Briefly he states that the spacepeo
ple have solved the “G” problem by applying accelerating 
or decelerating energies to every atom of the ship and its 
contents simultaneously, including the personnel. Thus 
there exists no differential of acceleration between the ship 
and the personnel. Therefore, no “G’s” are experienced in
side the ship despite its “impossible” maneuvers. As to 
the protective atmosphere surrounding the ship, it does 
exist in the form of a repellant type of energy. Thus space
ships carry with them their own gravitational field and their 
own protective field. 

DUPLICATION OF SPACE SHIPS. 

Being an engineer, when I first started to study saucers 
I was tremendously enthused with the possibility of quick
ly duplicating spacecraft and sailing around in outerspace. 

I do not wish to lessen anyone’s enthusiasm along this line 
— but may I say that so far as I am concerned, our research 
has to put it mildly tempered this early enthusiasm with 
the discovery that there are a lot of missing links. Thus 
while being a tremendous believer in the philosophy that 
a difficult task takes a little while, and an impossible task 

 
takes a little longer,” nevertheless it now appears that the 
element of 'a little longer” may require more patience 
than seemed required at first. 

To begin with, it has become evident that spacecraft 
technology is highly involved with the requirement of 
very special materials — materials which have the heat re
sistance and the electrical, magnetic, frequency and physical 
qualities necessary. We doubt that mankind at present pos
sesses the knowhow needed to produce these materials even 
if the required elements exist on earth. Further, there is 
that little matter of “tying into” some antigravity energy 
or producing an antigravity force from known energy sourc
es. Also about the only propulsion we now know is jetpro
pulsion, whereas interstellar spacecraft are way ahead of 
us, using universal energy or "light” energy. Then there 
is another consideration which few people have ever thought 
about but it is very important. It is this. We discovered 
atomic energy, which was a discovery well up in the cosmic 
range of things. We started throwing it around rather free
ly without cosmic wisdom in proportion to its cosmic 
power, and suddenly we ran into the Guardians of the 
planets and their cosmic navies! 

Now the question arises just how far will our elder 
brothers in the spacechaft permit us to go in spacecraft 
technology before we have balanced our scientific know
how with a little more cosmic wisdom — or shall we say 
cosmic morality? This seems to us a question worth ponder
ing. 

ONE STEP AT A TIME. 

We understand that in past ages on this earth our ances
tors had some spacecraft which were not interplanetary. 
They were confined to operating in the atmosphere of the 
earth. Nevertheless they represented a vast step in advance 
of our balloons, propellerdriven planes, jetplanes, helicop
ters and rockets because they overcame gravity and oper
ated on the magnetic lines of force of the earth. Now it 

seems to us that we must progress one step at a time, and that 
this type of noninterplanetary spacecraft is a legitimate 
goal for us at the present time. It is far more within our 
grasp than intergalactic teleporting spaceships. Further
more, if the human race can get over its mania for killing 
each other, we might even get the spacepeople to help us 
speed up such a development. We understand the technique 
was known in past ages, so it should not be too difficult to 
re discover it. 

THE CONQUEST OF OUTER SPACE. 

This is a glorious adventure for mankind. We have some 
hurdles to overcome, but after all what is more fun than 
overcoming difficulties. There is the psychological hurdle 
and the need of overcoming "spacesickness”, which we un
derstand can be worse than mal de mer. Then there is 
the heat barrier and the need of protection from space de
bris. One of the worst hurdles will probably be cosmicrays. 
Some of the bodies in space which we may wish to visit 
like the moon — have too little atmosphere and too little 
ionosphere properly to shield the human body. We will 
need new lightweight materials for protection against 
cosmic rays. We certainly cannot use fifteen feet of lead 
which we understand it takes if we only have lead. The 
conquest of outerspace is important, and who gets there 
first is important. We feel that the race to get into outer
space will be won by those who cooperate most with outer
space — not those who attack it by brute force. 

Outerspace is not threedimensional. And it is not emp
ty. It is energy in vibration and in modes of motion that 
we must learn to tune into. Tuning into it is equivalent 
to getting “there”. The way into outerspace is not by rock
ets or jet planes. There is the difference of day and night 
between a rocket trying to tear its way into outerspace by 
rute force and a majestic fuelless spaceship gliding silent
ly on unseen lines of force! The way into outerspace is up 
the elevator of vibratory frequencies. 

Also the race into outerspace will be won by those who 
conform most to cosmic law and thereby make themselves 
most worthy of high knowledge. Also we believe that O.S.C. 
will play an important part in our conquest of — our co
operation with — outerspace. 

CHAPTER XXVIII.

WE VISIT ORFEO ANGELUCCI. 

we shall now discuss Orfeo Angelucci and his truly 
remarkable saucer experiences. We became ac
quainted with him through the assistance of mu
tual friends who are themselves deeply interested in saucers 
and know many saucerers personally. We feel very grate
ful for the help they have given us in preparing this book. 
On September 19, 1955, we drove to our friends’ home in 
Los Angeles, where we spent some very profitable hours 
with both Mr. & Mrs. Angelucci. We feel that no saucer 
researcher can afford to neglect Angelucci’s great contribu
tion to our human knowledge of this subject. 

We found the Angeluccis to be very charming, homelov
ing people of Italian ancestry and the parents of two boys. 
They had come to California about eight years previously 
from Trenton, New Jersey, U.S.A. We asked him how he 
had come by the unusual name of "Orfeo”, and he told 
us it was based on the name "Orpheus” from the old legend 
of "Orpheus and Eurydice”. 

Angelucci’s background is not too different from that of 
many others who grew up in middle class American homes. 
He quit school in New Jersey at the ninth grade, went to 
work and later married. He has always had an avid inter
est in scientific things, particularly the nature of the atom, 
and he has studied and experimented in his spare time. His 
big problem has always been his precarious health and his 
extremely nervous sensibilities, which have caused him end
less suffering and pain both preceding and during any 
thunderstorm or electric storm. Whenever an electric storm 
approaches he goes through a regular series of distressing 
symptoms” starting with a prickling sensation in his hands, 
arms, back and feet. It was this physical problem that led 
the family to move to California where storms are less fre
quent. We mention this because these physical symptoms 

 

223 

later were to become, for Angelucci, an almost infallible 
warning of the approach of a spacecraft or a prelude to a 
spacecontact. 

Angelucci is a trim slender man with fine cleancut fea
tures and deep expressive eyes. Strangely enough some in
definable quality about him reminded both of us of Sal
vador Villanueva Medina, the Mexican chauffeur. Hu
manly, we found him a very friendly and downright like
able sort of person — not at all difficult to meet or to make 
friends with. But as the evening wore on and the conversa
tion turned to the higher aspects of the flying saucer phe
nomena, we discovered that we were indeed talking with 
an individual of great spiritual advancement, discernment 
and experience. By this we do not mean that he was what 
people call a “religious" person — far from it. There is a 
tremendous gap between religious orthodoxy and the type 
of cosmic advancement we found in Angelucci. 

We were grateful that our meeting with this advanced 
saucerer had come when it did — toward the end of our 
saucer pilgrimage. We realized that if it had come at the 
start, it would have been too much for us, too advanced, 
and we probably would not have been able to follow or 
understand or appreciate his experiences because most of 
them typified the supraphysical aspects of saucers rather 
than the physical. One good way to learn, however, is to 
get acquainted with the men having the more advanced type 
of saucer experiences. So here we were talking with a man 
who for about nine years had been under the direct obser
vation of extraterrestrial beings and who had been privi
leged to have at least eight contacts or intimate personal 
experiences with them. 

These experiences are set forth in detail in his book The 
Secret Of The Saucers, which he copyrighted in 1955. In 
our estimation Angelucci has done an exceptional and cou
rageous job in revealing the intimate details of his experi
ence and the nature of the advanced spacebeings he has 
contacted — their greatness, their perfection, and their 

224 

 

compassionate love for mankind. Few books reveal what, 
for want of a better word, we might call the “sacred” na
ture of such contacts between a spacebeing and an earth
being. 

It seems to us that Angelucci’s experiences and his forth
right and honest revelation of them belong not to the mul
titude of unawakened humans who invariably classify 
everything beyond the range of the five physical senses as 
either buncombe or heresy. Rather they belong primarily 
to those with a certain natural or acquired capacity for un
derstanding them. The saucer enthusiast who is still in 
that mental state where he absolutely insists that the saucers 
be served down to him, flat on the ground, and brim full 
of material sauce will doubtless find little that is either 
appetizing or palatable in Angelucci’s saucer experiences. 
After all, if one s viewpoint is "flat on the ground”, that 
fact alone prohibits one from being able to follow saucers 
into the higher realms of life and consciousness from which 
many of them, but not all of them do come. 

Others who have a certain degree of spiritual attainment 
of their own, or those who are familiar with states and 
stages of consciousness or who are students of metaphysics 
or philosophy will have no trouble in understanding this 
unusual saucerer. Those who are familiar with the attain
ments of the masters or the advanced yogis or swamis, or 
those who are familiar with the works of Edgar Cayce, or 
those who have themselves more or less pierced the veils 
which hide the frequencies of life such people will not 
only profit by Angelucci’s experiences but will be very 
grateful for his efforts to share them with others. These 
people will take Angelucci to their hearts. They will see in 
him a modern “revelator” — a veritable modem “dweller 
on two planets”, and they will rejoice in his revelations. 

To the earnest saucer researcher who is not afraid to fol
low the truth into the reaches of outerspace but who has 
difficulty in understanding Angelucci, we have this to say. 
The study of saucers is a subject of vast extent, in fact a 

 

225 

study of cosmic proportions. One would not expect to un
derstand calculus without first learning step by step all 
the intermediate phases of mathematics. In the same way 
one’s understanding of advanced saucer experiences must 
come stepbystep. We must climb the ladder of cosmic 
truth one rung at a time. We feel that Angelucci’s experi
ences are not for most beginners, but of course there are ex
ceptions. For those who are starting from scratch but sin
cerely wish to understand, the following three suggestions 
might prove of value: 

1. First, study the physical aspect of saucers. They have 
a definite physical side. Learn all about this from every 
possible source — study the sightings and the ABC books. 

2. Then progress gently from the physical aspects, which 
are the least important, into the supraphysical aspects. 
Our book has been designed to help the reader do this. 
Gradually study the more advanced books, and above all try 
to grasp the outstanding cosmic fact that life exists in oc
taves or bands of vibratory frequency. These correspond to 
different planes of consciousness. 

3. Then realize this. In most of Angelucci’s contacts the 
great spacebeings did not “descend” fully into our octave 
of life or into our octave of vibratory frequency to meet 
him. The space beings came “down” only part way and An
gelucci went “up” part way. Thus they met on a plane of 
frequency or of consciousness slightly above the physical — 
where complete threedimensional solidity, tangibility and 
visibility were not attained and were not necessary. As An
gelucci himself has expressed it, “I saw them clearly — but 
as though I were viewing them through rippling water.” It 
reminded him of an imperfectly tuned television set. 

ANGELUCCI’S EXPERIENCES 

Let us now briefly review a few of his remarkable experi
ences. His first flying saucer experience took place way 
back in Trenton, New Jersey, on August 4, 1946. Please 
remember that this date was months before “flying saucers” 

226 

 

were heard of or even so named by modern man. At the 
time Angelucci was quite an experimenter in certain scien
tific fields, and he was particularly interested in the subject 
of fungi and mold cultures. Desiring to learn the effect 
of upper atmospheric conditions on certain mold cultures, 
he bought some “Navytype” balloons with the idea of car
rying the cultures, packed in baskets attached to the bal
loons, to predetermined altitudes and then hauling them 
down for further study. 

The balloons, however, with their attached baskets broke 
away and he and his family and friends sorrowfully watch
ed this seemingly unhappy ending to his scientific efforts. 
As the balloons rose higher and higher in the sky, they all 
noticed a strange aircraft hovering overhead near them. It 
actually seemed to be following the balloons. The craft 
was round, and it had no wingsl They watched and won
dered about it, but it soon disappeared in the distance. 
In the days that followed most everyone forgot about the 
incident. How could Angelucci know then that he had 
just seen a “flying saucer” or that a day would come years 
later when he would meet the spacebeing who was control
ling the strange craft! 

Almost six years elapsed before his second experience. 
Those who are so impatient for saucer experiences may 
well ponder this fact. He had moved to California and was 
working in the Lockheed Aircraft Corporation plant at Bur
bank in the suburban area of Los Angeles. On May 23, 
1952, late at night he felt the strange physical symptoms 
which usually preceded an electrical storm. He went out
side the plant to investigate and was surprised to find an 
unusually clear and beautiful night. It puzzled him that 
there was no storm to account for the distressing symptoms. 

His shift ended at 12:30 a.m., and he started driving 
home in his car following wellknown city boulevards. The 
painful symptoms still persisted. As he neared the city lim
its of Los Angeles, he caught sight of an ovalshaped object 
travelling ahead of him in the air. It was luminous and 

 

227 

was emitting a red color. Apparently no one else noticed 
it. He followed it across the Los Angeles River to the out
skirts of a park region. Here the object veered off the 
main highway, down a lonely park drive, and finally hung 
motionless over a field. Angelucci decided to follow it 
and parked his car a short distance from the amazing, 
hovering, pulsating object which seemed only partially 
solid. 

Suddenly it shot skyward at an angle, then paused while 
two smaller objects like balls of fire came from it. Then 
as the original object accelerated out of sight, the two fire
balls descended and hovered in the air only a few feet 
from the astounded Angelucci. They were fluorescent 
green in color and about three feet in diameter. 

The contact that followed was both audible and visual. 
The visual phase came about through a luminous screen 
effect between the glowing spheres in which Angelucci 
saw a projected “picture” of his spacevisitors as on a tele
vision screen. This phase, however, lasted only a few min
utes. But a voice came from the glowing green objects and 
the twoway communication which ensued lasted for al
most an hour. Some of the highlights of this contact may be 
of interest. 

First, Angelucci learned that these beings were none oth
er than those controlling the “saucer” which followed his 
lost balloons back in New Jersey in 1946. Moreover, he 
had been under their observation ever since that event. 
They gave him a cup of shining liquid to drink which re
lieved his symptoms. Oral speech hardly seemed necessary. 
Before he could voice a question the answer would come. 
Apparently he was in some sort of telepathic communica
tion with them. He experienced the uncomfortable feeling 
that they knew his every thought, his past, everything about 
him — even things he did not know himself. The green 
spheres were explained as instruments of transmission and 
reception which were used to relay visual, auditory and 
telepathic impressions to a “mothership” for permanent 

228 

 

recording. Angelucci was not the only earthling this group 
of spacebeings was in the process of contacting — there 
was another individual in Italy, and still another in India. 
The chief basis of these contacts was "higher vibrational 
perception” on the part of these earthlings. 

Angelucci was told that the spacebeings had noted man’s 
humorous and skeptical treatment of "flying saucers” on 
earth but they did not criticize this because of the need of 
our becoming gradually aware of them. Space craft of oth
er planetary evolutions were also visiting the earth, all on 
a friendly and helpful basis. Many have seen them, but 
the ships were capable of various states of invisibility. Speeds 
approaching that of light could be attained by many space
craft. However, the more advanced spacebeings function 
in dimensions unknown to man and have no need of space
craft of any type but on occasions employ them for pur
poses of material manifestations to men. In the higher phas
es of life the time dimension becomes nonexistent, and 
there are incredibly rapid means of travel beyond man’s 
present comprehension. The reason for their coming is 
that life evolution on earth has reached a dangerous crisis. 

We have given the above with some detail in order to 
convey to our readers something of the great range of infor
mation which it is possible to obtain through a space con
tact. 

Angelucci’s third experience was a trip in a remote con
trolled flying saucer. It took place on July 23, 1952, two 
months after his audiovisual contact. The takeoff and 
landing points were in a secluded spot along the dry river 
bed of the Los Angeles River only a few blocks from his 
home — well within the city limits of Los Angeles. Before 
he saw the saucer on the ground he experienced the fam
iliar tingling sensation in his arms and legs. The shape of 
the craft resembled an Eskimo Igloo” about thirty feet 
high and thirty feet in diameter at the base and appeared 
to him to be constructed of a translucent substance. 

He boarded the craft, was taken to an elevation of about 

 

229 

one thousand miles and was able to view the earth from 
this altitude through a section of the ship’s wall which be
came transparent. He carried on a combined audible and 
telepathic communication with his space friend who was 
located in the control ship. They also played music for 
him. At one time he caught a view of the control ship, and 
of several saucers. He also obtained a magnificent view of 
outerspace. He received further valuable information re
garding the space ships and the present situation on earth 
which brought them here. During this trip he was put 
through a certain type of “initiation” and returned to 
earth with a mark on his body, which later served him as 
an exceedingly necessary and solid reminder of the “real
ity” of this experience. 

His fourth experience was an especially memorable one 
for him because it brought him facetoface with his space 
friend for the first time, and he was able to give his friend 
a name. This contact occurred on August 2, 1952, only 
ten days after his saucer trip and at approximately the 
same location. It was late evening and he was walking to
ward his home. He heard solid footsteps approaching and 
was greeted by the owner of the voice he had heard in his 
previous contacts. His space friend was taller than Ange
lucci, wellbuilt and wore a tight fitting uniform without 
seams. However, he did not appear to Angelucci to be in a 
state of complete human (material) solidity, as both the 
visible outline and color seemed to waver slightly. Angeluc
ci wondered at this and was told that he was seeing "an 
approximation” of the spacebeing. 

The communication this time centered mostly on the 
critical situation on earth. Angelucci was told that our 
earth is often called "the home of sorrows”, and that we 
face a crisis which in history will be called “The Great 
Accident”. The spacepeople are here to assist us all they 
can, within the bounds of cosmic law, during this critical 
period. Then came this outstanding pronouncement show
ing that the spacepeople have no illusions as to the diffi

230 

 

culty of awakening mankind from its threedimension 
dream: 

“Few will believe or even hear your account of our meet
ing — your story will in no way change conditions upon 
earth. 

“Neither will any actual Earthly event be either hastened 
or retarded because of our meeting. 

At most your story will give only greater faith and inner 
conviction to the few — but it is an important few!” 

Angelucci’s fifth experience came late in October of 
1952. In this case he ran into his spacefriend at the Grey
hound Bus Terminal dressed in a smart business suit, a 
felt hat, and carrying a briefcase — the epitome of a success
ful business man! Angelucci states that the purpose of 
this brief contact was to show him, once and for all, that 
spacebeings can appear and function as solid beings when 
they wish to. In his other contacts they appeared in a semi
solid condition. 

Angelucci’s story of his experiences offers to the reader 
an opportunity to study the problem which the spacepeople 
themselves evidently face in trying to reveal their own true 
nature to the men of earth. Even with a spiritually ad
vanced individual like Angelucci, they had a problem in 
revealing themselves to him without his slipping into doubts, 
fears, and even worrying about his own sanity. This is 
no laughing matter. Many O.S.C. messages state that the 
greatest barrier to earthman’s entering outerspace is the 
psychological barrier his uncontrollable fears when he 
finds out how different outerspace is — and the actual dan
ger of insanity. 

Modern psychologists might be interested in studying An
gelucci s efforts to convey to others the knowledge he has 
received from the spacebeings and the ridicule and scorn 
which not only he but his wife and children have to face. 
Those who complain that the spacepeople are not doing 
all they should in revealing themselves should study these 
things. 

 

231 

Now in order to illustrate something of the exalted na
ture of the spacebeings whom Angelucci has contacted 
and the high quality of these communications and the infor
mation he has received from them, we have his permission 
to quote the following random passages from his re
markable book: 

“Man believes himself civilized, but often his thoughts 
are barbaric and his emotions lethal. 

“The aggressive men of Earth want our scientific ad
vancements. For these they would shoot our crafts from 
the skies — if they could. 

“Already man’s material knowledge has far outstripped 
the growth of brotherly love and spiritual understanding 
in his heart. Therein lies the present danger. 

“To add to the destructive phase of man’s scientific 
knowledge is not permitted. We are working now to turn 
that knowledge into constructive purposes upon Earth. 

“Earth’s evolution is evolution through pain, sorrow, 
sin, suffering and the illusion of physical death. 

“Every person upon Earth and its adjoining planes of 
manifestation are definitely arrayed upon either the posi
tive side of progression toward good, or the negative side 
of regression toward greater evil. 

“At this moment we weep with you for Earth and her 
Children. For all of its apparent beauty Earth is a purga
torial world among the planets evolving intelligent life. 
Hate, selfishness and cruelty rise from many parts of it like 
a dark mist. 

“Believe me, all evolutions are not similar to Earth’s 
despite the present belief of your scientists. 

“His (man’s) one purpose upon Earth now is to attain 
reunion with his immortal consciousness. 

“All intelligences capable of spacetravel can read thoughts 
and see emotions. 

“You can rise above the inadequacies of your physical 
body. 

“Many have actually seen our discs. Some have seen us 

232 

 

clairvoyantly. Others have communicated with us clair
audiently. Still others recognize the truth of our existence 
and greater scope of our being through the intuitive per
ception. 

"But as far as official proof of ourselves for which so 
many clamor, we cannot offer that. Official proof of the 
existence of our discs will come. But for us to attempt phys
ically to contact mankind through any socalled authorita
tive source would be only useless and possible disastrous 
for them. 

“Nearly all threedimensional beings have no concept of, 
nor could they possibly understand, extradimensional be
ings. 

“We see the individuals of Earth as each one really is 
— and not as perceived by the limited senses of man. 

“Also we hope to give men a deeper knowledge and un
derstanding of their own true nature and a greater aware
ness of the evolutionary crisis facing them. 

Your Teacher has told you, God is love, and in these 
simple words may be found the secrets of all the mysteries 
of Earth and the worlds beyond. 

“Our discs, or saucers, as Earthmen term them, are in 
your spacetime frame as harbingers of mankind’s coming 
resurrection from the living death.” 

In closing our chapter on Orfeo Angelucci may we say 
that we are grateful indeed to have met this saucerer, and 
we sincerely hope that our humble efforts in this book may 
help open the treasure chest of his experiences to others 
who are interested. 

CHAPTER XXIX 

RELIGION PHILOSOPHY AND 
THE FLYING SAUCERS 
INTENSE INTEREST 

he reason we include this chapter is that during our 

pilgrimage we found that many people were inter

ested in saucers primarily because of religion, philoso
phy or prophecy. If this surprises some of our readers, we 
should like to say that we found saucer interest about equally 
divided into three categories. First, there was a group whose 
interest was primarily astronomical or cosmic. They want
ed to know if other planets were actually inhabited and all 
about what exists in outerspace. Second, there was a group 
whose interest was mostly technical or scientific. They 
wished to know how spaceships work and how they could 
be duplicated on earth. 

A third group, however, wanted to know if there exists 
a definite relationship between the present spacephenome
na and certain religious or philosophical teachings, and 
also whether these “signs and wonders” in the sky are re
lated to various prophecies. We found a lively interest 
in such things. 

Does the coming of the spacepeople confirm or justify 
certain long cherished religious or prophetic beliefs or ex
pectations? How do the spacepeople think in regard to cer
tain religious matters? What will be the impact of saucer 
revelations on religions? What about prophecies of destruc
tion or of salvation or of a new age? These were the type of 
questions which seemed to be of intense interest to about 
onethird of those who were seriously studying saucers. 

Early in our pilgrimage we were compelled to recognize 
this category of saucer interest, and we therefore made a 
special effort to study the views of various individuals and 

234 

 

groups along this line. We found numerous devout and re
ligious souls who, although they shunned publicity, were 
nevertheless avid students of the religious implications of 
the saucer phenomena. These people were quietly putting 
two and two together and were making up their own minds 
and arriving at their own interpretations of events. We 
also studied many O.S.C. messages which referred to saucers 
from a deeply religious point of view. 

After much listening and weighing of this type of data, 
we pieced together our own new age view of the religious, 
philosophic and prophetic implications of the coming of 
the saucers. From this viewpoint gained during our pil
grimage we shall now endeavor to answer, to the best of our 
understanding, many of the questions which seemed of ma
jor interest to those we met. 

If some of these answers prove disturbing to certain 
readers, please remember that everyone is free to develop 
his own interpretation of saucer phenomena. Our work has 
been that of private researchers, and we have tried to re
main as openminded and detached as possible. However, 
we cannot escape the feeling that as the truth about saucers 
and their implications gradually dawns on humanity, the 
impact is going to be overwhelming. We feel that the 
truth is going to exert a profound effect upon every branch 
of human knowledge and belief, and the religious and 
philosophical branches of knowledge are no exceptions. As 
we see it everything that can be shaken is now in the process 
of being shaken, and in the end nothing will survive but 
cosmic actuality. The following represents our estimate of 
this interesting situation. 

THE VAST PERSPECTIVE OF THE SPACEBEINGS 

In referring to the spacebeings in this chapter, please 
note that we are again referring to the planetary Guardians 
and those advanced beings in outerspace who are concerned 
with this planet and its evolution and welfare. We are not 
referring to lesser beings or those whose evolution is less 

 

235 

advanced than our own. 

Let us note that the perspective of these spacebeings is 
vastly greater than our own because their view of life is 
not limited to the threedimensional octave. Some of these 
advanced beings, but not all of them, have experienced 
earth life, and therefore they understand the predicament 
we are in better than we do. They have risen above earth 
life, and they know how this can be accomplished. Many 
of them are our elder brothers and sisters, and they say that 
we ourselves originally lived in a higher dimension of life 
and that we are on the way back “home”. Because they un
derstand “how we got this way”, they also know the way 
back. In this New Age they will actually help many who 
have learned earth’s lessons aright to progress permanent
ly out of threedimensional consciousness back into the 
freedom of the frequencies. (See also chapter 25). Their 
ways are not our ways. Their viewpoint is cosmic and not 
human. Bearing this clearly in mind, we shall now answer 
pertinent questions which we have been asked. 

ARE THE SPACEBEINGS RELIGIOUS? 

Are the spacepeople religious, and do they believe in 
“God”? This question is often asked. The best answer we 
have found is that they do not divide cosmic knowledge 
into divisions as we do and label them “religion, science, 
etc.” To them there is no such thing as a religious truth 
separate and distinct from a legal truth or an astronomical 
truth or a scientific truth. Truth Is. It is an undivided 
whole. Our efforts to divide it lead to mental and moral 
chaos. They are not “believers”, they are “knowers”. They 
have learned to merge individual consciousness with the 
allknowing Mind or Cosmic Consciousness, and thereby 
they can arrive at whatever phase of cosmic truth they wish 
to know. They recognize a great central source of Life, Pow
er and Consciousness, but they realize themselves as an in
tegral, if infinitesimal, part of this whole. They say we on 
earth like to talk about truth, but we live it only to a very 

236 

 

small degree. They both understand cosmic truth and 
live it. They are obedient to cosmic law. They cooperate 
with allpervading life. To them, man in all phases of life 
represents a universal brotherhood. In this cosmic sense 
they are religious and recognize a central source of Life. 

DO THEY BELIEVE IN JESUS CHRIST 

But, asks the orthodox Christian, do they believe in Je
sus Christ, and have they been “saved”? Without any de
sire to offend these highly respectable orthodox and doubt
lessly wellintentioned questioners, the only cosmic answer 
we know is that the question itself displays an unfortunate 
ignorance of the nature of these evolved spacebeings who 
are themselves great enough to be the Guardians of entire 
planets and solar systems. These beings do not need “sav
ing”. They are already part of an advanced evolution. 

Throughout billions of years of earth time and innumer
able civilizations, the planetary Guardians have partici
pated in the activity of sending great masters and teachers 
to the earth and to other planets whenever it was necessary. 
Naturally they believed in the virtue and the ability of all 
these great teachers to fulfill their missions on the planets 
to which they were sent. 

In outerspace there are entire races of advanced beings 
or masters who are qualified to act as teachers to the evolv
ing civilizations of various planets. There are billions of 
inhabited planets in various stages of evolution, and many 
teachers are needed. In our preoccupation with the earth, 
it is easy to forget the vast needs of the universe. As to the 
teachings of the Master Jesus they say that mankind has 
never lived them nor have the true teachings been taught. 
They were based on cosmic law, and had we followed them 
the world would not now be in its present critical cosmic 
situation. 

DO THEY DIE? 

In order to give a proper answer to this question, we 

 

237 

must understand what category of spacebeings are referred 
to and what is meant by the word "die”. Ii we define “dy
ing” as the mutation in which individual consciousness 
ceases its energizing of a human physical body, then space
beings of a physical or threedimensional category living 
on other planets do “die”. However, we understand that 
this mutation occurs only on threedimensional planes, not 
on the higher planes of life. 

On some planets the duration of the body or the body
span is less than on earth. On others it is over tentimes 
greater. In fact the spacebeings state that the bodyspan 
of man on earth in certain ancient civilizations was far 
greater than it is at present. Physical bodies have endured 
from 500 to over 1,000 years. They also state that if we 
understood how to treat our earth bodies aright, even to
day they would last a minimum of 250 years. 

Another fact worth noting is that it is not absolutely neces
sary for an individual to depart from a planet and leave his 
physical body behind him to disintegrate. Some individ
uals learn how to take their bodies with them. In our 
Christian Bible, Enoch, Elijah and Jesus all took their 
bodies with them. It is our understanding that during this 
new age certain advanced earthmen will, with the help of 
their spacebrothers, learn how to accomplish this by rais
ing the vibratory frequency of their physical bodies, which 
after all are constituted of energy. It is our sloweddown 
vibratory frequency that binds us to physicality. 

The advanced spacebeings do not “die” and leave bodies 
behind them because their manifestation of life is different, 
and body manifestation is always under the control of 
consciousness. By conscious control they create the body 
they wish for any environment. They control its size, 
weight, shape and other qualities. Thus there is no prob
lem of body durability in the higher spheres of life. 

As a matter of fact there is no such thing as death on 
any plane of consciousness. Leaving one plane coincides 
with arriving on another plane. We have used the term 

238 

 

“bodyspan” instead of lifespan because the life span is 
infinite. “Death” is one of the most misunderstood phe
nomena connected with “Life”. The term is a misnomer. 
Individual life is an individualization of the Eternal Source 
of Life. It is individual consciousness, and its lifespark 
cannot be extinguished. It is independent of bodies or 
planets. Individual consciousness can go through all sorts 
of experiences, and it can exist in many different states, 
both physical and otherwise. It can enter a dream state, or 
it can sleep and even go into periods of suspended anima
tion, either for days or eons of what we call time. It can 
awake and live on the surface of planets, or it can live in 
the higher frequencies of outerspace. It can manifest form, 
or it can exist in an energy state. It can appear instantly in 
the most distant places of the universe by teleportation. It 
can progress, or it can retrograde in cosmic evolution. 

Consciousness is the indestructible “I Am” with unlim
ited freedom except for the Gosmic law of cause and effect. 
It is free to initiate almost any cause, but it is responsible 
for the effect. Therefore, it finally learns to use its freedom 
and its powers of creation constructively and harmoniously, 
with due regard to the creations of others. Thus in truth 
none of us “die”l 

DO THEY BELIEVE IN REEMBODIMENT? 

This is such a controversial subject that at first we felt 
disinclined to attempt to answer it. However, our own cur
iosity regarding it led us to pay particular attention to it 
during our pilgrimage, and we decided it would not be 
keeping faith as reporters to our readers if we failed to 
report our findings. If these findings tread unkindly on 
certain cherished orthodox beliefs we are sorry, but we 
feel that all of us must expect some of our pet concepts to 
go by the board in this new age as communication with 
outerspace changes belief into cosmic knowledge. The 
truth about many beliefs is now in the process of being 
revealed to mankind. Once again, the spacebeings are not 

 

239 

“believers” but "knowers”. 

With reference to reembodiment we understand that it 
is one type of life experience. Also it can be a very un
progressive type of life experience, when one stays on the 
“wheel of reembodiment” life after life for thousands of 
years. Many of us have lived innumerable earth lives, but 
our memory of them is blacked out with each new embodi
ment. Certain gifted individuals have the ability to discern 
these past lives of their own and even of others. The higher 
spacebeings also have this ability. 

In order to progress back into the higher frequencies of 
life, we must get off the wheel of reembodiment on earth. 
In this new age the spacebeings will assist many who de
sire this. Fortunately, they state and we regard this as very 
important, that reembodiment is not universal and it is 
not necessarily automatic, nor are there any immutable 
time periods for it. It depends on the individual. It is 
a matter of individual consciousness and of conscious con
trol. Individuals can and do progress beyond it. Any strong 
or powerful emotion such as hate, love or intense desire 
for the things of this earth tends to bring an individual 
back to earth through the cosmic action of reembodiment. 

Conversely a willingness or desire to let go of threedi
mensional earthlife in all its aspects for something higher 
is a potent factor in progress toward higher dimensions of 
life. Individual desire is a very powerful thing in determin
ing individual life experience even in cosmic realms. No 
wonder that one of the greatest teachings of the spacepeople 
is that of "emotional control”. This is our finding upon 
this subject. If others disagree, that is their privilege. 

ARE SPACEBEINGS AND SPACEPHENOMENA 
MENTIONED IN THE BIBLE? 

This question intrigued us. We discussed it with many 
new age thinkers and came up with some interesting ideas. 
A number of saucer students feel definitely that the Bible 
contains many references to both spacebeings and to space

240 

 

phenomena. For example they regard the following passage 
from II Kings: 2, 1 1 as referring to a spacecraft experience: 
"And it came to pass, as they still went on, and talked, 
that, behold, there appeared a chariot of fire . . . and 
parted them both asunder; and Elijah went up by a 
whirlwind into heaven”. 

Others think that the first chapter of Ezekial refers to fly
ing saucers when it speaks of “a wheel in the middle of a 
wheel”. They regard this chapter as describing either a 
sighting or a contact with flying saucers made by the an
cient prophet over 2500 years ago. 

More interesting still was the fact that many students 
believe that the Master Jesus was a spaceman in the very 
highest sense of the word. That is, he came to earth from 
a higher frequency of life to live among men and help 
teach them the way back “home”. They believe when he 
spoke of “many mansions” he referred to the many inhabit
able planets and to life in outerspace. Like other advanced 
spacemen he was a master of energy, which means that he 
was a master of what we call matter, space and time, and 
he controlled the qualification of universal energy to pro
duce certain effects. 

When he turned water into wine, this was in keeping 
with his mastery over universal energy out of which all 
things are made. When he healed the sick he changed the 
discordant or misdirected qualification of life energy by 
the sick person, back into harmonious qualification. When 
he walked upon the water he employed a form of levitation. 
When he fed the multitude he employed the principle of 
precipitation. 

When he entered a ship as described in John 6, 21 "and 
immediately the ship was at the land whither they went”, 
he employed the cosmic principle of teleportation or in
stantaneous travel. When he passed through closed doors 
he "transcended” temporarily and then "emerged”, the 
same cosmic principle as is used by spaceships. In his 
ascension he raised the vibratory frequency of his body until 

 

241 

it entered a higher dimension of life above the range of 
awareness of our physical senses. 

These students also feel that the spaceships have come in 
accordance with biblical prophecy and that the "angels” 
and "heavenly host” of the Bible correspond to the space
beings. After a period of tribulation on earth which has 
already begun and a great housecleaning, they believe 
there will come a great millenial period when the meek — 
the peaceful souls who are obedient to the highest cosmic 
teachings — will indeed inherit the earth. In view of the 
necessity of our reconciling religion and science, we feel 
that these views are indeed noteworthy. 

HOW DO THE SPACEBEINGS 
VIEW OUR RELIGIONS? 

The answer should be obvious to independent thinkers. 
On the earth today there are approximately 280 different 
and distinct religious sects, each with its own view of truth, 
its own dogmas and its own "beliefs”. And how do these 
groups view one another? With tolerance and brotherly 
love? No. Most of them eye each other with superior con
tempt, each one claiming some superiority of knowledge, 
power or deific favor — or some exclusiveness or monopoly 
of truth or “salvation”. What a picture from the cosmic 
viewpoint of the great spacebeings is our failure in unity, 
charity and brotherhoodl “You believe my way and then 
weshall have unity and salvation” is the dictum of each 
individual group. It would be amusing, if it were not for 
the fanaticism, violence and tragedy behind this picture 
of religious intolerance, disunity, exclusiveness and super
stitition. 

They tell us that many great teachers have been sent to 
earth but that this civilization has never lived up to their 
teachings. For example the true teachings of the Master 
Jesus they state have never been taught to the people as a 
whole. They have, however, been known and taught in a 
few retreats in the world known only to certain advanced  

souls. These teachings combine science and religion and 
include mastery over energy and matter. They also point 
out that earth religions have as a whole failed to save man 
from his own destructive creations. During past ages earth 
religions have been responsible for some of the worst wars 
and greatest crimes in history. 

WHAT WE CAN LEARN FROM THE 
SPACEBEINGS. 

Open minded religionists and thinkers can learn a great 
deal from the spacebeings. For one thing they can be as
sured of the continuity of life and the cosmic fact that 
life is consciousness which never dies. There exists an im
portant relationship between consciousness and outerspace 
and between consciousness and energy or matter. Time 
also is a phenomenon of consciousness. Consciousness is 
superior to all, but it must have something to be conscious 
of. It therefore creates energy, and out of energy it forms 
“things” to be conscious of. This creative activity of con
sciousness takes place in an eternal "now” and an eternal 
"here” which in threedimensional life appear to be "time” 
and "place”. 

Man is a creator on every plane of consciousness. Our 
failure to recognize this cosmic truth is little less than ap
palling. Every thought and every feeling of man right here 
on earth creates an activity in space. What we call “nature” 
gives back to man his own creations. As we sow so shall we 
reap. This is the cosmic law of cause and effect, and it has 
tremendous cumulative effects throughout cycles of time. 
In the higher life of the spacebeings they do not permit 
themselves to think or feel anything which is discordant 
because they know it will manifest as reality or experience. 
They are masters because they control consciousness. On 
earth we have both individually and collectively lost con
trol of our thoughts and our feelings, and thus we constantly 
create the discord in which we live without realizing that we 
are the creators of it. This is a bitter pill for the human 

mind, but we now face the cumulative effect of centuries of 
destructive human thoughts and feelings. We are beyond 
human help and that is why millions of spacebeings have 
gathered to help us. 

Consciousness operates in many octaves of vibratory fre
quency, and physical life represents a blackout of conscious
ness — a narrowing of awareness and memory to threedi
mensional life only. The way out of physical life back into 
the higher dimensions is through a wakingup process or a 
release of the fixation or hypnoticstate which earth life 
represents. The spacebeings will assist those who long for 
such release in this new age. Thus their coming is recog
nized as a thing of joy and salvation by those who desire to 
progress on a cosmic scale. 

METAPHYSICS AND COSMIC TRUTH.

As we see it the development of modern metaphysics is 
supported by the spacebeings as a great step upward to
ward cosmic truth. It represents a noteworthy bridging of 
the gap between science and religion, a gap which for cen
turies has been the difficulty with many orthodox religions. 
In many respects the scientists of today seem nearer to cos
mic truth than the orthodox religionist. The trouble with 
the scientists is that many of them are out of balance, and 
their progress in cosmic love and wisdom lags far behind 
their growing mastery of matter. 

All the modern religious teachings which emphasize the 
Science of Religion or the “I am that I am” or the “Self
relization” of the dominion of individual consciousness over 
external circumstances are a great step forward out of the 
limitations of orthodoxy. Numerous individuals are learn
ing to heal sickness, poverty and all manner of inharmony 
through the teachings of metaphysics. 

It is also encouraging to note that here and there some 
orthodox teachings are beginning to sound like beginner’s 
lessons in metaphysics. The modern interest in psychology 
and parapsychology is also encouraging. But true psychology
 becomes metaphysics, and metaphysics must enlarge its 
concepts and take in parapsychology and the hidden truths 
of the Eastern seers and of the spacebeings before it becomes 
cosmic. Metaphysics has accomplished a great deal, but 
where is the metaphysician who has reached an understand
ing of the relationship of consciousness to energy, or the 
cosmic truth that life’s manifestations occur in octaves of 
vibratory frequencies? 

HIDDEN GEMS IN EASTERN TEACHINGS.

From our analysis, the teachings of the spacebeings ap
pear to support many of the principles taught in oriental 
philosophies by seers of the Far East. Unfortunately these 
hidden gems of cosmic truth are little known or under
stood in our Western civilizations. The spacebeings also 
support the original teachings of all the great masters but 
state that most of them have been so watered down by man 
that they are hardly recognizable. 

Western religionists are forever trying to get hold of 
“absolute truths” and to reduce infinite life to a few dog
matic statements of truth. In the Oriental philosophies 
the relative nature of most truths is far better understood. 
Most truths are relative due to the fact that “as a man 
thinketh, so is he.” To put it another way, that which an 
individual accepts as “absolute” reality at any given period 
of his progress — that which he accepts as true — is reality 
to him at that time. It is not necessarily reality to another. 
Each individual makes his own “reality” at any given peri
od by his thoughts and feelings, thus proving the funda
mental truth that man, individual consciousness, is a cre
ator — the creator of his own individual world consisting 
of what he is conscious of. If he is only conscious of limita
tions and discord, these qualities externalize themselves 
as his life’s reality or experience. If he is conscious of har
mony, beauty and abundance, these qualities become his ex
perience. If he is only conscious of threedimensional life, 
he is what we call a human being. If his consciousness is 

expanded to include life in higher frequencies — higher 
planes of consciousness — he becomes a “spaceman” to the 
exact extent of that expansion of consciousness. In other 
words he is less limited in his consciousness of total exist
ence. Our failure to understand this relationship of con
sciousness to reality is a potent factor in keeping us earth
bound. 

In certain Oriental teachings, what we in the West love 
to call “reality” they call a “dream”, or an “illusion” or 
“maya”. While this concept in general simply flabbergasts 
the Western mind, nevertheless when once understood it 
is logical, illuminating and helpful. It is a recognition 
which Western culture would do well to note, that con
sciousness produces its own “reality” — but it is not a fixed 
reality because the producing or accepting consciousness, if 
it understands this principle, can change this “reality” or 
outward experience at any time by a certain inward ac
tion of controlled thought and feeling. This is the mastery 
of outerexperience which we have lost and must regain if 
we wish to progress beyond the limitations of physical life. 

The understanding of the Oriental term “dream” for 
outward reality or circumstance or experience and the 
term “dreamer” for the individual consciousness is a definite 
step toward the regaining of our mastery of life. Mastery 
is the inward control of outer experience — mental manip
ulation of what we call energy or matter — in the attain
ment of which many of our spacebrothers are far in ad
vance of us. However, they assure us that in time we will 
regain our lost powers along this line. We have temporarily 
forgotten that we are the “dreamer” and not the “dream”. 
We have forgotten how to “wakeup” out of the limiting 
dream of threedimensional life. We are calling atten
tion to this principle because of its importance. To under
stand once again the relationship of consciousness to reality 
and experience and to regain control of consciousness is to 
grasp the very keys to freedom. I am the dreamer. I am 
never the dream. I control the dream! Such concepts are 

the highway back to attainment. This is the very basis of 
the greater mastery and greater fredeom of our brothers 
and sisters in outerspace. 

JUSTIFICATION.

Does all this mean that those sincere religionists who are 
filled with reverence, worship, faith and hope will not 
find justification because they know nothing beyond the 
limited teachings of a certain creed or group to which 
they belong? No, indeed. We do not think this at all. Every 
bit of reverence, faith and hope, every upward or unselfish 
desire or longing, every reaching out for the perfection, 
happiness and beauty of life will certainly find its own jus
tification. 

In the larger view all paths lead up the mountain. Some 
choose the high road and some the low road. Some even 
choose the black path of error and the long and painful 
evolution of resistance to cosmic truth. But all of us came 
from the “Light”, and return to it we must — sometime, 
somehow. 

There is a cosmic law of justice always and forever in 
operation. The seeds sown in consciousness today produce 
the reality of tomorrow for each and every one of us in
dividually. Salvation is always an individual matter. Even 
salvation on the most narrow, intolerant and exclusive basis 
will be justified. But while the individual who has pro
jected exclusive salvation for himself or his group while 
denying it to others is reaping his narrow reward, it is 
very possible that the “outcast” will be reaping a greater 
reward because the outcast may have had a broader view 
of salvation and of universal brotherhood. Some day all 
the sons of God” will learn that “all that I have is thine” 
— all that the One Great Consciousness has created belongs 
to all individual consciousness everywhere. 

A SUBSTITUTE FOR WAR.

This particular earth civilization is a destructive civilization 
which glories in killing enemies. It started back cen
times ago when some ancestor of ours picked up a stone 
and killed his enemy. He thought that killing was a positive 
method of disposing of his enemy. Even so today many of 
our most “civilized” and "intelligent” earthmen believe 
that killing enemies is a normal and natural way of dis
posing of them for good and all. But what actually hap
pened to our primitive ancestor? His enemy did not die 
because there is literally no such thing as death. Only that 
part of his enemy which was visible to the human senses 
disappeared temporarily. The enemy went temporarily 
into another dimension of life, possibly with hatred and 
revenge engraved on his indestructible consciousness. This 
very hatred brought him quickly back to earth through 
cosmic reembodiment, and he went forth to even the score 
— to kill some enemies himself. The stone in time became 
a club, a spear, a catapult, a cannon, T.N.T., a bomb and 
now an atombomb or guided missile. That is the pat
tern of this round of civilization — caught in the hypnotic 
spell of killing enemies as the only safe and sane method 
of defense, of disposing of one’s enemies. In the last 3600 
years we understand there have been 14,000 wars on earth! 
Man always manages to find a rationalization and a justifi
cation for all of his violations of cosmic harmony. 

Killing enemies has been and still is the ruling mania, 
the outstanding psychosis of this round of earth “civiliza
tion”. Bigger and better killing methods, for defense of 
course, is the goal and the preoccupation of this civilization. 
Does anyone doubt this? Let us consider the financial em
phasis on killing alone. To this effort to “kill enemies first 
before they kill you” many nations are allocating over half 
of their tax income. Today when we consider what the 
nations of the earth are spending for killing potential 
enemies we have quite a picture of a civilization that is out 
of balance. We are not criticising any human action by any 
nation. We are presenting the cosmic picture which our 
civilization presents to the spacebeings who have not 

known war for thousands, yes even millions of years. They 
calmly tell us we are the only planet left in our entire solar 
system which has not discovered a substitute for war. 

What we need is psychoanalysis and psychiatric treat
ment on a cosmic scale. We are slow learners and time is 
running out on this civilization. After centuries of oppor
tunity we still do not understand the cosmic law of cause 
and effect. We do not even understand basic metaphysics. 
Which came first an enemy or the mental concept of a 
brother as an enemy? In the correct cosmic answer to this 
question lies the key to our escape from annihilation at the 
hands of our own destructive creations. For centuries we 
have been creating “enemies” in two dimensions of life by 
our attention, our thoughts, our feelings and our acts. 
Will we never learn that we are creators! Until we learn 
the cosmic secret of stopping this vicious chainreaction at 
its source — in the realm of our thoughts, our concepts 
and our feelings — we shall never escape our enemies or the 
necessity of killing them before they kill us. 

Destruction breeds destruction. We experience that which 
we create. Creating destruction eventually enfolds the 
creator in his own destructive creation. Now we on earth 
are at the crossroads. The inevitable consequences of our 
throwing the weight of our creative abilities into destruc
tion for centuries past has finally reached its inevitable cli
max. This civilization has achieved its goal of magnificent 
destruction, a destruction so perfect, so complete, that its 
usage will destroy the user. What else, in the name of cosmic 
law did we expect? 

Does this mean that the democracies of the world, which 
despite all their faults are nevertheless supporting the fun
damentally correct cosmic idea of individual liberty, should 
suddenly lay down their arms, and open themselves to 
extermination by the antidemocratic forces of the earth? 
Certainly not! That would not be intelligent action eith
er from a human or a cosmic viewpoint. But it does mean 
that all mankind everywhere must sincerely seek and must 

 
find and utilize a substitute for killing enemies before 
our own destructive tendencies wipe us all from the 
surface of the planet. This is not something impossible to 
find because our elder brothers found it ages ago. If we 
had devoted ten percent of the attention and effort which 
we have spent on destruction to sincerely seeking a sub
stitute for war and using it, we would not be in our present 
predicament. 

We have been looking high and low for destructive ener
gy, destructive radiations. Why do we not look high and 
low for constructive radiations and put them to use. For 
every action there is a reaction. We know this. Thus 
the very destructiveness of atomic radiation points to the 
existence of an equally powerful constructive radiation. 
This constructive radiation is in existence, but we must re
discover it and put it to use ourselves. There is a cosmic 
radiation or ray which, acting as a powerful cosmic cata
lyst, actually makes possible the harmonizing of the most 
antagonistic activities of man. It actually nullifies hatreds 
and antagonisms. It takes away even the desire to be 
destructive. It turns enemies into brothers. Every great 
master or teacher knows of it. So do our spacebrothers. We 
must seek this radiation more diligently than we have the 
atom bomb. We must find it and put it to use quickly be
fore it is too late. 

CHAPTER XXX.

PROPHECIES AND FLYING SAUCERS.

P art of the saucer interest we found was in connection 
with prophecies and the desire to know the future of 
this earth and the relation of the spacebeings to fu
ture events. In order to understand this phase of saucer 
interest, we spent considerable time acquainting ourselves 
with various prophetic writings. We studied the Bible pro
phecies, the Pyramid, the Nostradamus prophecies and 
many religious prophecies and other ancient and modern 
prophecies of both individuals and groups, including some 
received by O.S.C. 

Some of these prophecies referred specifically to the 
coming of the spacepeople. Others were of a more 
general nature and referred more to great changes coming 
to the earth and to a great new age. Nevertheless many 
saucer students are vitally interested in prophetic messages 
both modern and ancient. 

One thing impressed us tremendously. We actually 
found people who were terribly frightened by certain pro
phecies. Also we found some who were actually trying to 
run away from destruction or from the localities which 
they believed were destined for destruction in accordance 
with various prophecies. These people were not ignorant 
or uneducated human beings. Far from it. Some of them 
were highly educated individuals. We also found a few 
scared people who were building retreats not because they 
were influenced by prophecies but because of their fear 
of the atom bomb, but that is another story. 

Regarding the people who were running away from 
potential cataclysms, most of them wanted to get away from 
big cities and from geographical faultlines and from low 
areas because of their fear of earthquakes and floods. This 
seemed to us to be an appalling situation. In the name of 
reason and common sense, what we asked ourselves — was 

 the answer to all this fear and running away? What repre
sented a constructive, worthwhile and helpful answer or 
even a good working philosophy regarding these prophecies 
and the fear they engendered. We hope that the following 
remarks may be of practical help to some of our readers, 
particularly those who may be suffering from such fears. 
We shall try to present the best and most constructive ap
proach which we were able to find on this matter of prophe
cies and disasters. 

END OF THE WORLD PROPHECIES.

The coming of the saucers has revived many ancient pro
phecies that the end of the world is at hand and has also 
spawned many new dire predictions along this line. We 
are now referring to those prophecies which declare the im
minent destruction of the planet earth itself. 

We have discovered an interesting way of dealing with 
fearful prophecies which we would like to pass on to our 
readers. It is this: The more frightening and horrible a 
prophecy is, the more we insist on knowing all the harrow
ing details. Do not be afraid of the bloodcurdling details. 
View them with detachment. Pin the prophet down. Let 
him talk. Never let him get away with indefinite predictions 
or vague forebodings. Insist on specific facts, events and 
dates. Get the boundaries of the prophecy. Put a frame 
around it. Classify it. Every prophecy has its limitations 
and every false prophet sooner or later runs out of windl 
Try this sometime. It is a sure defense against becoming 
the victim of a fearful prophecy. Remember no prophecy 
can hurt you unless you permit yourself to fear it. 

From this point of view let us take a good straight look 
at the "end of the world” prophecies. The first thing to 
note is that there is nothing new about such prophecies. 
Religious groups and individuals have been foretelling the 
end of the world for many centuries. Recently the advent 
of saucers has simply given them a new peg on which to 
hang their predictions and a new means of gaining public 

attention and unhappy converts. Every so often all through 
different generations, certain groups have declared the end 
of the world on a certain date, sold all their earthly pos
sessions, dressed in white robes and cheerfully — usually 
with hymn singing — awaited the end of the world which 
never came. It was a little embarrassing for a while, and 
some followers deserted these groups because they had been 
misled by them. 

However, after a lull such groups start up all over again 
because as P. T. Barnum used to remark: "There is one 
born every minute!'' Belief is a strange thing, but let us 
remember that we individually always have something to 
say about what we believe. If we accept this sort of thing 
and fear it, then the prophet has us in his power. We must 
then be prepared to bear the consequences of our acceptance 
and belief and to live with the fears which go with it. 

The reader is entitled to believe anything he wishes, but 
may we state categorically that everything we learned in 
our saucer research indicates that this planet is going to 
remain a planet for many billions of years. Hence no one 
need be concerned about its end at all. A planet is a 
schoolroom from the viewpoint of the spacebeings who are 
the Guardians of planets, and this particular planet is so 
needed to teach mankind certain lessons that it will be 
preserved at all costs, even if spaceship intervention be
comes necessary. The spacebeings are not a threat to 
this planet but an assurance that man himself will not poi
son it beyond redemption. 

END OF MAN ON EARTH PROPHECIES 

Now let us look at prophecies concerning the total des
truction of man from this planet. This is an entirely dif
ferent matter from the destruction of the planet itself. 
The latter will not take place. At least we have convinced 
ourselves of this. The former depends entirely upon man 
himself. It is man’s privilege if he wishes, to destroy himself 
physically from the earth. If he chooses this course, he will 

in time return again and again until he finally learns the 
lesson of the uselessness of destruction. Man’s destruction 
of himself from the earth is a possibility. A general atomic 
war is all that is needed to accomplish this in a hurry. If 
man decides on this course, there is no point in trying to 
run away from this destruction. There is no place in which 
to hide from atomic radiation. It cannot be confined to 
any locality. It will spread around the earth and desolate 
it until it is like the Sahara Desert. Water, food, vegetation, 
rocks, soil, the entire good earth and its atmosphere will 
vibrate to radiations which the human body simply can
not withstand. 

So why try to run away from our homes, our friends, 
our jobs — on this score? The place we run to will be 
equally uninhabitable. It all depends on man. It can 
happen quickly or it can happen slowly by the slow poi
soning of the earth by our scientists who insist they know 
everything, although the space messages say they do not. 
If we do not like this picture, it is up to us to do some
thing about it. We must impose restraints upon ourselves, 
upon all nations and upon the scientists, and we must find 
a substitute for this kind of defense. In our research we 
have found no other answer. 

Man after years of destruction has reached the cross
roads of his earthly existence. However, there is much 
hope. In the last few years we have avoided a world
wide atomic war. Few realize how near we came to it, 
but tensions are easing as this is being written. Let us hope 
that this condition will continue, but the danger of slow 
poisoning still remains. The fulfillment or negation of 
the prophecy that man will destroy himself from the earth 
depends upon man himself. Let us hope that earthman 
will wakeup in time to the realization that the cosmic ul
imate of destruction is selfdestruction and that the only 
salvation is selfimposed control and restraint. 

254. 

 

THE REMNANT PROPHECIES. 

We found some very ancient and highly respected proph
ecies which we call the "remnant prophecies”. They go 
something like this: "Man will be destroyed from the 
face of the earth but a remnant will be saved, and out of 
this remnant will come the future inhabitants of the planet 
in a New Age.” 

If one studies the ancient civilizations of Atlantis and Le
muria, it appears that some such occurrence may have taken 
place in the past. So far as we are concerned, if man elects 
to try world suicide it may occur again. We have no objec
tion to the idea of a remnant being saved, none whatever. 
In fact it seems to us to be a very nice conceptl 

What irked us just a bit about these phophecies was the 
size of the remnant and the obvious scramble for the seats 
of salvation. One such prophecy mentions the figure of 
144,000. Whether this be interpreted literally or figurative
ly might make quite a difference to the other 2,399,856,000 
people left out in the cold, assuming an earth population of 
2.4 billion. 

Nevertheless we did run across some groups which took 
this matter most literally and most seriously. While we 
certainly do not wish to interfere with anyone’s sincere or 
sacred beliefs, we were just a bit interested to observe that 
this slightly limited plan of salvation invariably included 
the members of the group — shall we say on the right side 
of the ledger. Also it was intriguing to learn that several 
such groups in different countries, unknown to each other, 
have each already practically filled the quota! Somehow or 
other the fact that we ourselves did not have reserved seats 
in these groups did not seem to worry us. But we did re
joice that there were others who were fortunate enough to 
be among the chosen few! 

STORMS, FLOODS AND EARTHQUAKES.

It may surprise our readers to learn that the consensus 
of opinion among the saucer students was that we will have 

storms, floods and earthquakes in the years and decades 
ahead on an unprecedented scale. We are experiencing 
some of these right now. One basic cause is the new radia
tion into which the earth has moved. This causes an ac
celerated melting of the polar ice caps and gives us an 
“Aquarian” or “Water” Age. 

Another basic cause of cataclysmic disturbances is vio
lent acts of what man calls “Nature” or “Acts of God . 
However, we have learned that from a cosmic viewpoint 
while these appear to man to be acts of Nature, they are 
actually and basically manproduced disturbances which 
come about through a sort of reflex of Nature. On more 
advanced planets man has learned how to control the 
weather and “Nature” by harmonious thoughts, feelings 
and peaceful mental activities. 

On our planet, however, man for centuries has permitted 
himself to project unrestrained thoughts into the atmos
phere and to express uncontrolled feelings of irritation, 
hatred, jealousy, inharmony, violence and destruction. Man 
is a creator and always has been, and his every thought and 
feeling qualifies the energy which flows through him. This 
destructively qualified energy of man has for centuries flow
ed out into the energy surrounding man and the earth and 
into the energy out of which the planet and its atmosphere 
is formed. This outflowing has created stresslines and 
tensions in what we call Nature or the Elements. This 
process of miscreation has a longrange cumulative effect 
of which earthman is ignorant. 

In many a message, the great spacebeings have pointed 
out that Nature always gives back to man, through long
time cycles, his own creations. These inharmonious and 
destructive thought creations of man are now in the process 
of returning to him in the form of violent storms, floods, 
and earthquakes. He has no one to blame for this but him
self and his ignorance of cosmic law. For centuries man 
has been “asking for it”. We are now entering a new age, 
and this phenomenon is a part of this new cycle. The 

chickens are coming home to roost. These things will take 
place, and they will take their toll. This is part of the 
housecleaning process which initiates a new age. In these 
events Nature knows its own, and salvation as always is an 
individual and a spiritual matter — a matter of our in
dividual attunement to the harmony of Life. There is no 
such thing as cosmic injustice. 

IS THE BED OF THE PACIFIC OCEAN RISING? 

Yes. We understand that this is true. The bed of the 
Pacific Ocean is now in the process of rising to form the 
New Age Continent and so also are portions of the floor 
of the Atlantic. There will be vast changes in the geography 
of the earth. If this seems utterly fantastic to some, it is 
only because most of us live in abject ignorance of long
range cosmic activities. They are not things of common 
knowledge because they require a cosmic perspective which 
few people make the effort to acquire. Most of us are 
only interested in cycles of a few years’ duration. Few in
deed are trained to think in terms of periods of a hundred 
thousand years or of a million years. 

Does this rising of the ocean floors represent a frighten
ing event, a terrible impending catastrophe for mankind? 
No, it does not for three cosmic reasons. First, it is a very 
slow operation, and it will take decades to complete. Sec
ond, it is a controlled operation under the supervision of 
the planetary Guardians. Finally, it is a cosmically bene
ficent activity. It is part of a longtime cycle of purifica
tion which is common to planets or cosmic schoolrooms. 

As previously pointed out, the earth is not a dead thing 
of lifeless rocks and minerals as most of us assume it is. It 
is a living unit of cosmic evolution with a destiny of its 
own. Through long term cycles, dry lands become oceans 
and oceans become dry lands. After thousands of years un
der salt water the lands are thus purified for further habi
tation. The schoolroom is thus renovated and made ready 
for new pupils. There is no point in becoming disturbed 

 
by these longtime changes. They are controlled in the 
best interests of the planets and their inhabitants. 

IS THIS CIVILIZATION ENDING? 

Yes, we understand this civilization is ending — dying if 
you wish — but the ending or dying of a civilization is not 
a matter of the sudden death of all the inhabitants of a 
planet. The ending of a civilization means the ending of 
the ways in which a civilization acts — its manner of doing 
things, its customs, institutions and modes of living. In 
this sense, this civilization is dying. We are going into a new 
age, and the way we do things, our mode of life will be 
different and better. 

One process by which this is occurring is by the normal 
life and death cycle with which we are all familiar. Every
day some people pass on, and new babies are born. The 
point is that in the new age, the quality of the babies will 
be much higher. The unprogressive people, those who re
sist progress and higher development, are passing on and 
new age souls are coming into birth to possess the planet. 
Some saucerers estimate that there are already about ten 
million new age souls here on earth by the birth processs, 
and the number is daily increasing. Another phase of this 
process is the great influx of higher and finer ideas and 
ideals. Man’s thoughts, concepts and mental processes are 
undergoing great improvement. The old order along with 
many of its shortcomings in every branch of life, is dying 
and new age souls motivated by higher ideals and capable 
of making a much finer civilization on earth are flooding in. 

PROPHECIES IN GENERAL.

We feel it is very unfortunate indeed if people permit 
themselves to become upset or frightened by fearful proph
ecies in connection with the coming of the spaceships. Un
doubtedly there is some great cosmic event in the offing, and 
various concepts of this are presented in the last chapter. 
But the problem is not the spacepeople. They will do 
their part in helping us. The problem is mankind and what 

man will do in the decades ahead. There are many false 
prophets in evidence these days, and many are being de
ceived by them. Fear is a terrible thing in itself and must 
be avoided. We hope that the following fact may help al
lay fear due to certain prophecies. Over seventy percent 
of the fearful prophecies which we studied and which in
corporated definite dates for great catastrophes have not 
come true, and some of these were from what many people 
consider the most authentic and reliable of sourcesl Why 
fear prophecies of destruction? If great emergencies arise 
let us meet them when and if they transpire. Let us keep 
calm. Let us remember the saying, “The only thing to fear 
is fear itself 1 ” This is no idle point. If millions of earth
men start focusing their attention, their thoughts and feel
ings upon fearful disasters, they will put into effect cosmic 
forces which will tend to bring them about. 

Regarding our advanced brothers and sisters in the 
spaceships, once we understand that they are coming in 
love and brotherhood to help us avoid mistakes and to 
help usher us into a great new age, this should not be a 
cause of fear but of great rejoicing. Not all of the prophecies 
of the future are dire and foreboding. Many of them refer 
to a glorious new age in which the finest hopes and longings 
of mankind shall be fulfilled. We are now witnessing the 
start of this great age. Why not dwell on these things? And 
whatever events take shape in the future, the presence of 
our elder brothers in the spaceships is a constant reminder 
to us that we are never alone, and that help on high — even 
on a cosmic scale — awaits us if we need it. What an in
teresting and glorious time to be alive upon this earth! 

CHAPTER XXXI.
THE GOLDEN AGE.

on our pilgrimage we were amazed to find widespread 

reference to a great “New Age”. Everywhere we 

found people in all walks of life talking about the 
“New Age”. Among the humble and inarticulate it took 
the form of a feeling rather than words, a feeling of great 
expectancy — an expectancy of mighty changes ahead in 
the world. Among the articulate, it took on more definite 
forms of expression extending into scientific, philosophical, 
religious and prophetic concepts. The flying saucer fraternity is alive with enthusiasm for new age concepts. 

What is the meaning of it all — this widespread feeling, 
belief and even conviction of a mighty new era into which 
our earth is heading? What unseen forces of intuition, in
spiration and spontaneous knowledge are at work prepar
ing mankind everywhere for coming changes on a cosmic 
scale? The situation fascinated us. We have studied it from 
every possible angle in order to educate ourselves on what 
is going on. In the paragraphs which follow we shall try 
briefly to share with our readers a sort of composite word 
picture of this New Age which we have found dawning in 
the minds and hearts of mankind everywhere we have gone. 
Our picture has been pieced together from so many sources, 
from both individuals and groups, that it would be im
practical to pinpoint all the sources or segregate their in
dividual contributions. Let us now look at some of the de
tails of this composite picture of the great "New Age” on 
earth. 

Is there such a thing as a New Age? Definitely yes! Man’s 
view of life on earth is limited to spans of a few decades. 
His knowledge of history only goes back a few thousands of 
years at most. From a cosmic viewpoint, however, life exists 
in vast cycles of what man calls “time”. Everything in life 
goes through cycles of existence, even planets, suns, solar sys

260 

 

terns and galaxies — but some of these cycles extend into 
thousands and millions of years of time as we know it. Every
thing has a cosmic destiny, a birth, an evolution, a passing 
and a rebirth, and these events occur in great cosmic cycles. 

A New Age, or a Golden Age as it is often called on this 
planet, is a recurring event, a cycle of some thousands 
of earth years. During a Golden Age the planet itself and 
all of the life it supports go through an accelerated period 
of cosmic progress, a definite stepup in physical, mental 
and spiritual evolvement. 

A Golden Age is a tremendous thing. It represents chang
es in every phase of planetary existence. A planet is not a 
dead “thing”, as we have said before. It is a living body 
with an evolving life of its own, and during a Golden Age 
it undergoes vast changes. Every form of mineral, animal, 
vegetable and human life upon it also goes through vast 
changes. Thus a planetary Golden Age has many inter
woven aspects, phases and ramifications. 

Many synonyms are now in use to refer to this particular 
New Age and they represent the various aspects or phases. 
Examples of these synonyms and what we have learned 
about a few of them are as follows: 

NEW AGE SYNONYMS. 

1. The New Age, 

2. The New Era,

3. The Atomic Age, 

4. The Aquarian Age 
or Water Age, 

5. Pisces to Aquarius, 

6. The Cosmic Age, 

7. Entering a Higher,
Vibration.

8. Entering a Higher 
Radiation. 

9. Higher Frequency. 

We have already entered. 

10. Entering a New 
Density.

11. A New Dimension of 
Time. 

12. The Golden Age. 

13. The Mental Age.

14. The Spiritual Age. 

15. A Higher Plane Of 
Consciousness. 

16. The Age Of Progress. 

17. The Age Of Glory. 

18. The Millennium. 

this New Age. We are now in 
it. When did it start? From one prophetic point of view, 
it started on August 23, 1953, the date assigned by certain 
Pyramidologists to the grand corridor in the Great Pyramid 
of Egypt when it comes to a dead end against a blank wall. 
Since the New Age is synonymous with the Atomic Age, 
another date may be taken as that of the Hiroshima Bomb 
event on August 6, 1945, which was irrefutable evidence to 
the entire universe that earth man had entered the “Atomic 
Age” — for better or for worse. How long will this Golden 
Age last? The best replies seem to indicate that it will last 
from 800 to 1,000 years. The latter figure corresponds to 
the "millennium” of the Christian Bible. In fact the word 
“millennium” literally means a thousand year period. 

THE ATOMIC AGE. 

The synonym Atomic Age refers primarily to the scien
tific and physical aspects of the New Age. But to regard 
scientific changes and progress as the entirety of the char
acteristics of the New Age is to underestimate the vastness 
and far reaching nature of impending events. Even as re
gards this scientific aspect, we entered the Atomic Age 
“backwards” so to speak. In other words, we have devel
oped this advanced scientific knowledge on a destructive 
note rather than on a constructive note. At the present 
time, however, as this book is being written, there are many 
encouraging indications of man’s turning to the construc
tive usages of this knowledge. 

Even though we pride ourselves greatly on this new found 
scientific knowledge, there is very little to justify such 
pride. In the first place it is only a rediscovery of what was 
known by man on this earth thousands of years ago. Sec
ondly, our present state of unbalanced knowledge — our 
lack of wisdom in relation to our new scientific achieve
ments — is a threat to all present life on this planet: min
eral, vegetable, animal and human life alike. 

If we do not heed the warnings of our spacebrothers we 
may turn the first part of the “Golden Age” into an age 

of destruction. This can come about through the quick 
suicide of an all out atomic war, or through slow poisoning 
of our land, water, and atmosphere and our food sources 
by atomic experiments and “peacetime” uses of atomic ener
gy in the form we have developed it. In the near future 
mankind all around the world will have to make up its 
mind if it is going to trust the bland assertions of the govern
ments and scientists now in control of atomic energy as to 
the harmlessness of its use in experiments and conven
tional war weapons and war games and in peaceful uses. 
Or is mankind everywhere going to wake up in time and 
respect and heed the warnings of the spacebeings whose 
experience, perspective and wisdom far exceed our own. 
Every such warning which we have investigated indicates 
that we have not even learned how to dispose harmlessly 
of atomic waste from our bomb manufacture and that we 
should seek other and less destructive energy differentials 
for peacetime uses. 

It is also more and more evident that our present scien
tific progress toward man’s mastery over matter is only one 
step toward the ultimate goal, in which man is wisdom and 
love regains his direct mental control over universal energy 
or matter and will not misuse this power. This should be 
our real goal rather than that of more and more destructive 
atomic energy. If mankind can wake up in time and stop 
his concentration on the development of destructive energy 
this will give us the opportunity we so badly need to search 
for and develop new and harmless types of universal energy 
which will do everything for us and more than can be ex
pected from the destructive variety. 

In this constructive manner man could go into the Golden 
Age with far greater scientific assistance from the spacebe
ings than would otherwise be possible. Our destructive ten
dencies are the main reasons which prevent us from receiv
ing swift scientific help directly from these advanced be
ings in outerspace. At present we cannot be trusted with 
more knowledge. A Golden Age is not “Golden” to man 

without his cooperation. 

THE COSMIC AGE.

The synonym Cosmic Age concerns the astronomical or 
cosmic aspects of the New Age. A New Age has an astro
nomical or cosmic phase which coincides with a longterm 
cosmic cycle. For thousands of years our entire solarsys
tem has been speeding through “space” at more than 166,
000 miles per hour. A body cannot move at this pace for 
thousands of years and not “get some place” even in the 
vastness of outerspace. We are now “getting someplace”, 
we are arriving. We are arriving at a new location in the 
heavens which puts us and our entire solar system under 
the radiation of an enormous sun. In fact the synonym 
“Golden Age” comes from the concept of the golden radia
tion of this great sun. Likewise the concepts of our entering a higher “vibration” or higher “frequency” come from 
this new proximity of this great sun and its radiation. It 
is well recognized by many scientific minds that all plane
tary life directly and indirectly depends upon the nature 
of the energy radiating from the planetary sun. In this 
case, both our planetary sun and all its planets will fall 
under this new radiation. Since this radiation is at a dif
ferent frequency and has a different character than our 
sunlight, it will affect our entire planet and all life upon 
it. It will affect man physically, mentally, and spiritually. 
This is the astronomical or cosmic aspect of the New Age. 
(See chapter 27 "The earth as a spaceship”). 

THE HOUSECLEANING STAGE. 

Many individuals looking upon the distressing things 
to be seen on the earth in our present day li c e exclaim: “I 
do not see anything very rosy or golden about this age. In 
fact the world seems to be in a terrible messl” “Well”, 
reply the students of such things, "that may be so, but this 
new age will last for almost one thousand years, and what 
you are now seeing is only the start of it. The first part is 

the housecleaning stage, and even this stage may last for 
a few centuries.” 

The housecleaning phase, they explain, takes place in 
many ways, some obvious and some not so obvious. The 
single greatest factor in cosmic housecleaning comes about 
through the natural birth and death processes referred to 
in the previous chapter. Few people on this earth at pres
ent live to be more than 70 years of age. If there were no 
incoming souls for the next 70 years, the present breed of 
mankind now upon the earth the type of mankind which 
for centuries has been responsible for the world’s discords 
and inharmonies — this breed would be practically elimi
nated. In this New Age, however, births will not stop, but 
as previously stated the quality of the souls being born into 
the world will be greatly improved as a whole. There will 
of course be individual exceptions, but as a whole they are 
and will be “New Age” souls born with what it takes phys
ically, mentally and spiritually to do their part in produc
ing the Golden Age. They will not have the resistance which 
their parents manifest toward that which is new, contrac
tive, progressive, beautiful and spiritual. Space ships, space
travel, spacebrothers, and the brotherhood of man will be 

as much of a norm to them as war and destructive atom 
bombs are to us. 

This, however, is not the only factor in the cosmic house
cleaning now in progress. The increasing vibratory fre
quencies of the new radiation coming to earth and its sever
ity will just naturally take its toll of those who cannot adapt 
themselves to it. It may be compared somewhat to going 
into a higher altitude only in this case the altitude is 
higher both physically, mentally and spiritually. The new 
vibration will have the effect of intensifying whatever qual
ities an individual has developed. If one is inclined to an
ger or violence, he will find himself manifesting more 
anger and more violence. If one is dishonest, he will appear 
still more dishonest. If one is kind and loving, he will just 
naturally manifest greater kindness and more love. It will 

thus be increasingly difficult to conceal anything. A “guilt 
complex” or a guilty conscience will be such a liability that 
those who are afflicted with it will have to get rid of it if 
they wish to survive in the New Age. In fact the new radia
tion acts as a natural segregator or “judgment day”. Only 
those who have attained a certain evolvement of construc
tiveness, harmony and attunement with life will be able to 
stand the new “altitude”. The others will eliminate them
selves from the planet as it will simply be the wrong school 
for them. 

There is still another form of housecleaning at the start 
of a Golden Age which comes about through storms, floods, 
earthquakes and changes in the earth’s surface. We have 
never yet talked to any advanced soul who did not agree that 
the start of the Golden Age would have its share of these 
things. But that should be of no concern to the constructive 
minded or to those who have learned that “salvation” is al
ways individual and spiritual. 

THE GOLDEN AGE.

This synonym for the New Age applies more to the later 
stages of the “millennium” than to the initial or houseclean
ing stages. It is called “Golden” because of the purifying 
and elevating effect of the new radiation — and it envisions 
the time when the Gold of Divine Love shall so permeate 
men’s souls that human brotherhood will become a spiritual 
actuality on the earth. 

One interesting point to note is this. During the Golden 
Age our planet, as a schoolroom, itself goes through a cosmic 
"upgrading.” For centuries it has been a type of kinder
garten or gradeschool for slow developing, backward and 
even delinquent children. As the New Age progresses, the 
backward students will be removed and the incoming pro
gressive spirits will have their own era. The world will be
come more of a highschool or university for these more ad
vanced souls. The laggards will no longer interfere so ef
fectively with the progressive pupils. The backward souls 

will be removed to less progressive schools or planets. Thus 
all will be taken care of as they deserve. In the last analy
sis each individual sets his own pattern of cosmic evolution. 
Some choose the high road and some the long, arduous and 
difficult road of continuous resistance to cosmic truth and 
law. 

During the Golden Age all branches of human knowledge 
will undergo vast changes for the better. The idea of 
brotherhood will be the keynote. There has always been 
plenty on earth for all, but this time it will be made avail
able to all. Mankind itself will recognize the planet as a 
unit. Government, industry, education, science, religion and 
the arts will all be directed toward the welfare of all man
kind as a whole. Killing enemies will no longer be necessary 
because there will be no enemies. War will cease. This age 
will also mark the end of the cosmic isolationism in which 
the earth has lived for many centuries. We will be given a 
part in the cosmic councils of our solar system. Free com
munications, commerce and intercourse with other planets 
will become commonplace. 

Because of the purified motives of mankind, great help 
will literally pour down upon us "from on high” — that 
is from the spacepeople. Man will walk with "Gods” 
that is with our more evolved brothers from outerspace. 
They work mostly through radiations and qualifications of 
energy rays. They will help “beam” such goodness to the 
earth that it will be easier to vibrate to "good” than to vi
brate to “evil”. In this unfoldment, physics will become 
metaphysics, religion and science will merge into cosmic 
truth, medicine will become mind, and all divisions and 
errors of human “believing” will merge into the "Light of 
Understanding”. 

Teaching and learning will undergo great advances. 
Transferring of conscious knowledge will be possible, and 
knowledge will also be drawn directly from the Universal 
Mind. Art, music and architecture will reach heights of 
expression and perfection never before attained on earth. 

 

267.

All mankind will place less emphasis on the physical and 
more and more emphasis on the mental and spiritual. It 
will be a period of great joy and greatly accelerated progress 
in which many advanced individuals, with the help of 
their spacebrothers, will permanently ascend back into 
the higher dimensions of life — “And the earth shall be filled 
with the Glory of God, as the waters cover the sea.” 

CHAPTER XXXII.

PUBLISHER’S INTERVIEW WITH THE AUTHORS. 

A after reading the manuscript of our Flying Saucer 
Pilgrimage, our publisher objected that we did not ex
press enough conclusions”. He asked if we would 
mind being interviewed as to our “conclusions.” We agreed, 
and the following represents a summary of stenographic 
notes on the interview which resulted. The symbol “Q” 
is used to designate the questions asked by our publisher’s 
representative. 

Q' Helen and Bryant Reeve, you two certainly have 
had an unusual experiencel We feel that many people 
would give a great deal to have been able to do just 
what you did — follow the trail of the flying saucers 
wherever they led. We also feel you have done a dili
gent, openminded and forthright job of it. We are 
grateful you decided to share your pilgrimage with 
others and not just keep the whole thing to your
selves — as you told us you were tempted to do. 

However, we feel that your readers would be in
terested in the answers to a few questions. Would you 
mind if our stenographer takes notes on the proceed
ings? 

Helen Reeve. Sounds like one of those court procedures! 
You know — where they solemnly warn the victims that 
everything they say may be used against them! 

Bryant Reeve. Go ahead! If you have in mind any ques
tions which were not asked us in Old Mexico, all power 
to you. Of course down there if the interpreter did not 
catch your reply, he simply made up a reply of his own 
and you never knew the difference. 

Q. Well, I assure you this is no inquisition only 
a friendly chat. Helen Reeve, may we please start with 
you? The first question is is it actually true that 
spaceships and spacepeople are coming to earth? You 

realize, of course, that many people still think this is — 
shall we say — a “magnificent obsession”. 

H.R. Please realize that the main purpose of our pil
grimage was to find the answer to that question for 
ourselves. There was so much saucer smoke that we 
wanted to find the fire. We found it, at least so far 
as we are concerned. We found — to our own satisfac
tion — that it is true! We know how utterly fantastic 
and impossible it can seem to people at first. My hus
band was an outstanding skeptic to start with. My at
titude was — let us either prove it or disprove it and 
forget it. Personally I am convinced that spaceships 
and spacepeople are coming to the earth at the present 
time. 

Q. It rather takes one’s breath away! 

H.R. Yes, it does. It can almost floor a person at first. 
But one gradually gets used to the idea. 

Q. Bryant Reeve, you are an engineer. How do you 

feel about it? 

B.R. The spaceships are coining to earth — sure enough 
— and I feel wonderful about it. I am glad we could 
make this trip and find out the facts for ourselves. It 
is hard to convey such a tremendous truth to someone 
else. We are not trying to convince anyone else at all. 
Everyone will have to learn the truth for himself — 
individually. There is a certain degree of receptivity 
that enters the picture. No receptivity — no saucers! 
Of course this is true in the learning of any subject. 

Q. Is this then just a normal truth to you now — the 

fact that spaceships are coming to the earth? 

H.R. Yes, and it is now “normal” to most of our friends. 
Many of us have gone beyond the point where the phys
ical manifestation of saucers is the important thing. 
The important thing is the implications. 

Q. Can we save that item for later? I refer to the 
implications. 

B.R. Surely. May I say this relative to learning the 

actuality of saucers. As we see it, the public is confused 
on this point for two main reasons. First, the public 
is used to turning to “authoritative” sources to lay down 
the truth — the law — for them on any matter. In this 
case the space phenomena are simply beyond the range 
of the usual authorities. The authorities, while they 
possess much information, cannot fit it into an accept
able threedimensional pattern to give to the public. 
Second, these space phenomena are not entirely three
dimensional in nature. As stated before, they have a 
physical aspect and a supraphysical aspect. This is 
just too much for most people — including the author
ities. The only way we learned anything about the 
subject was by getting in touch with the individuals 
having saucer experiences including O.S.C. experi
ences. 

Q. The next important question is, are the beings 
in the spaceships friendly or hostile? 

B.R. We are glad you asked that question. They are 
friendly. They are even more than that. They feel 
a responsibility and a duty toward the earth and the 
children of earth. Some of them, but not all of them, 
lived on earth at one time or another. They are our 
elder brothers who have progressed to positions of 
cosmic responsibility as Guardians of the planets. 

H.R. In that connection, I like the point that Desmond 
Leslie has so often made namely, that if they were 
enemies they could have wiped us out in one after
noon — long ago. 

Q Then you do not think there are any hostile or 
illintentioned beings in outerspace? 

B.R. We did not say thatl It is important to under
stand the situation. There may be some illintentioned 
beings in outerspace. As we see it, outerspace or "con
sciousness unlimited” can contain anything that man 
can conceive of. But no illintentioned beings can get 
past the Guardians of our planets and of our solar 

system. That is why the spaceships are so important 
to us. 

Q. When you refer to “saucerers” — as you call them 
— do you refer only to those mentioned in your manu
script? 

B.R. No, there are many more. Some are known to the 
public and some are not. Many of them shun publicity. 
We refer to these as the "unknown saucerers”. We 
found many of them everywhere. 

Q. You hint at a saucer "underground” in your 
manuscript. Is there such a thing? 

H.R. Yes. There is a saucer underground. It seems to 
extend around the world — a fraternity of those inter
ested in saucers and having saucer experiences which 
they discuss only with kindred newage souls. 

Q. What do you think of science fiction and of comic 

strips as applied to saucers and spacepeople? 

H.R. We feel that many of the cosmic concepts they 
present are inspired by the spacebeings themselves to 
prepare world thought for the new age. However, the 
writers and artists are wrong about one thing and that 
is their emphasis on war and fighting in outerspace. 
This does more harm than good. But today’s young
sters are worth observing. They have none of the re
sistance to cosmic ideas that their parents have. Many 
of them are new age souls. 

Q. Do some of the saucerers know about the supra

physical aspects of saucers but refrain from mention
ing it in public? 

B.R. Yes, some of them but not all of them. They are 
afraid the public "can’t take it” — and are not ready 
for such cosmic truths. Personally we feel the time 
has come to speak up without fear or favor — "let the 
chips fall where they may!” 

Q. Did you run across any fakes — any fake saucerers? 

B.R. Yes, unfortunately we did run across a few would
be saucerers that privately we considered to be unreliable fakes if you wish. We also discovered some 
obviously faked photographs. However, all of this 
was the exception and not the rule. In fact it was a 
minor part of our total experience but it did teach us 
to be careful. There is an old saying that something 
has to be good in order to attract imitators! 

Q. Have you any favorite saucerers? 

B.R. No. They are all different with different na
tures, education and social status. Their experiences 
have been different. We feel that each and every one 
is doing his part in waking up humanity to the fact 
that other worlds are watching. 

H.R. Possibly we should bring up one thing we feel is 
hard to tolerate. It is for any saucerer to hold up his 
own little cup of revelation and proclaim to the world, 
This is it. This is all of cosmic truth. I am the only 
true revelatorl” Anyone who does that is not telling 
the world what cosmic truth is but what a conceited 
egotist he himself is. That sort of thing is hard to take. 
We like the saucerers who can say, “I don’t know” on oc
casion. 

QMany people think the saucerers are motivated by 
moneymaking, that the whole thing is a “racket” to 
make money by books, photographs and lectures. Would 
you please comment on this? 

H.R. Is it not true that certain people will always at
tribute ulterior motives to any activity? It is too bad 
that some of these people do not go and live with the 
saucerers long enough to find out the truth. There is 
not a humanly wealthy man among the saucerers, but 
some of them are spiritual giants. 

BRIf anyone wants to make money they should leave 
saucers alone maybe try science fiction. There has 
been no noteworthy financial return to either the 
authors of saucer books or to saucer lecturers that we 
know of. The sincere saucerers publicize their experi
ences because they feel it is a public duty for them to 

do so. If they break even financially they are fortu
nate. One cannot make a business out of saucers. Peo
ple have tried and failed. Always remember this. The 
message behind the saucers is an unpopular message to 
many people. It does not exactly pat us on the back 
and flatter us. There is nothing in the entire saucer 
picture that lends itself to financial exploitation. 

Q. We understand that most people who take an active interest in saucers experience their share of ridicule. 
Mrs. R. how did you people fare on this score? 

H.R. We were called plenty of names — and in diverse languages! Often this happened behind our 
backs. One of the really terrific appellations applied 
to us was “psychoceramics.” We were referred to as 
psychoceramics! 

Q. I don’t quite understand. What do you mean by 

that? 

.R. Psychoceramics is merely newage for "crackpots”! 
Mr. Reeve. Can’t we just disregard and complete
ly ignore the entire saucer business? 

B.R. Certainly. That is everybody’s privilege. Many 
people do disregard it because it is too much for them. 
They are engrossed in material things. They do not 
want anything else or have time for anything else. 
We should not criticize them for this. We all know the 
story of the man who was asked why he was digging a 
ditch. He replied, “I dig the ditch to get the money 
to buy the food to get the strength to dig the ditch.” 
That is what life is for some people. Such people automatically classify themselves as not belonging to the 
unfolding new age. 

The saucer phenomena, as we see it, belongs to 
those who just cannot help being interested and intrigued by such things. It leads thought to the higher 
realms of life. If you grab a saucer by the tail and 
hang on long enough, it will take you literally "out 
of this world”, out of the little threedimensional view 

of life. The saucers themselves are not the important 
things. They are only one form of cosmic transporta
tion! The important thing is the higher realms of life 
and our desire to know them, understand them and 
reach them. This type of interest and desire takes one 
out of the “zombie” class and places one in the new 
age category. One of these days this earth is going to 
belong to the “newagers”. 

Q. Is it possible to disregard the supraphysical aspects 
of saucers — stick to the physical? 

That is the way to start. Some researchers are 
desperately trying to stick to the physical. They are 
literally afraid to go any farther. But it is not enough 
and it is a waste of time to try to f»t higher dimensional 
phenomena into a threedimensional mold. It can
not be done. Many are beginning to realize this. 

Q. Do you feel there is a possibility of the saucers just 
going away so we can forget about them? 

H.R. No. We feel that some individuals and even gov
ernments are hoping this will happen. 

B.R. We see no chance of that because the reasons be
hind their coming have not been resolved. 

Q. I feel that some of your statements regarding the 
abilities of the spacebeings to read our minds are rath
er startling, if not a bit terrifying. Have we no privacy 
any more? 

B.R. I am afraid not. Not from these beings if they 
wish to know anything. Both our good points and bad 
points are an open book to them. This applies to in
dividuals and groups of individuals and even govern
ments, in fact to our whole civilization. Telepathy is 
a norm to them. Other beings are watching this civi
lization, whether we like it or not. 

Q. Before I neglect it, can you suggest a short reading 
course by which one can familiarize himself with saucers 
and their implications? 

B.R. We understand that if we include foreign language books there are something like a hundred dif
ferent saucer books, and we have not been able to read 
all of them ourselves. Helen, what would you suggest? 

H.R. No doubt there are many good saucer books, and 
people can look them over and choose what appeals to 
them. However, if anyone picks up an advanced sauc
er book, that is one dealing with the supraphysical 
aspects, before he reads some A.B.C. books, it will be 
unfortunate. He is sure to get cosmic indigestion! One 
should start with a book which gives plenty of sightings 
in the physical realm and then progress step by step to 
the higher aspects. The book list at the end of our 
book should be helpful, and our pilgrimage story men
tions some good representative books. 

Q. Mr. Reeve, have you anything to add to this? 

B.R. What I cannot understand is how anyone expects 
to become a saucer “expert” overnight. Here is a 
subject that is greater than all of our sciences combin
ed, a pioneer subject of cosmic magnitude, one which 
may shake everything that can be shaken, and people 
expect to know all about it by reading a book or two. 
It is a tremendous study. I should also like to suggest 
that students broaden their viewpoint by reading books 
with a cosmic outlook — something to get their minds 
out of a threedimensional rut. We have also indicated 
a few helpful books of this nature in our book list, but 
there are many others. 

Q. Mrs. Reeve, here is another question for you. What 
do you consider your biggest thrill on your saucer pil
grimage? 

H.R. Our pilgrimage was one exciting thrill after 
another. Meeting so many wonderful people interested 
in saucers everywhere we went was itself a thrill. 
Talking to some of them through Mexican inter
preters was a thrill. The night we spent on “saucer 
location” and saw what we thought to be saucers from 
our perch on the rickety fence was a thrill until we 

found the saucers were just fireflies. I think one of 
the most exciting times was in Mexico when my hus
band was lecturing to a group of Mexicans and asked 
the question as to whether anybody in the audience 
had seen a space man, and Salvador Villanueva Me
dina raised his hand. That was one "for the book” 
and I shall never forget it. 

Q. Mr. Reeve will you tell us your biggest thrill on 
the pilgrimage? 

B.R. Well, as Helen just said, there were a lot of 
thrills. Seeing our first great spaceship near Twenty
Nine Palms, California, was a tremendous thrill. Talk
ing privately to those who had outstanding saucer ex
periences was a thrill. Reading O.S.C. messages was 
also thrilling. But I believe the greatest thrill of all 
for me came in San Diego when with the help of Mark 
Probert we talked to his Inner Circle! For the first 
time on our entire pilgrimage I felt that we personally 
had made a contact with advanced intelligences who 
could give us worthwhile information from a cosmic 
viewpoint. We even discussed technical matters on a 

cosmic basis, and as an engineer I somehow felt that 
these answers were "in the groove”, as we say. If others 
feel differently that is their privilege. 

Thank you. Now another question. Do you feel 
that some of the O.S.C. efforts to contact spacebeings 
savor of spiritualism or spiritism ? 

B.R. That is a good question, and I think we must face 
such things squarely. It seems to me it depends on 
what we mean by these terms. To some people these 
terms conjure up visions of darkened rooms and eerie 
noises and frightening phenomena. Someone inquires 
if Aunt Emma or little Johnny are well and happy in 
the great beyond and are invariably assured that they 
are. As we see it, some of these things are just fakes 
designed to fleece the gullible. Others are based on 
some degree of sensitivity on the part of the operator 

 

or medium. The whole picture generally is of a low 
grade activity pitched to personal problems and some
times doubtful motives. 

Such things naturally have little scientific interest 
and no cosmic interest, and they could be completely 
ignored if it were not for one thing. Some of these ac
tivities do point to an important principle — that of 
cosmic communication by what is called mediumship. 
In this day and age when man is seriously endeavoring 
to explore outerspace, how can we afford to overlook 
any principle of communication with those living in 
other dimensions of life? The spacebeings assure us 
that no instrument is better than the human body, 
when properly conditioned, for O.S.C. — outerspace 
communication. None of us condemn the principle of 
the telephone merely because telephones can be used 
for lowgrade activities. Over a telephone may go de
based messages or messages of the sublimest import. 
The same applies to a sensitive human body when used 
as a cosmic telephone. We must stop fearing and sneer
ing at principles we do not understand. We must cher
ish them and develop them scientifically. What we 
need is a great expansion in our scientific study of 
parapsychology and similar subjects. To us the scientific attitude is the correct attitude. 

Mrs. Reeve what is the greatest thing you learned 
on your trip. 

R. I believe the greatest thing I learned is to keep 
openminded and always ready to listen. We have 
seen many people who find some little part of truth, and 
then proclaim, “This is it. This is Life, this is Truth.” 
Like the woman who said, “Don’t bother to give me 
the facts, my mind is made up!” Cosmic truth is pour
ing into our earth as never before but only those who 
will listen will learn. 

Now, Mr. Reeve, it is your turn on this one. What 
was the greatest thing you learned on the pilgrimage? 

278.

 

B.R. That life in outerspace exists in “octaves of fre
quencies — that outerspace is not empty — but is 
filled with life, form, color, activities, yes, and even with 
great unseen civilizations and cultures, worlds with
out end. These are not nebulous, but real, solid, fac
tual and glorious to those with, the necessary tunein 
ability. The entrance to these worlds is not through 
distance in light years but via the “frequency elevator”, 
by the conversion of the frequency and mode of vibra
tion of energy. 

Q. That is wonderful, but is it just theory? 

B.R. It is not new knowledge. It is lost knowledge 
coming back to us. I know as an engineer that many 
people have to have “theories". It is the only way 
that some can learn. I have no objection to others 
calling it a theory. As for me, it is an important phase 
of Cosmic Truth. 

Q. Mrs. Reeve, what surprised you most on your 
pilgrimage? 

H.R. Here in this generation we have been privileged 
to glimpse the opening of the doors of human knowl
edge to interplanetary life, interplanetary governments 
and cosmic life itself. And yet most of us do not rea
lize what is happening, nor do we appreciate it or 
welcome it. This is indeed surprisingl 

Q. Mr. Reeve, how about you? 

B.R. I think what surprised us most, after we began 
to get the picture of the meaning of the spaceships 
and outerspace, was the strange manner in which this 
stupendous thing was becoming known. It was not 
coming in the front door. It was leaking into human 
awareness coming in by the back door. 

This great knowledge was coming to humanity al
most through what we might term a saucer “under
ground composed of a relatively small band of pio
neers sturdy independent thinkers who refused 
to be dismayed by officialdom or stopped by the scorn 

and ridicule of the majority. 

People still celebrate and honor Columbus’ dis
covery of America and build monuments to him. Yet 
the discovery of a new continent was as nothing com
pared to the recent realization by the saucerers that 
other planets are inhabited and that what we consider 
empty space itself teems with life of far greater progress 
and intelligence than we have. And yet here on earth 
this knowledge has to face the hostility and scorn of 
those in high places. It has to come through the hum
ble, little people who are not afraid. How dead can 
we become in our materialistic and threedimensional 
ignorance? That was what surprised me most. 

Q. Now, why are the spacebeings coming to earth 

at this time? 

H.R. You realize that that is the 64 billion dollar question! 

Q. Yes, I know it is. That is why I have saved it until 

about the last. 

B.R. Could we please correct the question a bit? 

Q. Yes, certainly. 

B.R. Saucer research indicates that the spacebeings 

have been coming to earth through countless ages. But 
now they are here — in the upper atmosphere of our 
earth — in large quantities, literally millions of them. 
It seems to us the real question then is, why are they 
here in such great numbers at the present time? 

Q. Thank you. Then let us rephrase the question. 

Why are the spacebeings coming to earth in such great 
numbers at the present time? Seriously, we feel your 
readers will be especially interested in this question 
and your answer. 

B.R. That is just the trouble! Everyone wants the an
swer. So do we. But after all of our efforts, all of our 
researching, we are not sure we have the forthright 
answer — the kind of "absolute” answer that most people want. 

280.

 

Q. But you must have a lot of ideas on the subject. 

Can you give us the benefit of those? 

B.R. Yes, certainly. But we have no absolute answer. 
It is essential to make that clear to start with. In fact 
we made a collection of over a dozen different answers 
from all sources. We have divided them, for the sake 
of clarity into four groups. Here they are: 

A. CONTRIBUTORY REASONS. 

1. Man’s efforts to communicate with outerspace by 
radio and radar signals brought the spaceships to investi
gate the earth and to see what is was all about. 

2. The spacepeople have come on missions of scien
tific exploration and to record the cosmic history of this 
civilization. 

3. They have come to reveal themselves to us gradually 
and to awaken us to the fact that outerspace is inhabited. 

B. ATOMIC ENERGY REASONS. 

1. Our atom bomb explosions have disturbed the be
ings who live in outerspace. 

2. Our atom bomb explosions and experiments have en
dangered the earth itself and have brought the planetary 
Guardians to prevent us from injuring the schoolroom (the 
earth). They will intervene if necessary to prevent our 
damaging the earth. 

3. Our atom bomb explosions and experiments have en
dangered humanity on the earth and therefore have brought 
the planetary Guardians. They are standing by waiting to 
see if this civilization is going to commit suicide, either 
quickly by an atomic war or slowly by supposed safe ex
periments or usages. In this case they will endeavor to 
rescue a remnant out of which a new peaceful civilization 
can be built on earth. 

C. NATURAL EVENTS SO CALLED.

1. This is the Aquarian Age of the earth. This means 

a water age. The earth will naturally experience great 
storms, rains, floods and earthquakes. The space ships are 
standing by to help humanity through such critical events. 

D. COSMIC EVENT OR GREAT ACCIDENT.

1. We face attack by conquering beings in outerspace 
equipped with spaceships. The planetary Guardians have 
assembled to protect us. 

2. The earth will experience a “polar flip” — that is a 
change of the axis upon which it rotates. This will bring 
the polar ice caps into the temperate or tropical regions 
causing great floods and changes in climate, vegetation 
and life. The spaceships stand by to assist us. 

3. The earth is moving into a new orbit, and during 
this critical change the spacebeings are standing by to as
sist us. 

4. The earth is entering a new radiation or vibratory 
frequency. This is due to our entire solar system reaching a 
new position in space and a new relationship to other great 
cosmic bodies and suns. This represents a cosmic upgrad
ing for the earth and will affect every phase of earth life. 
This will be a time of great housecleaning on the earth and 
the prelude to a wonderful, peaceful new age. The space
ships stand by to assist. 

5. The earth faces a very destructive cosmic radiation 
which will expand the core of the earth and cause a re
melting of the earth. The spaceships stand by to counteract 
this and to participate in rescue missions if needed. 

6. The earth faces great cosmic dust storms. The ships 
stand by to counteract these and to help us. 

Q. That is certainly a formidable list. Have you 

any comments? Do you believe some of these reasons 
are wrong or some of them right? Or are some of them 
better than others? 

B.R. Yes, we do. But we do not believe we should com
ment on them at this time. We do not feel we have 
the right to influence anyone. Everyone should be 
free to study the matter and decide for themselves. 

QFair enough. But possibly you will see fit to an
swer this question. We note quite a variety of reasons. 
Do you feel that the variety of reasons given by dif
ferent students tends to invalidate them? 

B.R. No. Most students give a combination of reas
ons, for example, the atomic explosions plus some form 
of impending natural or cosmic event. Considering 
the magnitude of the subject there is a noteworthy 
overall agreement regarding some tremendous cosmic 
event in the offing which has brought the spaceships 
m such quantities. But there is a diversity of thought 
as to the exact nature of this great event. 

Q. When you say “in the offing”, does this refer to 
events millions of years from now, or centuries from 
now, or decades from now? 

B.R. I would say decades, something within this cen
tury. 

QMrs. Reeve, do you feel the overall picture of the 
coming of the spaceships is “good" or “bad”? 

H.R. Oh, very good, very progressive and inspiring! 

QI am a bit confused. Here is all this talk of cata
clysms and great cosmic accidents and rescue missions 
on the one hand, and a marvelous “golden age” on 
the other hand. Is there not a conflict? 

H.R. That is a good point. Our understanding is that 
a period of cosmic housecleaning comes first on the 
earth The destructive and nonprogressive elements 
which now dominate the earth will first have to be re
moved. Then will come the golden age. 

Are the conclusions from your pilgrimage quite 
definite and fixed? 

you started out to learn? 

H.R. It was certainly a success to us — but we found 
vastly more than we were looking fori 

B.R. We started out to get “yes” or “no” answers to 
certain questions about flying saucers. First and fore
most we wanted to know if it was true that they were 
coming to earth. Then we wanted to know what the 
spacepeople were like and why they were coming. We 
obtained these answers, at least to our satisfaction. But 
then a strange thing happened. Every time we obtained 
an answer to a question, we discovered that a dozen 
more questions popped up in its place. We began to 
to feel like the mule with the wisp of hay always in 
front of him just out of reach. It reminded us of that 
favorite saying of the Maharaja Natcha: “All questions 
pose more questions and all answers are personal opini
ons — and the only sound rule and reply to life’s prob
lems is to question nothing but to face all situations 
with detachment!”* 

Q. Now one last question. Is your pilgrimage finish

ed? 

H.R. No. We feel it has just begun. Our appetite for 
knowledge of the spaceships, the spacepeople and 
outerspace itself has been whetted by our trip. We 
want to know more. The quest for knowledge of 
outerspace has turned into the quest for knowledge 
of LIFE itself — and that never ends! 

END-

A WORD ABOUT THE AUTHORS.

Bryant Reeve was born in Princeton, Illinois, U.S.A. He was 
named Bryant because of a family relationship to the American poet 
William Cullen Bryant. 

He has lived an unusual, exciting and varied life. When a youth 
he lived on the English Channel Island of Guernsey for six months, 
went to school in Dresden, Germany and travelled extensively with 
his parents in England, France, Belgium, Holland and Germany. 
Returning to the United States he attended school in Chicago, Illinois 
and then the Hotchkiss School at Lakeville, Connecticut. He is a 
graduate mechanical engineer of both the Sheffield Scientific School 
of Yale University and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 
He was elected to the Sigma Xi Honorary Society. 

Always interested in travel he spent an adventurous summer on 
the rugged Labradore Coast, and another bicycling around England, 
Scotland and Wales with a friend. During World War I he served 
as a Lieutenant and Captain of Engineers, going overseas with the 
311th Engineers, 86th Division. Since then he has been active in his 
profession and has held positions of technical and executive responsibil
ity in a number of well known American industries. He retired in 
1954, but is still actively engaged in research work. 

He and his wife Helen have for years been interested in meta
physical studies and they have a large acquaintance with many in
dividuals who have attained to advanced heights in proving metaphysical principles. They have also probed deeply into the powers 
of the adepts of the Far East. When the flyingsaucer phenomena 
first came to their attention, it never occurred to them that there 
might exist a connection between this and certain metaphysical con
cepts and laws with which they were familiar. As their investigation 
continued, however, the relationship became clearer and clearer to 
them, and forms a major portion of the theme of this book. The 
Reeves insist that saucers and outerspace phenomena cannot be un
derstood by threedimensional thinking, but can be explained and 
understood as thought is expanded to metaphysical or cosmic levels. 
They are actively continuing their research, and they are in constant 
touch with their many "saucer” friends by correspondence. 

 

Copyright 1957, by 
Bryant Reeve.